Dvd Sony Dvp Ns400d

DVP-NS400D RMT-D128A/D128P

SERVICE MANUAL

US Model Canadian Model AEP Model UK Model E Model Brazil Model Argentina Model Mexico Model

Photo: Black type

SPECIFICATIONS System

General

Laser Signal format system

Semiconductor laser NTSC PAL (AEP, UK)

Power requirements

Power consumption

Audio characteristics Frequency response

Signal-to-noise ratio (S/N ratio) Harmonic distortion Dynamic range Wow and flutter

Dimensions (approx.) Mass (approx.) Operating temperature Operating humidity

DVD (PCM 96 kHz): 2 Hz to 44 kHz (±1.0 dB) DVD (PCM 48 kHz): 2 Hz to 22 kHz (±0.5 dB) CD: 2 Hz to 20 kHz (±0.5 dB) 115 dB (LINE OUT L/R (AUDIO) jacks only) 0.003 % DVD: 103 dB CD: 99 dB Less than detected value (± 0.001% W PEAK)

120 V AC, 60 Hz (US, CND, MX) 110 to 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz (E, BR) 220 to 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz (AEP, UK, AR) 13 W (US, CND, E, MX, AR, BR) 14 W (AEP, UK) 430 × 74 × 256 mm (17 × 3 × 101/8 in.) (w/h/d) incl. projecting parts 2.7 kg (5lb) 5 °C to 35 °C (41 °F to 95 °F) 25 % to 80 %

Supplied accessories • Audio/video cord (pinplug × 3 y pinplug × 3) (1) • Remote commander (remote) RMT-D128A (1) (US, CND, E, MX, AR, BR) RMT-D128P (1) (AEP, UK) • Size AA (R6) batteries (2)

Outputs Jack name

Jack type

Maximum output level

Load impedance

LINE OUT L/R (AUDIO)

Phono jack

2 Vrms (at 50 kilohms)

Over 10 kilohms

DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL)

Optical output jack

-18 dBm

Wave length: 660 nm

DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL)

Phono jack

0.5 VP-P

75 ohms terminated

LINE OUT (VIDEO)

Phono jack

1.0 VP-P

75 ohms, sync negative

S VIDEO OUT

4-pin mini DIN

Luminance signal: 1.0 VP-P Color signal: 0.286 VP-P (NTSC) 0.3 VP-P (PAL)

75 ohms, sync negative

Specifications and design are subject to change without notice. • Abbreviation AR : Argentina BR : Brazilian CND : Canadian MX : Mexican

75 ohms terminated

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT(Y, PB, PR) (US, CND, E, MX, AR, BR)

Phono jack

Y: 1.0 VP-P PB, PR: 0.7 VP-P

75 ohms, sync negative 75 ohms

5.1CH OUTPUT

Phono jack

2 Vrms (at 50 kilohms)

Over 10 kilohms

CD/DVD PLAYER

SAFETY CHECK-OUT After correcting the original service problem, perform the following safety checks before releasing the set to the customer:

2. Check the interboard wiring to ensure that no wires are “pinched” or contact high-wattage resistors.

LEAKAGE TEST The AC leakage from any exposed metal part to earth ground and from all exposed metal parts to any exposed metal part having a return to chassis, must not exceed 0.5 mA (500 microamperes). Leakage current can be measured by any one of three methods.

3. Look for unauthorized replacement parts, particularly transistors, that were installed during a previous repair. Point them out to the customer and recommend their replacement.

1. A commercial leakage tester, such as the Simpson 229 or RCA WT-540A. Follow the manufacturers' instructions to use these instruments.

4. Look for parts which, though functioning, show obvious signs of deterioration. Point them out to the customer and recommend their replacement.

2. A battery-operated AC milliammeter. The Data Precision 245 digital multimeter is suitable for this job.

1. Check the area of your repair for unsoldered or poorly-soldered connections. Check the entire board surface for solder splashes and bridges.

3. Measuring the voltage drop across a resistor by means of a VOM or battery-operated AC voltmeter. The “limit” indication is 0.75V, so analog meters must have an accurate lowvoltage scale. The Simpson 250 and Sanwa SH-63Trd are examples of a passive VOM that is suitable. Nearly all battery operated digital multimeters that have a 2V AC range are suitable. (See Fig. A)

5. Check the line cord for cracks and abrasion. Recommend the replacement of any such line cord to the customer. 6. Check the B+ voltage to see it is at the values specified. 7. Check the antenna terminals, metal trim, “metallized” knobs, screws, and all other exposed metal parts for AC leakage. Check leakage as described below.

To Exposed Metal Parts on Set

0.15 µF

1.5 kΩ

AC voltmeter (0.75 V)

Earth Ground

Fig. A. Using an AC voltmeter to check AC leakage.

CLASS 3B LASER LUOKAN 3B LASER LASERKLASS 3B

WARNING!!

CAUTION: The use of optical instrument with this product will increase eye hazard.

WHEN SERVICING, DO NOT APPROACH THE LASER EXIT WITH THE EYE TOO CLOSELY. IN CASE IT IS NECESSARY TO CONFIRM LASER BEAM EMISSION, BE SURE TO OBSERVE FROM A DISTANCE OF MORE THAN 25 cm FROM THE SURFACE OF THE OBJECTIVE LENS ON THE OPTICAL PICK-UP BLOCK.

CAUTION Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

SAFETY-RELATED COMPONENT WARNING!!

ATTENTION AU COMPOSANT AYANT RAPPORT À LA SÉCURITÉ!

COMPONENTS IDENTIFIED BY MARK 0 OR DOTTED LINE WITH MARK 0 ON THE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AND IN THE PARTS LIST ARE CRITICAL TO SAFE OPERATION. REPLACE THESE COMPONENTS WITH SONY PARTS WHOSE PART NUMBERS APPEAR AS SHOWN IN THIS MANUAL OR IN SUPPLEMENTS PUBLISHED BY SONY.

LES COMPOSANTS IDENTIFIÉS PAR UNE MARQUE 0 SUR LES DIAGRAMMES SCHÉMATIQUES ET LA LISTE DES PIÈCES SONT CRITIQUES POUR LA SÉCURITÉ DE FONCTIONNEMENT. NE REMPLACER CES COMPOSANTS QUE PAR DES PIÈCES SONY DONT LES NUMÉROS SONT DONNÉS DANS CE MANUEL OU DANS LES SUPPLÉMENTS PUBLIÉS PAR SONY.

–2–

TABLE OF CONTENTS Section

Title

Page

Section

GENERAL Getting Started .............................................................. Hookups ........................................................................ Playing Discs ................................................................. Searching for a Scene ................................................... Viewing Information About the Disc .............................. Sound Adjustments ....................................................... Enjoying Movies ............................................................ Using Various Additional Functions .............................. Settings and Adjustments ............................................. Additional Information ...................................................

2.

DISASSEMBLY

2-1. 2-2. 2-3. 2-4. 2-5. 2-6. 2-7. 2-8. 2-9. 2-10. 2-11. 2-12. 2-13. 2-14.

Case Removal ............................................................... MB-98 Board Removal .................................................. Rear Panel Removal (Except AEP, UK) ........................ Rear Panel, ER-15 Board Removal (AEP, UK) ............. Tray Cover Removal ...................................................... Front Panel Removal ..................................................... Power Block Removal ................................................... Mechanism Deck Removal ............................................ AI-23 Board Removal .................................................... Tray Removal ................................................................. Loading Motor (M001), MS-81 Board Removal ............ Optical Pick-up Removal ............................................... Internal Views ................................................................ Circuit Boards Location .................................................

3.

BLOCK DIAGRAMS

3-1. 3-2. 3-3. 3-4. 3-5. 3-6. 3-7. 3-8. 3-9. 3-10.

Overall Block Diagram ................................................... RF/Servo Block Diagram ............................................... Signal Processor Block Diagram .................................. System Control Block Diagram ..................................... Video Block Diagram ..................................................... Audio Block Diagram ..................................................... Interface Control Block Diagram ................................... Power 1 Block Diagram ................................................. Power 2 Block Diagram ................................................. Power 3 Block Diagram .................................................

4.

PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

4-1. 4-2.

Frame Schematic Diagram ............................................ Printed Wiring Boards and Schematic Diagrams ......... MS-81 (LOADING) Printed Wiring Board and Schematic Diagram ....................................................... MB-98 Printed Wiring Board ......................................... MB-98 (RF AMP, SERVO) Schematic Diagram ............ MB-98 (ARP, SERVO DSP) Schematic Diagram .......... MB-98 (AV DECODER) Schematic Diagram ................ MB-98 (BNR) Schematic Diagram ................................ MB-98 (DRIVE) Schematic Diagram ............................ MB-98 (SYSTEM CONTROL) Schematic Diagram ....................................................... MB-98 (CLOCK GENERATOR) Schematic Diagram ....................................................... MB-98 (AUDIO DSP) Schematic Diagram .................... MB-98 (D/A CONVERTER) Schematic Diagram .......... AI-23 Printed Wiring Board ........................................... AI-23 (VIDEO BUFFER) Schematic Diagram ............... AI-23 (AUDIO AMP) Schematic Diagram ..................... AI-23 (5.1CH AUDIO AMP) Schematic Diagram .......... AI-23 (IF CON) Schematic Diagram ............................. ER-15 Printed Wiring Board (AEP, UK) ........................

Page

ER-15 (EURO AV) Schematic Diagram (AEP, UK) ....... HS13S0E Printed Wiring Board (AEP, UK, AR) ........... HS13S0E Schematic Diagram (AEP, UK, AR) ............. HS13S0F Printed Wiring Board (E, BR) ....................... HS13S0F Schematic Diagram (E, BR) ......................... HS13S0U Printed Wiring Board (US, CND, MX) .......... HS13S0U Schematic Diagram (US, CND, MX) ............ TOP-244U Printed Wiring Board (US, CND) ................ TOP-244U Schematic Diagram (US, CND) ..................

Service Note ............................................................................ 4

1.

Title

1-3 1-3 1-7 1-9 1-10 1-11 1-13 1-14 1-15 1-18

2-1 2-1 2-1 2-1 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-4 2-5

3-1 3-3 3-5 3-7 3-9 3-11 3-13 3-15 3-17 3-19

5.

IC PIN FUNCTION DESCRIPTION

5-1.

System Control Pin Function (MB-98 Board IC103) .................................................... 5-1

6.

TEST MODE

6-1. 6-2. 6-3. 6-4. 6-5. 6-6. 6-7. 6-8. 6-9. 6-10. 6-11.

General Description ...................................................... Starting Test Mode ........................................................ Syscon Diagnosis .......................................................... Drive Auto Adjustment .................................................. Drive Manual Operation ................................................ Mecha Aging ................................................................. Emergency History ........................................................ Version Information ....................................................... Video Level Adjustment ................................................ IF Con Self Diagnostic Function ................................... Troubleshooting .............................................................

7.

ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENT

7-1. 1. 7-2. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 7-3.

Power Supply Check ..................................................... HS13S0E/HS13S0F/HS13S0U/TOP-244U Boards ...... Adjustment of Video System ......................................... Video Level Adjustment ................................................ Checking S Video Output S-Y ....................................... Checking S Video Output S-C ....................................... Checking Component Video Output Y .......................... Checking Component Video Output B-Y ...................... Checking Component Video Output R-Y ...................... Checking RGB Output R ............................................... Checking RGB Output G ............................................... Checking RGB Output B ............................................... Adjustment Related Parts Arrangement .......................

8.

REPAIR PARTS LIST

8-1. Exploded Views ............................................................. 8-1-1. Case Assembly ........................................................ 8-1-2. Chassis Assembly .................................................... 8-1-3. Mechanism Deck Assembly ..................................... 8-2. Electrical Parts List .......................................................

4-3 4-5 4-5 4-7 4-11 4-13 4-15 4-17 4-19

•

4-21 4-23 4-25 4-27 4-29 4-31 4-33 4-35 4-37 4-39

–3–

4-41 4-43 4-45 4-47 4-49 4-51 4-53 4-55 4-57

Abbreviation AR : Argentina BR : Brazilian CND : Canadian MX : Mexican

6-1 6-1 6-1 6-5 6-7 6-10 6-10 6-11 6-11 6-11 6-18

7-1 7-1 7-2 7-2 7-2 7-2 7-2 7-3 7-3 7-3 7-3 7-4 7-6

8-1 8-1 8-3 8-5 8-6

SERVICE NOTE 1. DISASSEMBLY • This set can be disassembled in the order shown below.

Set

Case (Page 2-1)

Tray Cover (Page 2-2)

MB-98 Board (Page 2-1)

Front Panel (Page 2-2)

Mechanism Deck (Page 2-2)

Power Block (Page 2-2)

Tray (Page 2-3)

Rear Panel (Page 2-1)

Opticl Pick-up (Page 2-3)

Loading Motor (M001), MS-81 Board (Page 2-3)

–4–

AI-23 Board (Page 2-3)

ER-15 Board (AEP, UK) (Page 2-1)

2. DISC REMOVAL PROCEDURE (at POWER OFF)

1) Remove the case from the set. (Refer to 2-1) 2) Remove the MB-98 board. (Refer to 2-1) 3) Set the stand (with CK-106 board) as shown in Fig. 2.

1) Insert a tapering driver into the aperture of the unit bottom, and move the lever of chuck cam in the direction of the arrow A. (See Fig. 1) 2) Draw out the tray in the direction of the arrow B, and remove a disc. (See Fig. 1)

1 MB-98 board

4 Two screws (B3)

Aperture Lever of chuck cam

3 Connector (CN101)

B Tray

A 2 Stand (with CK-106 board)

Fig. 2 4) Set the Jig A board as shown in Fig. 3.

Fig. 1

3.

1 CK-105 board

HOW TO SERVICE MB-98 BOARD

• Jig (J-6090-107-A) Extension cable

2

Stand (with CK-106 Board) 4 Connector (CN109)

CK-105 board 3 Claw

Fig. 3

Nine flexible flat cables FFC 5P (EXCEPT DVP-NC600), FFC 9P, FFC 15P, FFC26P, FFC 9P (DVP-NS500P/NS700P), FFC 15P (DVP-NS400D), FFC 25P (EXCEPT DVP-NS300 J model), FFC 29P (DVP-NS300 J model)

–5–

4. HOW TO DISCRIMINATE MODEL TYPES IN AEP MODEL

5) Set the four flexible flat cables as shown in Fig. 4. 1 Three flexible flat cables (FFC26P: CN201/ FFC9P: CN202/ FFC5P: CN402)

3 Three connectors (FFC26P: CN102/ FFC9P: CN104/ FFC5P: CN106)

1) Start up the test mode, display “Test Mode Menu” as shown below on the monitor, and confirm the model name. Test Mode Menu 0. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Syscon Diagnosis Drive Auto Adjustment Drive Manual Operation Mecha Aging Emergency History Version Information Video Level Adjustment Exit: POWER Key

_ Model : DPX-14xxxx Revision : 1.xxxx Last Off: xx

4 Connector (FFC15P: CN110)

2 Flexible flat cables (FFC15P: CN201)

Model Display

Fig. 4

2) Confirm the model type with the menu “2-4 Model Type” in the test mode, then discriminate the model with referring the table shown below. (Refer to page 6-2 to confirm “2-4 Model Type”)

6) Set the MB-98 board as shown in Fig. 5, Fig.6. 4 Flexible flat cable (FFC15P: CN802)

Model Type Model Display

2 Flexible flat cable (FFC25P: CN801) 1 Connector (FFC25P: CN203)

AEP (DPX1411BM)

1

3

AEP (DPX1411HM)

1

3

DPX-1411CE

AEP (DPX1412BM)

1

4

DPX-1412CE

AEP (DPX1412HM)

1

4

DPX-1412CE

• Description about model name DPX14xxBM Color of set B : Black H : Titanium gray

3 Connector (FFC15P: CN301)

MB-98 board

Fig. 5

Fig. 6

–6–

DPX-1411CE

5. CONNECTION OF SERVICE JIG

AI-23 CN301

CN203

FFC15P CK-105 FFC26P (Used the set) FFC 9P (Used the set) Mechanism deck

FFC 5P (Used the set)

CN802

CN101

CN102

CN103

CN104

CN105

CN106

FFC26P FFC 9P FFC 5P

FFC25P CN801

CN201 CN202

MB-98

CN402 CN101 B to B Connector 15P

B to B Connector 15P CN403

CN202

FFC15P CN109

CN110

CN201

AI-23 CK-106 (Stand)

–7–

DVP-NS400D SECTION 1 GENERAL About this Manual • Instructions in this manual describe the controls on the remote. Yo u can also use the controls on the player if they have the same or similar names as those on the remote. • The meaning of the icons used in this manual is described below: Icon

Meaning

Icon

Functions available in DVD video mode Functions available in VIDEO CD mode

Meaning Functions available in music CD mode

z

This Player Can Play the Following Discs Format of discs DVD VIDEO

VIDEO CD

Music CD

The “DVD VIDEO” logo is a trademark.

Note

Region code

ALL

DVDs labeled will also play on this player. If you try to play any other DVD, the message “Playback prohibited by area limitations.” will appear on the TV screen. Depending on the DVD, no region code indication may be labeled even though playing the DVD is prohibited by area restrictions. X

Some playback operations of DVDs and VIDEO CDs may be intentionally set by software producers. Since this player plays DVDs and VIDEO CDs according to the disc contents the software producers designed, some playback features may not be available. Also, refer to the instructions supplied with the DVDs or VIDEO CDs.

Region code

MODEL NO.

DVP–XXXX

MADE IN JAPAN

On handling discs • To keep the disc clean, handle the disc by its edge. Do not touch the surface.

Note on playback operations of DVDs and VIDEO CDs .

CD/DVD PLAYER AC 00V 00Hz NO. 00W SONY CORPORATION

Notes about the Discs

Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs cannot be played on this player depending upon the recording quality or physical condition of the disc, or the characteristics of the recording device. Furthermore, the disc will not play if it has not been correctly finalized. For more information, see the operating instructions for the recording device.

Your player has a region code printed on the back of the unit and will only play DVDs labeled with identical region codes.

More convenient features

This section is extracted from instruction manual (3-067-120-11).

0-000-000-00

• Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight or heat sources such as hot air ducts, or leave it in a car parked in direct sunlight as the temperature may rise considerably inside the car. • After playing, store the disc in its case. On cleaning • Before playing, clean the disc with a cleaning cloth. Wipe the disc from the centre out.

Copyrights Example of discs that the player cannot play

This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents, other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation, and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.

The player cannot play the following discs: • CD-ROMs (PHOTO CDs included) • All CD-Rs other than music and VCD format CD-Rs • Data part of CD-Extras • DVD-ROMs • DVD Audio discs • HD layer on SACDs Also, the player cannot play the following discs: • A DVD with a different region code (page 79). • A disc recorded in a color system other than NTSC, such as PAL or SECAM (This player conforms to the NTSC color system). • A disc that has a non-standard shape (e.g., card, heart) • A disc with paper or stickers on it. • A disc that has the adhesive of cellophane tape or a sticker still left on it.

• Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, commercially available cleaners, or anti-static spray intended for vinyl LPs.

7

6

Front Panel Display

Index to Parts and Controls

When playing back a DVD For more information, refer to the pages indicated in parentheses.

Playing status

Disc type

Current chapter (44)

Front Pane l TITLE

DVD

CHAP

HOUR

SEC

MIN

PGM SHUFFLE DTS ANGLE REPEAT1 Digital A-B

Current play mode (35)

Current audio signal (49)

Playing time (44)

Current title (44)

Lights up when you can change the angle (54)

When playing back a VIDEO CD (PBC)

Disc type

A POWER switch/indicator (30) 2 DOLBY DIGITAL indicator Lights up when: - playing back a Dolby Digital soundtrack on the DVD - the disc is not inserted 3 BNR (Block Noise Reduction) button/ indicator (56) 4 SURROUND button/indicator (50) 5 Disc tray (30) 6 A (open/close) button (30) 7 ./> (previous/next) buttons (31) 8 C/X/x/c/ ENTER buttons (25) 9 TITLE button (33) q; DVD MENU button (33)

qa qs qd qf qg qh qj

O RETURN button (34) DISPLAY button (12) x (stop) button (30) X (pause) button (31, 62) H (play) button (30) Front panel display (9) (remote sensor) (14)

Playing status

VIDEO CD

MIN

CD

SEC

A-B PBC

Current play mode (35)

Current scene (44)

Playing time (44)

Lights up when playing back a VIDEO CD with PBC (34)

When playing back a CD or VIDEO CD (without PBC) Playing status TRACK

VIDEO CD CD

Disc type

INDEX

MIN

SEC

PGM SHUFFLE REPEAT1 A-B

Current play mode (35)

Current track and index (44)

Playing time (44)

continued

8

9

1-1

LINE OUT

DIGITAL OUT PCM/DTS/ DOLBY DIGITAL

S VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO OUT OUT

FRONT

REAR CENTER

2

4

5

3 6

7

8

9

L

VIDEO 1

1

PB

2

PR

COAXIAL OPTICAL

R-AUDIO 2-L

1 5.1CH OUTPUT

Y R-AUDIO 1-L

A B C D 5 6 7 H I

R

VIDEO 2

1 DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL) jack (21, 23, 24) 2 DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL) jack (21, 23, 24) 3 LINE OUT L/R (AUDIO) 1/2 jacks (15, 20, 23, 24) 4 LINE OUT (VIDEO) 1/2 jacks (17)

0

WOOFER

5 S VIDEO OUT 1/2 jacks (17) 6 COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks (17) 7 5.1CH OUTPUT jacks (21)

J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z wj wk wl e;

Z OPEN/CLOSE button (31)

Number buttons CLEAR button (35) ANGLE button (54) AUDIO button (48) PROGRAM button (35) SHUFFLE button (37) ./> PREV/NEXT buttons (31) c / C SEARCH/STEP buttons (40) H PLAY button (30) TITLE button (33) DISPLAY button (35) TV [/1 (on/standby) button (63) [/1 (on/standby) button (30) BNR (Block Noise Reduction) button (56) TV/VIDEO button (63) VOL +/– buttons (63) ENTER button SUBTITLE button (55) TIME/TEXT button (44) REPEAT button (37) INSTANT REPLAY button (31) SURROUND button (50) / y SCAN/SLOW buttons (40) X PAUSE button (31) x STOP button (30) DVD MENU button (33) C/X/x/c buttons (25) ENTER button O RETURN button (34)

y

Remote

Rear Panel

11

10

Guide to Control Menu Display

SURROUND (page 50)

Selects the surround functions.

ADVANCED (DVD only) (page

Checks the information (bit rate or layer) on the disc while playing a DVD.

47) Use the Control Menu to select a function that you’d like to use. The Control Menu display appears when the DISPLAY button is pressed. For details, please refer to the page in parenthesizes.

CUSTOM PARENTAL CONTROL (page 58) SETUP (page 65)

QUICK Setup (page 25) Use Quick Setup to choose the desired language of the on screen display, the shape of the TV screen, the audio output, and speakers connected to the player. CUSTOM Setup In addition to the Quick Setup setting, you can adjust the image and sound quality, Parental Control, and other various settings. RESET Returns the settings in “SETUP” to the default setting.

PROGRAM (page 35)

Selects the title, the chapter or the track to play a disc in the order you want.

SHUFFLE (page 37)

Plays the title, the chapter or the track in random order.

REPEAT (page 37)

Plays the entire disc (all titles/all tracks) repeatedly or one title/chapter/track repeatedly.

A-B REPEAT (page 38)

Specifies the parts you want to play repeatedly.

BNR (page 56)

Adjusts the picture quality by reducing the “block noise” or mosaic like patterns that appear on your TV screen.

Control Menu To tal number of titles or tracks recorded Current playing title number (Video CD/CD: track number) Current playing chapter number (Video CD/CD: index number) Playing time Icon of selected Control Menu item

Playback status (N Playback, XPause, xStop, etc.)

PLAY DVD

SUBTITLE Select:

Ty pe of disc being played back Current setting

OFF OFF 1: ENGLISH 2: FRENCH 3: SPANISH

Control Menu items

Function name of selected Control Menu item

Total number of chapters or indexes recorded

12(27) 18(34) T 1:32:55

Options

ENTER

Cancel:

RETURN

Operation message

List of Control Menu Items TITLE (DVD o nly) (page 41)/ SCENE (only VIDEO CD in PBC playback) (page 41)/TRACK (VIDEO CD only) (page 41)

Selects the title (DVD), the scene (VIDEO CD in PBC playback) or the track (VIDEO CD) to be played.

CHAPTER (DVD only) (page 41)/INDEX (VIDEO CD only) (page 41)

Selects the chapter (DVD) or the index (VIDEO CD) to be played.

TRACK (CD only) (page 41)

Selects the track (CD) to be played.

INDEX (CD only) (page 41)

Selects the index (CD) to be played.

TIME/TEXT (page 44)

Check the elapsed time and the remaining playback time. Input the time code for picture and music searching. Displays the DVD or the CD text.

AUDIO (page 48)

Changes the audio setting.

SUBTITLE (DVD only) (page

Displays the subtitles. Changes the subtitle language.

ANGLE (DVD only) (page 54)

Changes the angle.

55)

Sets the disc to prohibit playing.

DIGITAL VIDEO ENHANCER (page 57)

Exaggerates the outline of the image to produce a sharper picture.

VIEWER (DVD/VIDEO CD only) Divides the screen into 9 sub-screens to help you find the scene you want quickly. (page 42) z Each time you press DISPLAY, the Control Menu display changes as follows: , Control Menu display 1 m Control Menu display 2 (The items except the first three items from the top are changed to other items.) m ADVA NCED display (Appears if you select any setting other than "OFF." See page 47.) m Control Menu display off You can display the Control Menu display 1 only during CD playback. The Control Menu items are different depending on the disc.

t when you select any item except “OFF.” (“SURROUND,” “PROGRAM,” “SHUFFLE,” “REPEAT,” “A-B Repeat,” “DIGITAL VIDEO ENHANCER” only). The “ANGLE” indicator lights up in green only when the angles can be changed.

z The Control Menu icon indicator lights up in green

12

1-2

13

Getting Started

Quick Overview

Step 3: TV Hookups

A quick overview presented in this chapter will give you enough information to start using the player for your enjoyment. To use the surround sound features of this player, refer to “Hookups” on page 17.

Connect the supplied audio/video cord and power cord in the order (1~3) shown below. Be sure to connect the power cord last.

Getting Started

to video input

1 Audio/video

Note

INPUT

cord (supplied)

You cannot connect this player to a TV that does not have a video input jack. Be sure to turn off the power of each component before connecting.

VIDEO

(yellow)

L

(white)

AUDIO R

(red)

to audio input

Step 1: Unpacking

TV to LINE OUT L/R (AUDIO) 1

Check that you have the following items: • Audio/video cord (pinplug × 3 y pinplug × 3) (1) • Remote commander (remote) RMT-D128A (1) • Size AA (R6) batteries (2)

to LINE OUT (VIDEO) 1

LINE OUT

Step 2: Inserting Batteries into the Remote

R-AUDIO 1-L

VIDEO 1

R-AUDIO 2-L

VIDEO 2

2 Power source CD/DVD Player

You can control the player using the supplied remote. Insert two size AA (R6) batteries by matching the 3 and # ends on the batteries to the markings inside the compartment. When using the remote, point it at the remote sensor on the player.

LINE OUT

DIGITAL OUT

S VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO OUT OUT

5.1CH OUTPUT

Y

PCM/DTS/ DOLBY DIGITAL

R-AUDIO 1-L

FRONT

REAR CENTER L

VIDEO 1

1

PB

COAXIAL OPTICAL PR

2 R-AUDIO 2-L

R

VIDEO 2

WOOFER

l: Signal flow

3 Power source When connecting to a wide screen TV Depending on the disc, the image may not fit your TV screen. If you want to change the aspect ratio, please refer to page 67. Notes • Do not leave the remote in an extremely hot or humid place. • Do not drop any foreign object into the remote casing, particularly when replacing the batteries. • Do not expose the remote sensor to direct light from the sun or lighting apparatus. Doing so may cause a malfunction. • If you do not use the remote for an extended period of time, remove the batteries to avoid possible damage from battery leakage and corrosion.

14

15 Hookups

Step 4: Playing a Disc

Hooking Up the Player

1 Turn on the TV.

Follow Steps 1 to 4 to hook up and adjust the settings of the player. Before you start, turn off the power, check that you have all of the supplied accessories, and insert the batteries into the remote (page 14).

2 Switch the input selector on the TV to the player.

Hookups

Notes • Plug cords securely to prevent unwanted noise. • Refer to the instructions supplied with the components to be connected.

Step 1: Connecting the Video Cords Connect this player to your TV monitor, projector or, AV amplifier (receiver) using a video cord. Select one of the patterns A through C, according to the input jack on your TV monitor, projector, or AV amplifier (receiver).

With the playback side facing down

3 Press POWER on the player.

A

4 Press A on the player to open the disc tray.

(yellow)

INPUT

Audio/video cord (supplied)

VIDEO

Component video cord (not supplied)

5 Place the disc on the tray with the playback side facing down.

COMPONENT VIDEO IN

C

Y PB

L

6 Press H.

PR

AUDIO

The disc tray closes and the player begins playing the disc.

TV, projector or AV amplifier (receiver )

R

After Step 6 Depending on the disc, a menu may be displayed on the TV screen. If so, select the item you want from the menu and play the DVD (page 33) or VIDEO CD disc (page 34).

TV, projector or AV amplifier (receiver) (yellow) CD/DVD player

To stop playing Press x.

DIGITAL OUT

LINE OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT Y

PCM/DTS/ DOLBY DIGITAL

R-AUDIO 1-L

To take out the disc Press A.

R-AUDIO 2-L

5.1CH OUTPUT FRONT

REAR CENTER L

VIDEO 1

COAXIAL OPTICAL

To turn off the player Press ^/1 on the remote. The player is set to standby mode and the power indicator lights up in red. Press POWER on the player to turn off completely.

S VIDEO OUT

1

PB

2

PR R

VIDEO 2

WOOFER

INPUT S VIDEO

B

TV, projector or AV amplifier (receiver)

l : Signal flow

16

S VIDEO cord (not supplied)

continued

17

1-3

A If you are connecting to a video input jack

Step 2: Connecting the Audio Cords

Connect the yellow plug of the audio/video cord (supplied) to the yellow (video) jacks. Yo u will enjoy standard quality images. Ye llow (Video)

White (L)

White (L)

Red (R)

Red (R)

Refer to the chart below to select the connection that best suits your system. The surround effects you will enjoy depend on the connections and components you use.

Hookups

Yellow (Video)

Select a connection Select one of the following connections,

Use the red and white plugs to connect to the audio input jacks (page 20).

Connection

B If you are connecting to an S VIDEO input jack Connect the S VIDEO cord (not supplied). Yo u will enjoy standard quality images.

C If you are connecting to a monitor, projector or, AV amplifier (receiver) having

through

D

.

A

(page 20)

• TV (stereo)

B

(page 21)

• AV amplifier (receiver) having 5.1ch input jacks • 4 speakers (front L and R, rear L and R) • 6 speakers (front L and R, center, rear L and R, subwoofer)

B

(page 21)

• AV amplifier (receiver) having a Dolby* Digital or DTS** decoder and a digital input jack • 6 speakers (front L and R, center, rear L and R, subwoofer)

C

(page 23)

• Stereo amplifier (receiver) (having L and R audio input jacks only, or having a digital input jack) • 2 speakers (front L and R)

C

(page 23)

• MD deck/DAT deck

D

(page 24)

• AV amplifier (receiver) with a Dolby Surround (Pro Logic) decoder (having L and R audio input jacks only, or having a digital input jack) • 3 speakers (front L and R, and rear (monaural)) • 6 speakers (front L and R, center, rear L and R, subwoofer)

component video input jacks (Y, PB, PR) Connect the component via the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks using a component video cord (not supplied) or three video cords (not supplied) of the same kind and length. Yo u will enjoy accurate color reproduction and high quality images.

A

Components to be connected

Note Do not connect the player to a VCR so that the signals of the player are passed to the TV via the VCR. If you do so, you may not receive a clear image on the TV screen. VCR

CD/DVD player

* Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby,” “Pro Logic,” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Confidential unpublished works. © 1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. ** “DTS” is a registered trademark of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.

TV Connect directly

continued

18

19

A

Connecting to your TV

B Connecting to an AV amplifier (having 5.1ch input jacks or a digital input jack) and 4 to 6 speakers

This connection will use your TV speakers for sound.

CD/DVD player LINE OUT

DIGITAL OUT

S VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO OUT OUT Y

PCM/DTS/ DOLBY DIGITAL

R-AUDIO 1-L

VIDEO 1

R-AUDIO 2-L

VIDEO 2

COAXIAL OPTICAL

B-1 : Connecting to the 5.1ch input jacks You can enjoy 5.1ch surround sound using the internal Dolby Digital decoder of this player. You can also enjoy Dolby Surround (Pro Logic) sounds, or surround sounds using various SURROUND modes (page 50).

5.1CH OUTPUT FRONT

REAR CENTER L

1

PB

2

PR R

Hookups

If your AV amplifier (receiver) has 5.1 channel inputs, use B-1 . If you want to use the Dolby Digital or DTS decorder function on your AV amplifier (receiver), connect to its digital jack using B-2 . With the following connections, you can enjoy a more realistic audio presence in the comfort of your own home.

xRecommended surround sound effects for this connection. •TVS DYNAMIC (page 50) •TVS WIDE (page 50)

WOOFER

xRecommended surround sound effects for this connection. When 6 speakers are connected. •Dolby Digital (5.1ch) (page 79) (Set “SURROUND” to “OFF.”)

A LINE OUT

(yellow)

(yellow)

B-2 : Connecting to the digital input jack This connection will allow you to use the Dolby Digital or DTS decoder function of your AV amplifier (receiver). Yo u are not able to enjoy the SURROUND sound effects of the player.

TV R-AUDIO 1-L

VIDEO 1

(white)

(white)

(red) R-AUDIO 2-L

VIDEO 2

xRecommended surround sound effects using this connection with your amplifier (receiver). •Dolby Digital (5.1ch) (page 79) •DTS (5.1ch) (page 79)

(red) Audio/video cord (supplied) to audio input

Note

l : Signal flow

The yellow plug is used for video signals (page 17).

After you have completed the connection, be sure to set “DOLBY DIGITA L” to “DOLBY DIGITA L” (page 27). If your AV amplifier (receiver) has a DTS decoder, set “DTS” to “ON” (page 27). Otherwise, no sound or a loud noise will come from the speakers.

continued

20

21

1-4

CD/DVD player LINE OUT

DIGITAL OUT

S VIDEO OUT

R-AUDIO 1-L

C Connecting to a stereo amplifier (receiver) and 2 speakers/Connecting to an MD deck or DAT deck

5.1CH OUTPUT

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT Y

PCM/DTS/ DOLBY DIGITAL

FRONT

REAR CENTER

L

VIDEO 1

1

PB

2

PR

COAXIAL OPTICAL

R-AUDIO 2-L

B-2

B-1

xRecommended surround sound effects for the •TVS STANDARD (page 50)

5.1CH OUTPUT

DIGITAL OUT

FRONT

PCM/DTS/ DOLBY DIGITAL

REAR CENTER

connection only.

C-1

Hookups

This connection will use your 2 front speakers connected to your stereo amplifier (receiver) for sound. If the stereo amplifier (receiver) has audio input jacks L and R only, use C-1 . If the amplifier (receiver) has a digital input jack, use C-2 . When connecting to an MD deck or a DAT deck, use C-2 . In this case, you can also connect the player directly to the MD deck or DAT deck with using your stereo amplifier (receiver).

WOOFER

R

VIDEO 2

L

z In connection

COAXIAL OPTICAL

C-1 , you can use the supplied audio/video cord instead of using a separate audio cord.

z To realize better surround sound effects, make sure that your listening position is in between your speakers. WOOFER

R

Optical digital cord (not supplied) Remove jack cap before connecting

CD/DVD player Stereo audio cord (not supplied)

LINE OUT

DIGITAL OUT

S VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO OUT OUT

5.1CH OUTPUT

Y

PCM/DTS/ DOLBY DIGITAL

R-AUDIO 1-L

FRONT

REAR CENTER L

VIDEO 1

1

PB

2

PR

COAXIAL OPTICAL

R-AUDIO 2-L

or

R

VIDEO 2

WOOFER

or

C-2 Stereo audio cord (not supplied) (white)

DIGITAL OUT

Coaxial digital cord (not supplied)

Monoural audio cord (not supplied)

PCM/DTS/ DOLBY DIGITAL

Coaxial digital cord (not supplied)

COAXIAL OPTICAL

R-AUDIO 2-L

VIDEO 2

[Speakers] Optical digital cord (not supplied) Remove jack cap before connecting

AV amplifier (receiver) having 5.1ch inputs or/and a decoder

Center

VIDEO 1

or

to audio input

[Speakers]

R-AUDIO 1-L

(red) or

to coaxial or optical digital input

C-1 LINE OUT

Subwoofer

to coaxial or optical digital input

Front (R)

Front (L)

(white)

Rear (L)

[Speakers]

Rear (R)

(red)

to audio input

Stereo amplifier (receiver)

Front (L)

l: Signal flow

z To enhance the surround sound effects:

•Use high-performance speakers. •Use front, rear, and center speakers having the same size and performance. •Place a subwoofer between the right and left front speakers. •Refer to the operating instructions of the AV receiver (amplifier) for correct speaker setting location.

MD deck/DAT deck

Front (R)

l: Signal flow

continued

22

23

D Connecting to an AV amplifier (receiver) having a Dolby Surround (Pro Logic) decoder and 3 to 6 speakers

Step 3: Connecting the Power Cord

This connection will allow you to enjoy the surround effects of the Pro Logic decoder on your amplifier (receiver). If you have an AV amplifier (receiver) equipped with a Dolby Digital or DTS decoder, refer to page 21. You can enjoy the Dolby Surround effects only when playing Dolby Surround audio or multichannel audio (Dolby Digital) discs. Pro Logic uses a minimum of 3 speakers (front L and R, and rear (monaural)). The surround effects are enhanced if 6 speakers (front L and R, center, rear L and R, and subwoofer) are used. If your amplifier (receiver) has L and R audio input jacks only, use D-1 . If your amplifier (receiver) has a digital input jack, use D-2 .

Plug the player and TV power cords into an AC outlet.

Hookups

Do not connect the power cord of your player to the “switched” power socket of an amplifier (receiver). When you turn off the power of your amplifier (receiver) the menu setting for the player such as Playback Memory may be lost.

Step 4: Quick Setup

xRecommended surround sound effects using this connection with your amplifier (receiver). •Dolby Surround (Pro Logic) (page 79)

Follow the steps below to make the minimum number of base adjustments use the player. To skip an adjustment, press >. To return to the previous adjustment, press ..

z For correct speaker setting location, please refer to the operating instructions of the amplifier (receiver). [/1

CD/DVD player DIGITAL OUT

LINE OUT

S VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO OUT OUT

R-AUDIO 1-L

FRONT

REAR CENTER

7

L

VIDEO 1

1

PB

2

PR

1 4

Y

PCM/DTS/ DOLBY DIGITAL

ENTER

5.1CH OUTPUT

3

5

6

8

9

0

COAXIAL OPTICAL

R-AUDIO 2-L

2

R

VIDEO 2

WOOFER

./>

D-2 DIGITAL OUT PCM/DTS/ DOLBY DIGITAL

D-1

Stereo audio cord (not supplied) (white) Coaxial digital cord (not supplied)

POWER

./> X/x X/x

LINE OUT

R-AUDIO 1-L

ENTER

VIDEO 1

1 Turn on the TV.

COAXIAL OPTICAL

(red) or

2 Switch the input selector on the TV to the player.

or R-AUDIO 2-L

VIDEO 2

3 Press POWER on the player and press [/1 on the remote. Optical digital cord (not supplied) Remove jack cap before connecting

(white)

“Press [ENTER] to run QUICK SETUP” appears at the bottom of the screen. If this message does not appear, select “QUICK” under “SETUP” in the Control Menu to run Quick Setup (page 65).

(red)

4 Press ENTER without inserting a disc. to coaxial or optical digital input

The Setup Display for selecting the language used in the on-screen display appears.

to audio input [Speakers]

[Speakers]

LANGUAGE SETUP OSD: DVD MENU: AUDIO: SUBTITLE:

Dolby Surround amplifier (receiver) Rear (L)

Front (L)

Rear (R)

Subwoofer

Center

Front (R)

ENGLISH ENGLISH FRENCH SPANISH PORTUGUESE

Rear* (mono)

l: Signal flow

24

∗When connecting 6 speakers, replace the monaural rear speaker with a center speaker, 2 rear speakers and a subwoofer.

continued

25

1-5

5 Press X/x to select a language.

When DIGITAL OUTPUT is selected

The player uses the language selected here to display the DVD menu and subtitle as well.

1

6 Press ENTER. The Setup Display for selecting the aspect ratio of the TV to be connected appears. 4:3 LETTER BOX 4:3 LETTER BOX 4:3 PAN SCAN 16:9

B

AUDIO SETUP AUDIO ATT: OFF AUDIO DRC: STANDARD CENTER SPEAKER EQ: FLAT DOWNMIX: DOLBY SURROUND ON DIGITAL OUT: D-PCM DOLBY DIGITAL: DTS: D-PCM 48kHz/96kHz PCM: DOLBY DIGITAL

Hookups

SCREEN SETUP TV TYPE: SCREEN SAVER: BACKGROUND:

Press X/x to select the item. Choose the item that matches the audio connection you selected in page 21 to 24 ( through D ).

7 Press X/x to select the item. TV Type

Yo u select

4:3 standard TV A wide-screen TV or 4:3 standard TV with a wide-screen mode

Audio Cord Connection Type

Page

4:3 LETTER BOX or 4:3 PAN SCAN

67

16:9

67

C-2

D-2

B-2

2

8 Press ENTER. The Setup Display for selecting the type of jack used to connect your amplifier (receiver) appears.

Yo u select

Page

D-PCM

71

DOLBY DIGITAL (only if the amplifier (receiver) has a Dolby Digital decoder)

71

Press ENTER. DTS is selected. AUDIO SETUP r) AUDIO ATT: OFF AUDIO DRC: STANDARD CENTER SPEAKER EQ: FLAT DOWNMIX: DOLBY SURROUND ON DIGITAL OUT: D-PCM DOLBY DIGITAL: DTS: OFF 48kHz/96kHz PCM: OFF ON

Is this player connected to an amplifier (receiver)? Select the type of jack you are using. YES LINE OUTPUT L/R(AUDIO) DIGITAL OUTPUT 5.1CH OUTPUT NO

3

9 Press X/x to select the item, then press ENTER. • When “NO” or “LINE OUTPUT L/R (AUDIO)” is selected, Quick Setup is finished and connections are complete. • When “DIGITAL OUTPUT” is selected, the Setup Display for “DOLBY DIGITAL” appears. • When “5.1CH OUTPUT” is selected, the Setup Display for “SPEAKER SETUP” appears.

Press X/x to select the item. Choose the item that matches the audio connection you selected in page 21 to 24 ( through D ). Audio Cord Connection Type C-2

D-2

B-2

4

Yo u select

Page

OFF

71

ON (only if the amplifier (receiver) has a DTS decode

71

B

Press ENTER. Quick Setup is finished. All connections and setup operations are complete.

continued

27

26 Note

When 5.1 CH OUTPUT is selected

1

You can directly start Quick Setup only when you run it for the first time. To run Quick Setup a second time, select “QUICK” under “SETUP” in the Control Menu (page 65).

Press X/x to select the size of the center speaker. If no center speaker is connected, select “NONE.” Refer to page 72 for each selection item.

2

Enjoying the surround sound effects To enjoy the surround sound effects of this player or your amplifier (receiver), the following items must be set as described below for the audio connection you selected in page 21 to 24 ( B through D ). Each of these are the default settings and do not need to be adjusted when you first connect the player. Refer to page 65 for using the Setup Display.

LARGE NONE NONE LARGE SMALL

Audio Connection (page 21 to 24) A

Press ENTER. The Setup Display for selecting the size of the rear speaker appears.

No additional settings are needed.

SPEAKER SETUP SIZE: DISTANCE: BALANCE: LEVEL: TEST TONE: OFF FRONT: CENTER: REAR: SUBWOOFER:

B-1

LARGE LARGE NONE NONE LARGE(REAR) , then ENTER .

To set , press

3

Press X/x to select the size. If no rear speaker is connected, select “NONE.” “SIDE” and “REAR” refer to the speakers’ position relative to your listening position. Refer to page 72 for each selection item.

4

Press ENTER. The Setup Display for selecting whether or not you have connected a subwoofer appears.

Item

Yo u select

Page

DISTANCE BALANCE LEVEL

Set according to the connected speakers

72

• If the sound distorts even when the volume is turned down, set “AUDIO ATT ” to “ON” (page 70). • If “ENHANCED” or “SOFT” is selected in “CENTER SPEAKER EQ,” it makes the spoken track sound clear (page 70).

B-2

SPEAKER SETUP SIZE: DISTANCE: BALANCE: LEVEL: OFF TEST TONE: FRONT: CENTER: REAR: SUBWOOFER: To set, press To quit press

SETUP DISPLAY

Press X/x to select the item.

6

Press ENTER. Quick Setup is finished. All connections and setup operations are complete.

C-2

D-2

Item

Yo u select

Page

DOWNMIX

DOLBY SURROUND

70

DIGITAL OUT

ON

70

• Set “48kHz/96kHz PCM” to “96kHz/24bit,” only if you connect the amplifier (receiver) that conforms to the 96 kHz sampling frequency (page 71).

LARGE LARGE LARGE(REAR) NONE NONE , then ENTER . YES

5

Hookups

SPEAKER SETUP SIZE: DISTANCE: BALANCE: LEVEL: OFF TEST TONE: FRONT: CENTER: REAR: SUBWOOFER:

C-1

D-1

Item

Yo u select

Page

DOWNMIX

DOLBY SURROUND

70

• If the sound distorts even when the volume is turned down, set “AUDIO ATT” to “ON” (page 70).

28

29

1-6

Playing Discs

4

Playing Discs

The player automatically turns on and the power indicator lights up in green. Depending on the DVD or VIDEO CD, some operations may be different or restricted. Refer to the operating instructions supplied with your disc. POWER

H

x

A

With the playback side facing down

Power indicator

5 [/1 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

AUDIO

H

1 2

x

Turn on your TV. Switch the input selector on the TV to the player. When using an amplifier (receiver) Turn on the amplifier (receiver) and select the appropriate channel.

3

Press POWER on the player. The player enters standby mode and the power indicator lights up in red.

Press H. The disc tray closes, and the player starts playback (continuous play). Adjust the volume on the TV or the amplifier (receiver).

After following Step 5 Depending on the disc, a menu may appear on the TV screen. You can play the disc interactively by following the instructions on the menu. DVD (page 33), VIDEO CD (page 34).

Notes on playing DVDs with a DTS sound track • DTS audio signals are output only through the DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL and COAXIAL) jack. • If you connect the player to audio equipment without a DTS decoder, do not set “DTS” to “ON” in “AUDIO SETUP” (page 71). A loud noise may come out from the speakers, affecting your ears or causing the speakers to be damaged. • When you play a DVD with DTS sound tracks, set “DTS” to “ON” in “AUDIO SETUP” (page 71).

To turn on the player Press POWER on the player. The player enters standby mode and the power indicator lights up in red. Press [/1 on the remote. The player turns on and the power indicator lights up in green. In standby mode, the player also turns on by pressing A on the player or by pressing H. To turn off the player Press [/1 on the remote. The player enters standby mode and the power indicator lights up in red. To turn off the player completely, press POWER on the player. While playing a disc, do not turn off the player by pressing POWER. Doing so may cancel the menu settings. When you turn off the player, first press x to stop playback and then press [/1 on the remote.

Additional operations

Z 1

2

4

5

6

7

8

9

3

0

INSTANT

./>

REPLAY X

H

x

To

Operation

Stop

Press x

Pause

Press X

Resume play after pause

Press X or H

Go to the next chapter, track or scene in continuous play mode

Press >

Go back to the preceding chapter, track or scene in continuous play mode

Press .

Stop play and remove the disc

Press Z

Replay the last viewed scene (DVD only)

Press INSTANT REPLAY

Playing Discs

Notes on playing DTS sound tracks on a CD • When playing DTS-encoded CDs, excessive noise will be heard from the analog stereo jacks. To avoid possible damage to the audio system, the consumer should take proper precautions when the analog stereo jacks of the player are connected to an amplification system. To enjoy DTS Digital Surround™ playback, an external 5.1-channel decoder system must be connected to the digital jacks of the player. • Set the sound to “STEREO” using the AUDIO button when you play DTS sound tracks on a CD (page 48). • Do not play DTS sound tracks without first connecting the player to an audio component having a built-in DTS decoder. The player outputs the DTS signal via the DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL and COAXIAL) jacks even if “DTS” in “AUDIO SETUP” is set to “OFF” in the Setup Display (page 71), and may affect your ears or cause your speakers to be damaged.

Press A on the player, and place a disc on the disc tray.

z The Instant Replay function is useful when you want to review a scene or dialog that you missed.

Note You may not be able to use the Instant Replay function with some scenes.

30

31

Resuming Playback from the Point Where You Stopped the Disc (Resume Play)

H

Using the DVD’s Menu Some discs have a “title menu” or a “DVD menu”. On some DVDs, this may simply be called a “menu” or “title.”

A DVD is divided into long sections of a picture or a music feature called “titles.” When you play a DVD which contains several titles, you can select the title you want using the title menu.

1

2

Number

4

5

6

buttons

7

8

9

3

0

DVD MENU C/X/x/c ENTER

x Number buttons

TITLE

While playing a disc, press x to stop playback.

4 7

2

3

5

6

8

9

0

C/X/x/c ENTER

RESUME appears on the front panel display and you can restart the disc from the point where you stopped the disc. If RESUME does not appear, Resume Play is not available.

2

Some DVDs allow you to select the disc contents using a menu. When you play these DVDs, you can select items such as the language for the subtitles and the language for the sound using the DVD menu.

Using the title menu

1

1

Using the DVD menu

1

Press H. The player starts playback from the point where you stopped the disc in Step 1.

z To play from the beginning of the disc, press x twice, then press H.

Playing Discs

When you stop the disc, the player remembers the point where you pressed x and RESUME appears on the front panel display. As long as you do not open the disc tray, Resume Play works even if the player enters standby mode by pressing [/1.

Notes • Depending on where you stopped the disc, the player may not resume playback from exactly the same point. • The point where you stopped playing is cleared when: you turn the power off by pressing POWER on the player. you change the play mode. you change the settings on the Setup Display.

Press TITLE. The title menu appears on the TV screen. The contents of the menu vary from disc to disc.

2

Press C/X/x/c or the number buttons to select the title you want to play.

3

Press ENTER. The player starts playing the selected title.

1

Press DVD MENU. The DVD menu appears on the TV screen. . The contents of the menu vary from disc to disc.

2

Press C/X/x/c or the number buttons to select the item you want to change.

3

To change other items, repeat Step 2.

4

Press ENTER.

z You can also display the DVD menu by pressing DVD MENU on the player.

z You can also display the title menu by pressing TITLE on the player.

32

33

1-7

Playing VIDEO CDs with PBC Functions (PBC Playback)

Various Play Mode Functions (Program Play, Shuffle Play, Repeat Play, A-B Repeat Play)

1

Press DISPLAY twice (When playing a CD, press once). The Control Menu appears.

2

Press X/x to select (PROGRAM), then press ENTER. The options for PROGRAM appear.

Note Depending on the VIDEO CD, Press ENTER in Step 3 may appear as Press SELECT in the instructions supplied with the disc. In this case, press H.

You can set the following play modes: • Program Play (page 35) • Shuffle Play (page 37) • Repeat Play (page 37) • A- B Repeat Play (page 38)

12(27) 18(34) T 1:32:55 OFF OFF SET ON

PLAY DVD

Notes 1

Number

4 7

buttons

2

• The play mode is cancelled when: you open the disc tray. the player enters standby mode by pressing [/1 on the remote. you turn the power off by pressing POWER on the player. • If you are playing a VIDEO CD with PBC, you must first cancel PBC playback before you can set a play mode (except when you want to set A-B repeat for moving pictures).

3

5

6

8

9

0

./> x

H

X/x ENTER ORETURN

1

You can play the contents of a disc in the order you want by arranging the order of the titles, chapters or tracks on the disc to create your own program. Yo u can program up to 99 titles, chapters, and tracks.

Start playing a VIDEO CD with PBC functions.

Select the item number you want by pressing X/x or the number buttons.

Number

3 4

Press X/x to select “SET t”, then press ENTER. The display for programming appears. TRACK is displayed when you play a VIDEO CD or a CD. PROGRAM

buttons

Press ENTER.

1

2

4

5

6

7

8

9

CLEAR

Follow the instructions in the menu for interactive operations.

—— 01 02 03 04 05

Titles or Tracks recorded on a disc

4

Press c. The cursor moves to the title or track (in this case, 01 ).

3

PROGRAM ALL CLEAR 1. TITLE — — 2. TITLE — — 3. TITLE — — 4. TITLE — — 5. TITLE — — 6. TITLE — — 7. TITLE — —

0

PROGRAM SHUFFLE

Refer to the instructions supplied with the disc, as the operating procedure may differ according to the VIDEO CD.

T

ALL CLEAR 1. TITLE 2. TITLE — — 3. TITLE — — 4. TITLE — — 5. TITLE — — 6. TITLE — — 7. TITLE — —

Creating your own program (Program Play)

The menu for your selection appears.

2

3

Playing Discs

With PBC (Playback Control) functions, you can enjoy simple interactive operations, search functions, and other such operations. PBC playback allows you to play VIDEO CDs interactively by following the menu on the TV screen.

z To play without using PBC, press ./> or the number buttons while the player is stopped to select a track, then press H or ENTER. Play without PBC appears on the TV screen and the player starts continuous play. You cannot play still pictures such as a menu. To return to PBC playback, press x twice then press H.

REPEAT

H

T —— 01 02 03 04 05

C ALL 01 02 03 04 05 06

X/x/c ENTER Chapters recorded on a disc

DISPLAY

To go back to the menu Press O RETURN. continued

35

34

5

Select the title, chapter, or track you want to program. xWhen playing a DVD For example, select chapter 03 of title 02 . Press X/x or the number buttons to select 02 under T, then press ENTER. ALL CLEAR 1. TITLE — — 2. TITLE — — 3. TITLE — — 4. TITLE — — 5. TITLE — — 6. TITLE — — 7. TITLE — —

T —— 01 02 03 04 05

C ALL 01 02 03 04 05 06

xWhen playing a VIDEO CD, CD or DVD (Program Play is set to ON) • ON: shuffle titles or tracks selected in Program Play and plays them in a random order.

Playing in random order (Shuffle Play)

Press H to start Program Play. Program Play begins. When the program ends, you can restart the same program again by pressing H.

You can have the player “shuffle” titles, chapters, or tracks and play them in a random order. Subsequent “shuffling” may produce a different playing order.

To return to normal play Press CLEAR, or select OFF in Step 3. To play the same program again, select ON in Step 3 and press H.

7

CLEAR

8

Press ENTER.

0

To return to normal play Press CLEAR, or select “OFF” in Step 3.

SHUFFLE

To turn off the Control Menu Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control Menu is turned off.

4

9

H ENTER X/x

To turn off the Control Menu Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control Menu is turned off.

DISPLAY

Next, press X/x or the number buttons to select 03 under C, then press ENTER.

To change the program

z Yo u can set Shuffle Play while the player is

1

stopped. After selecting the SHUFFLE option, press H. Shuffle Play starts.

Selected title and chapter PROGRAM ALL CLEAR 1. TITLE 0 2 —0 3 2. TITLE 3. TITLE — — 4. TITLE — — 5. TITLE — — 6. TITLE — — 7. TITLE — —

T —— 01 02 03 04 05

xWhen playing a VIDEO CD or CD For example, select track 02 . Press X/x or the number buttons to select 02 under T, then press ENTER. Selected track PROGRAM ALL CLEAR 1. TRACK 0 2 2. TRACK 3. TRACK — — 4. TRACK — — 5. TRACK — — 6. TRACK — — 7. TRACK — —

0:15:30 T —— 01 02 03 04 05

2

In Step 4, select the program number of the title, chapter, or track you want to change using X/x or the number buttons, and press c. Follow Step 5 for new programming.

z You can select SHUFFLE directly by pressing

1

To cancel the programmed order To cancel all the titles, chapters, or tracks in the programmed order, press X, and select ALL CLEAR in Step 4. To cancel the selected program, select the program using X/x in Step 4, then press CLEAR, or select -- in Step 5, then press ENTER.

2

SHUFFLE.

Press DISPLAY twice during playback (When playing a CD, press once). The Control Menu appears. Press X/x to select (SHUFFLE), then press ENTER. The options for SHUFFLE appear. 12(27) 18(34) T 1:32:55

PLAY DVD

OFF OFF TITLE CHAPTER

z Yo u can do Repeat Play or Shuffle Play of the programmed titles, chapters, or tracks. Press REPEAT or SHUFFLE, or set REPEAT or SHUFFLE to on in the Control Menu display during Program Play.

Note Up to 200 chapters in a disc can be played in random order when “CHAPTER” is selected.

Playing repeatedly (Repeat Play) You can play all of the titles or tracks on a disc or a single title, chapter or track repeatedly. Yo u can use a combination of Shuffle or Program Play modes. 4 7

CLEAR

z You can select PROGRAM directly by pressing

3

PROGRAM.

xWhen playing a VIDEO CD or CD (Program Play is set to OFF) • TRACK: shuffle tracks and plays them in a random order.

To program other titles, chapters, or tracks, repeat Steps 4 to 5. The programmed titles, chapters, and tracks are displayed in the selected order.

36

5

6

8

9

0

REPEAT

Press X/x to select the item. xWhen playing a DVD (and when Program Play is set to OFF) • TITLE: shuffle titles and plays them in a random order. • CHAPTER: shuffle chapters and plays them in a random order.

Note The number of titles, chapters, or tracks displayed are the same number of titles, chapters, or tracks recorded on a disc.

Total time of the programmed tracks

6

Playing Discs

PROGRAM

7

H X/x ENTER DISPLAY

continued

37

1-8

1

Press DISPLAY twice during playback (when playing a CD, press once). The Control Menu appears.

2

Select REPEAT using X/x, then press ENTER. The options for REPEAT appear.

Press X/x to select “SET t”, then press ENTER. The A-B REPEAT setting display appears.

After selecting the “REPEAT” option, press H. Repeat Play starts.

z You can select REPEAT directly by pressing

A-B REPEAT Set point A with

4

You can play a specific portion of a title, chapter or track repeatedly. (This function is useful when you want to memorize lyrics, etc.)

Press X/x to select the item.

4 7

CLEAR

xWhen playing a DVD (Program Play and Shuffle Play are set to OFF) • DISC: repeats all of the titles. • TITLE: repeats the current title on a disc. • CHAPTER: repeats the current chapter. xWhen playing a VIDEO CD or CD (Program Play and Shuffle Play are set to OFF) • DISC: repeats all of the tracks on a disc. • TRACK: repeats the current track. xWhen Program Play or Shuffle Play is on • ON: repeats Program Play or Shuffle Play. Press ENTER.

5

6

8

9

ENTER .

During playback, when you find the starting point (point A) of the portion to be played repeatedly, press ENTER. The starting point (point A) is set.

0

A-B REPEAT Set point B with

ENTER

DISPLAY

5

1

Press DISPLAY twice during playback (when playing CD, press once). The Control Menu appears.

2

Press X/x to select (A-B REPEAT), then press ENTER. The options for A-B REPEAT appear.

.

CHAPTER TIME A: 18 – 1 : 32 : 55

X/x ENTER

12(27) 18(34) T 1:32:55

To return to normal play Press CLEAR, or select “OFF” in Step 3.

Notes

Playing Discs

Repeating a specific portion (A-B Repeat Play)

To turn off the Control Menu Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control Menu is turned off.

• Yo u can set A-B Repeat Play for only one specific section. • When you set A-B Repeat Play, the settings for Shuffle Play, Repeat Play, and Program Play are cancelled.

REPEAT. PLAY DVD

OFF OFF DISC TITLE CHAPTER

4

3

z Yo u can set Repeat Play while the player stopped.

12(27) 18(34) T 1:32:55

3

To turn off the Control Menu Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control Menu is turned off.

When you reach the ending point (point B), press ENTER again. The set points are displayed and the player starts repeating this specific portion. “A-B” appears on the front panel display during A-B Repeat Play. 12(27) 18(34) 1 : 34 : 30 T

PLAY DVD

ON CHAPTER TIME A: 18 – 1 : 32 : 55 B: 18 – 1 : 34 : 30

PLAY DVD

To return to normal play Press CLEAR, or select “OFF” in Step 3.

OFF SET OFF

38

39 Searching for a Scene

Searching for a Particular Point on a Disc (Search, Scan, Slow-motion play, Freeze Frame)

speeds are available. With each press the indication changes as follows: Playback direction x2B (DVD/CD only) t FF1M t FF2M

2

4

5

6

7

8

9

The x2B/x2b playback speed is about twice the normal speed. The FF2M/FR2m playback speed is faster than FF1M/FR1m.

3

C H

/

y

1

2

4

5

6

7

8

9

y

Selected row

Press or y while playing a disc. When you find the point you want, press H to return to normal speed. Each time you press or y during scan the playback speed changes. Three

1

Press DISPLAY.

4

The Control Menu appears.

Opposite direction (DVD only) SLOW 2 y SLOW 1

2

The SLOW2y/SLOW2 playback speed is slower than SLOW1y/SLOW1 .

y

Locating a point quickly by playing a disc in fast forward or fast reverse (Scan)

Playback direction SLOW 2y y SLOW 1y

y

∗ The FF1M/FR1m playback speed is the same as the scan speed described below.

12(27) – –(34) T 1:32:55

DISPLAY

y

Locating a point quickly (Search) While a disc is playing, keep pressing C to locate a point in playback direction at the FF1M* speed or keep pressing c to locate a point in opposite direction at the FR1m* speed. When you find the point you want, release the button to return to normal playback speed.

Press ENTER. “** (**)” changes to “-- (**)”.

X/x ENTER

y

Depending on the DVD/VIDEO CD, you may not be able to do some of the operations described.

PLAY DVD

0

3

You can use this function only for DVDs or VIDEO CDs. Press or y when the player is in the pause mode. To return to the normal speed, press H. Each time you press or y during Slow-motion play the playback speed changes. Two speeds are available. With each press the indication changes as follows:

y

Note

12(27) 18(34) T 1:32:55

3

y

/

Number buttons CLEAR

Watching frame by frame (Slowmotion play)

0

c

x2b (DVD only) t FR1m t FR 2m

Press X/x to select the search method. xWhen playing a DVD (TITLE), (CHAPTER), or (TIME/ TEXT) Select TIME/ TEXT for TIME SEARCH (See below).

Playing one frame at a time

You can use this function only for DVDs or VIDEO CDs. When the player is in the pause mode, press C to go to the next frame. Press c to go to the precding frame (DVD only). To return to normal playback, press H.

xWhen playing a VIDEO CD (TRACK) or (INDEX) xWhen playing a VIDEO CD with PBC Playback (SCENE)

y

y

40

Searching for a Scene

1

Example: when you select (CHAPTER) “** (**)” is selected (** refers to a number). The number in parentheses indicates the total number of titles, chapters, tracks, indexes or scenes.

You can search a DVD disc by title or chapter, and you can search a VIDEO CD or CD by track, index, or scene. As titles and tracks are assigned unique numbers on the disc, you can select the desired one by entering its number. Or, you can search for a scene using the time code. (TIME SEARCH)

Opposite direction Yo u can locate a particular point on a disc quickly by monitoring the picture or playing back slowly.

xWhen playing a CD (TRACK) or (INDEX)

Searching for a Title/ Chapter/Track/Index/ Scene

PLAY DVD

Press X/x or the number buttons to select the title, chapter, track, index, or scene number you want to search. If you make a mistake Cancel the number by pressing CLEAR, then select another number.

5

Press ENTER. The player starts playback from the selected number.

To turn off the Control Menu Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control Menu is turned off. continued

41

1-9

To search for a scene using the time code (TIME SEARCH) (DVD only)

1 2 3

You can divide the screen into 9 sub-screens and find the desired scene quickly.

X C/X/x/c ENTER DISPLAY

O RETURN

4

To return to the normal play Press O RETURN.

To start playback from the selected scene Select the scene using C/X/x/c and press ENTER. The playback starts from the selected scene. z If there are more than 9 titles, chapters or tracks, V

To turn off the Control Menu Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control Menu is turned off.

is displayed at the right bottom. To display the additional titles, chapters or tracks, select the right bottom scene (the position 9) and press x. To return to the previous scene, select the left top scene (the position 1) and press X.

Notes • Depending on the disc, you may not be able to select all functions. • The sound is muted when using this function.

z Yo u can display the first scene of titles, chapters or tracks recorded on the disc on a screen divided into 9 scenes. Yo u can start playback directly by selecting one of the scenes. For details, see page 42.

Dividing a track into 9 sections (STROBE PLAYBACK)

1

Note

Press ENTER.

The title, chapter or track number displayed is the same number recorded on the disc.

2

Press DISPLAY twice during playback. The Control Menu appears.

You can display 9 consecutive moving pictures on the screen. When you press X, the moving pictures pause.

Press X/x to select (VIEWER), then press ENTER.

Select “STROBE PLAYBACK ” in Step 3, then press ENTER in Step 4.

The options for VIEWER appear. 1 2 ( 2 7) 18(34) T 1:32:55

PLAY DVD

You can divide the screen into 9 subscreens and display the first scene of titles, chapters or tracks. Yo u can also play back from the selected title, chapter or track.

STROBE PLAYBACK TITLE VIEWER CHAPTER VIEWER ANGLE VIEWER STROBE PLAYBACK

3

Scanning the title, chapter or track

Press X/x to select the item. Refer to the explanations given for each items in the following sections. • STROBE PLAYBACK • TITLE VIEWER (for DVD only) • CHAPTER VIEWER (for DVD only) • TRACK VIEWER (for VIDEO CD only) • ANGLE VIEWER (for DVD only)

Select the item you want in Step 3, then press ENTER in Step 4.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Searching for a Scene

In Step 2, select (TIME/ TEXT). “T **:**:**” (playing time of the current title) is selected. Press ENTER. “T **:**:**” changes to “T --:--:--.” Input the time code using the number buttons, then press ENTER. For example, to find the scene at 2 hours, 10 minutes, and 20 seconds after the beginning, just enter “2:10:20.”

Searching by Using the Scenes (VIEWER)

Displaying different angles simultaneously If various angles (multi-angles) for a scene are recorded on the DVD, you can display all of the angles recorded on the disc on the same screen, and start playback in continuous mode at the chosen angle. The angles are displayed on a screen divided in 9 sections. Select “ANGLE VIEWER” in Step 3, then press ENTER in Step 4. To return to the normal play Press O RETURN.

xWhen playing a DVD Select “TITLE VIEWER” or “CHAPTER VIEWER”. xWhen playing a VIDEO CD

Select “TRACK VIEWER”. The initial scenes of titles, chapters or tracks appear.

42

43 Viewing Information About the Disc When playing a DVD

Viewing the Playing Time and Remaining Time on the Front Panel Display

TITLE

CHAP

HOUR

SEC

MIN

chapter, title, track, scene, or disc will also appear on your TV screen. See the following section “Checking the Playing Time and Remaining Time” for instructions on how to read this information.

CHAP

HOUR

MIN

SEC

MIN

SEC

Depending on the type of disc being played and the playing mode, the above mentioned disc information may not be displayed.

Playing time and number of the current chapter CHAP

HOUR

Checking the Playing Time and Remaining Time

Note

Remaining time of the current title TITLE

You can check information about the disc, such as the remaining time, total number of titles of a DVD, or tracks of a CD or VIDEO CD, using the front panel display (page 9).

z The playing time and remaining time of the current

Playing time and number of the current title

Yo u can check the playing time and remaining time of the current title, chapter, or track, and the total playing time or remaining time of the disc. Also, you can check the DVD/CD text recorded on the disc. 0

0

TIME/TEXT

Remaining time of the current chapter TIME/TEXT

CHAP

HOUR

SEC

MIN

DISPLAY

When playing a VIDEO CD (without PBC functions) or CD

1

Playing time and current track number

Press TIME/TEXT. Each time you press TIME/TEXT while playing the disc, the display changes as shown in the following chart.

TRACK

INDEX

MIN

SEC

The Control Menu appears. 12(27) 18(34) T 1:32:55

Remaining time of the current track TRACK

INDEX

MIN

Press DISPLAY during playback.

SEC

PLAY DVD

Viewing Information About the Disc

Te xt

Disc Type Time information

Playing time of the disc MIN

SEC

MIN

SEC

2

Remaining time of the disc

Press TIME/TEXT repeatedly to change the time information. The display and the kinds of time that you can change depend on the disc you are playing.

Text

z When playing VIDEO CDs with PBC functions, the scene number and the playing time are displayed.

continued

44

45

1-10

xWhen playing a DVD • T **:**:** Playing time of the current title • T–**:**:** Remaining time of the current title • C **:**:** Playing time of the current chapter • C–**:**:** Remaining time of the current chapter xWhen playing a VIDEO CD (with PBC functions) • **:** Playing time of the current scene

TIME/TEXT BRAHMS SYMPHONY NO – 4

To close the ADVANCED window Select “OFF” in Step 3.

Checking the Play Information (ADVANCED) You can check information such as the bit rate or the disc layer that is being played. While playing a disc, an approximate bit rate of the playback picture is always displayed as Mbps (Mega bit per second) and the audio as kbps (kilo bit per second).

DVD/CD text

Displays of each item By pressing DISPLAY repeatedly, you can display either “BIT RATE ” or “LAYER,” whichever was selected in “ADVANCED. ” BIT RATE

z If the DVD/CD text does not fit on a single line, you can see the entire text by watching it scroll across the front display.

BIT RATE X/x ENTER

z You can select the time and text by pressing TIME/TEXT.

0

DISPLAY

Notes • Only letters of the alphabet can be displayed. • This player can only display the first level of DVD/ CD text, such as the disc name or title.

1

Press DISPLAY during playback. The Control Menu is displayed.

2

To turn off the Control Menu Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control Menu is turned off.

To turn off the Control Menu Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control Menu is turned off.

Press X/x to select (ADVANCED), then press ENTER.

BIT RATE OFF BIT RATE LAYER

3

Audio

Mbps

Video

Bit rate refers to the amount of video/audio data per second in a disc. The higher the bit rate, the larger the amount of data. When the bit rate level is high, there is a large amount of data. However, this does not always mean that you can get higher quality pictures or sounds. LAYER Appears when the DVD has dual layers

The options for ADVANCED appear. 12(27) 18(34) T 1:32:55

384kbps 10

5

Viewing Information About the Disc

xWhen playing a VIDEO CD (without PBC functions) or CD • T **:** Playing time of the current track • T–**:** Remaining time of the current track • D **:** Playing time of the current disc • D–**:* Remaining time of the current disc

Checking the DVD/CD text Press TIME/TEXT repeatedly in Step 3 to display the text recorded on the DVD/CD. The DVD/CD text appears only when the text is recorded in the disc. Yo u can not change the text.

PLAY DVD

BIT RATE 384 kbps 0

Mbps

10

5

Press X/x to select items.

Indicates the approximate point where the disc is playing. If it is a dual-layer DVD, the player indicates which layer is being read (“Layer 0” or “Layer 1”). For details on the layers, see page 79 (DVD).

For each item, please refer to “Displays of each item.” • BIT RATE: displays the bit rate. • LAYER: displays the layer and the pick-up point.

4

Press ENTER.

46

47 Sound Adjustments 12(27) 18(34) T 1:32:55 1: ENGLISH 1: ENGLISH 2: ENGLISH 3: FRENCH

Changing the Sound

1

2

4

5

6

7

8

9

PROGRAM FORMAT DOLBY DIGITAL 3/2.1 L

C

R

LFE LS

3

RS

Press X/x to select the desired audio signal.

3

0

AUDIO

4

12(27) 18(34) T 1:32:55 1: ENGLISH

Press DISPLAY during playback. The Control Menu is displayed.

2

Press X/x to select (AUDIO), then ENTER. The options for AUDIO appear.

• Dolby Surround PROGRAM FORMAT DOLBY DIGITAL 2/0 DOLBY SURROUND L C R

L

z You can select AUDIO directly by pressing AUDIO. Each time you press the button, the item changes. During playing back a DVD, the sound may change automatically.

Note For discs not in multiple audio format, you cannot change the sound.

C

R

LFE LS

S

RS

Current playing program format**

• Dolby Digital 5.1ch When an LFE signal component is output, “LFE” is enclosed in a solid line. When an LFE signal component is not output, “LFE” is enclosed in a broken line.

* “PCM,” “DTS,” “DOLBY DIGITAL” is displayed. In case of “DOLBY DIGITAL,” the channels in the playing track are displayed by numbers as follows: For Dolby Digital 5.1 ch: Rear component 2

PROGRAM FORMAT DOLBY DIGITAL 3/2.1 L

Front component 2 + Center component 1

R RS

• DTS “LFE” is always enclosed in a solid line regardless of the LFE signal component being output. PROGRAM FORMAT DTS 3/2.1

LFE (Low Frequency Effect) component 1

**The letters in the program format display mean the following sound component: L: Front (left) R : Front (right) C : Center LS : Rear (left) RS : Rear (right) S : Rear (monaural): The rear component of the Dolby Surround processed signal or the Dolby Digital signal. LFE :LFE (Low Frequency Effect)

C LFE

LS

DOLBY DIGITAL 3 / 2 . 1

Press ENTER.

To turn off the Control Menu Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control Menu is turned off.

PLAY DVD PROGRAM FORMAT DOLBY DIGITAL 3/2.1

DISPLAY

1

PROGRAM FORMAT PCM 48kHz 24bit

Current audio format*

xWhen playing a DVD Depending on the DVD, the choice of language varies. When 4 digits are displayed, they represent the language code. Refer to the language code list on page 82 to see which language the code represents. When the same language is displayed two or more times, the DVD is recorded in multiple audio formats. xWhen playing a VIDEO CD or CD The default setting is underlined. • STEREO: The standard stereo sound • 1/L: The sound of the left channel (monaural) • 2/R: The sound of the right channel (monaural)

X/x ENTER

When you select “AUDIO,” the channels being played are displayed on the screen. For example, in Dolby Digital format, multiple signals ranging from monaural to 5.1 channel signals can be recorded on a DVD. Depending on the DVD, the number of the recorded channels may differ.

The display examples are as follows: • PCM (stereo)

Sound Adjustments

If the DVD is recorded with multilingual tracks, you can select the language you want while playing the DVD. If the DVD is recorded in multiple audio formats (PCM, Dolby Digital, or DTS), you can select the audio format you want while playing the DVD. With stereo CDs or VIDEO CDs, you can select the sound from the right or left channel and listen to the sound of the selected channel through both the right and left speakers. (In this case, the sound loses its stereo effect.) For example, when playing a disc containing a song with the vocals on the right channel and the instruments on the left channel, you can select the left channel and hear the instruments from both speakers.

Displaying the audio information of the disc

PLAY DVD

L

C

R

LFE LS

RS

Notes • When the signal contains rear signal components such as LS, RS or S, the Surround effect is enhanced (page 50). • If “DTS” is set to “OFF” in “AUDIO SETUP (page 71),” the DTS track selection option will not appear on the screen even if the disc contains DTS tracks.

49

48

1-11

SURROUND Mode Settings

3

Press X/x to select one of the SURROUND sounds. Refer to the following explanations given for each item.

You can enjoy surround sounds while playing discs including Dolby Digital DVDs, even if you have only 2 or 4 speakers. Select surround mode that best suits your speaker setup.

For 2 speaker setups

TVS (TV Virtual Surround) DYNAMIC

•TVS DYNAMIC •TVS WIDE •TVS NIGHT •TVS STANDARD

SURROUND

For 4 (or more) speaker setups

DISPLAY

1

Press DISPLAY during playback.

4

Uses sound imaging to create virtual rear speakers from the sound of the front speakers (L, R) without using actual rear speakers (shown below). The sound imaging effect is distinct and clearly reproduces each aural element of the audio track. This mode is effective when the distance between the front L and R speakers is short, such as with built-in speakers on a stereo TV.

TVS (TV Virtual Surround) NIGHT

The large sounds, such as explosions, are compressed, but the quieter sounds are unaffected. This feature is useful when you don’t want to disturb other people but still want to hear the dialog and enjoy the surround sound effects of TVS WIDE. TVS (TV Virtual Surround) STANDARD

Uses sound imaging to create virtual rear speakers from the sound of the front speakers (L, R) without using actual rear speakers. The virtual speakers are reproduced as shown in the illustration below. Use this setting when you want to use TVS with 2 separete speakers and retain the sound quality. L

R

Sound Adjustments

(If you select “NONE” in the setting of “REAR” in “SPEAKER SETUP”(page 72), you cannot select these modes.) •NORMAL SURROUND •ENHANCED SURROUND •VIRTUAL REAR SHIFT •VIRTUAL MULTI REAR •VIRTUAL MULTI DIMENSION

X/x ENTER

If the player is set up to output the signal from the DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jack, the surround effect will be heard only when you set “DOLBY DIGITAL” to “D-PCM” in “AUDIO SETUP.” (page 71)

TV

Press ENTER.

The Control Menu appears.

2

Press X/x to select (SURROUND), then press ENTER.

TVS (TV Virtual Surround) WIDE

To cancel the setting Select “OFF” in Step 3.

The options for SURROUND appear. 12(27) 18(34) T 1:32:55

PLAY DVD

To turn off the Control Menu Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control Menu is turned off.

For 2 speaker setups

OFF OFF TVS DYNAMIC TVS WIDE

When you connect only 2 front speakers, TVS (TV Virtual Surround) lets you enjoy surround sound effects by using sound imaging to create virtual rear speakers from the sound of the front speakers (L: left, R: right) without using actual rear speakers. Select one of the following modes:

Uses sound imaging to create virtual rear speakers from the sound of the front speakers (L, R) without using actual rear speakers. The virtual speakers are reproduced as shown in the illustration below. This gives the sound an expanded effect that fills the area surrounding the listener. This mode is effective when the distance between the front L and R speakers is short, such as with built-in speakers on a stereo TV. TV

L : Front speaker (left) R : Front speaker (right) : Virtual speaker

For 4 (or more) speaker set ups Yo u can enjoy the following surround effects by using the 2 front speakers and 2 rear speakers. Connect the player to the receiver with the B-1 connection (page 21). Yo u can experience Dolby Surround (Pro Logic) sounds or Digital Cinema Sound (DCS). DCS uses sound imaging to shift the sound of the rear speakers away from the actual speaker position or create entire sets of virtual rear speakers from one set of actual rear speakers. “VIRTUAL REAR SHIFT,” “VIRTUAL MULTI REAR,” and “VIRTUAL MULTI DIMENSION” make use of this technology.

continued

50

51 NORMAL SURROUND

VIRTUAL MULTI REAR

VIRTUAL MULTI DIMENSION

Software with 2 channel audio signals is decoded with Dolby Surround (Pro Logic) to create surround effects. The rear speakers will emit identical monaural sounds. If you are using a center speaker, Dolby Surround (Pro Logic) will also create the appropriate sounds for the center speaker.

Uses sound imaging to create an array of virtual rear speakers from a single pair of actual rear speakers. The virtual speakers are reproduced as shown in the illustration below. The position of the virtual rear speakers differs according to “REAR” or “SIDE” setting of the rear speakers (page 72) .

Uses sound imaging to create an array of virtual rear speaker positions higher than the listener from a single pair of actual rear speakers. This mode creates five sets of virtual speakers surrounding the listener at approximately a 30° angle of elevation. The effect differs according to “REAR” or “SIDE” setting of the rear speakers (page 72).

REAR L

R

L

REAR

R

L

LS

LS

RS

RS

SIDE

R

L

LS

R

RS LS

RS

VIRTUAL REAR SHIFT

Uses sound imaging to shift the sound of the rear speakers away from the actual speaker position. The virtual speakers are reproduced as shown in the illustration below. The shift position differs according to “REAR” or “SIDE” setting of the rear speakers (page 72).

Sound Adjustments

LS

L

Provides a greater sense of presence from a Dolby Surround (Pro Logic) source with a monaural rear channel signal. Produces a stereo like effect in the rear channels.

R

RS

SIDE

ENHANCED SURROUND

Notes • To enjoy the multichannel audio through the 5.1CH OUTPUT jacks, correctly set each speaker position and distance. For details on setting each speaker, see page 72. • When you select an item, the sound cuts off for a moment. • When the playing signal does not contain a signal for the rear speakers (page 49), the surround effects may be difficult to hear. • When you select “TVS DYNAM IC,” “TVS WIDE,” “TVS NIGHT” or “TVS STANDAR D,” the player does not output the sound from the center speaker. • When you select one of the SURROUND modes, turn off the surround setting of the connected TV or amplifier (receiver). • If the player is set up to output the signal from the DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jack, the surround effect will not be heard when you play a CD. • Make sure that your listening position is between and at an equal distance from your speakers, and that the speakers are located in similar surroundings. Otherwise, the TVS effect may be hard to discern. • TVS NIGHT only works with Dolby Digital discs. However, not all discs will respond to the TVS NIGHT function in the same way. • If you use the DIGITA L OUT (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jack and set "DOLBY DIGITAL" to "DOLBY DIGITAL " in "AUDIO SETUP," sound will come from your speakers but it will not have the TVS effect.

L : Front speaker (left) R : Front speaker (right) LS :Rear speaker (left) RS :Rear speaker (right) : Virtual spea ker

REAR L

R

LS

You can select SURROUND directly by pressing SURROUND on the remote or player. Each time you press the button, the item changes. If you select any setting other than “OFF,” the indicator on the player lights up.

RS

SIDE L

LS

R

RS

52

53

1-12

Enjoying Movies

Changing the Angles

3

Press c or ENTER. The number of the angle changes to “-.”

If various angles (multi-angles) for a scene are recorded on the DVD, “ANGLE” appears in the front panel display. This means that you can change the viewing angle. For example, while playing a scene of a train in motion, you can display the view from either the front of the train, the left window of the train or from the right window without having the train’s movement interrupted.

Number Buttons

1

2

3

4

5

6

8

9

7

1 2 ( 2 7) 18(34) T 1:32:55 –

4

Displaying the Subtitles

(9)

Select the angle number using the number buttons or X/x, then press ENTER.

If subtitles are recorded on the discs, you can turn the subtitles on and off whenever you want while playing. If multilingual subtitles are recorded on the disc, you can change the subtitle language while playing, and turn it on or off whenever you want. For example, you can select the language you want to practice and turn the subtitles on for better understanding.

1

2

4

5

6

7

8

9

ANGLE

1

0

The Control Menu appears.

2

z You can select SUBTITLE directly by pressing SUBTITLE. Each time you press the button, the item changes.

z Yo u can select the angle directly by pressing

X/x ENTER

ANGLE. Each time you press the button, the angle changes.

Press X/x to select (ANGLE).

on the same screen, and start playback directly in continuous mode from the chosen angle. The angles are displayed on a screen divided in 9 sections. For details, see page 42.

Note

The number of the angle appear. The number in parentheses indicates the total number of angles. 12(27) 18(34) T 1:32:55

To cancel the setting Select “OFF” in Step 3.

SUBTITLE

DISPLAY

z Yo u can display all the angles recorded on the disc

Press DISPLAY during playback.

Press ENTER.

1

Note Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to change the subtitles on even if multilingual subtitles are recorded on it.

Enjoying Movies

X/x/c ENTER

4

To turn off the Control Menu Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control Menu is turned off.

3

To turn off the Control Menu Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control Menu is turned off.

DISPLAY

Press X/x to select the language. Depending on the DVD, the choice of language varies. When 4 digits are displayed, they indicate the language code. Refer to the language code list on page 82 to see which language the code represents.

PLAY DVD

The angle is changed to the selected angle.

0

3

Press DISPLAY during playback. The Control Menu appears.

2

Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to change the angles even if multi-angles are recorded on the DVD.

Press X/x to select (SUBTITLE), then press ENTER. The options for SUBTITLE appear. 12(27) 18(34) 1:32:55 T

PLAY DVD

PLAY DVD

OFF OFF 1: ENGLISH 2: FRENCH 3: SPANISH

1(9)

54

55

Adjusting the Picture Quality (BNR)

3

As the value increases, the mosaic like patterns on your TV screen will decrease. • 1: reduces the “block noise”. • 2: reduces the “block noise” more than 1. • 3: reduces the “block noise” more than 2.

The Block Noise Reduction (BNR) function adjusts the picture quality by reducing the “block noise” or mosaic like patterns that appear on your TV screen.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

BNR

Press X/x to select a level.

4

Press ENTER.

Enhancing the Playback Picture (DIGITAL VIDEO ENHANCER) The Digital Video Enhancer function makes the picture appear clear and crisp by enhancing the outlines of images on your TV screen. Also, this function can soften the images on the screen. 7

The disc plays with the setting you selected.

0

8

9

0

To cancel the BNR setting Select “OFF” in Step 3.

X/x ENTER

X/x

1

Press DISPLAY twice during playback. The Control Menu appears.

2

Press X/x to select (BNR), then press ENTER. The options for BNR appear. 12(27) 18(34) 1:32:55 T OFF 1 2 3 OFF

PLAY DVD

DISPLAY

To turn off the Control Menu Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control Menu is turned off.

the remote or player. Each time you press the button, the item changes. If you select any setting other than “OFF,” the indicator on the player lights up.

Notes • If the outlines of the images on your screen should become blurred, set “BNR” to “OFF.” • Depending on the disc or the scene being played, the BNR effect may be hard to discern,

As the value increases, the outlines of images on your TV screen will become crisper. • 1: enhances the outline. • 2: enhances the outline more than 1. • 3: enhances the outline more than 2. • SOFT: softens the image (DVD only).

4

Press ENTER. The disc plays with the setting you selected.

To cancel the DIGITAL VIDEO ENHANCER setting Select “OFF” in Step 3. To turn off the Control Menu Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control Menu is turned off.

z Yo u can set BNR while the player is stopped. z You can select BNR directly by pressing BNR on

Press X/x to select a level.

z You can set DIGITAL VIDEO ENHANCER

1

while the player is stopped.

Press DISPLAY twice during playback. The Control Menu appears.

2

Press X/x to select (DIGITAL VIDEO ENHANCER), then press ENTER.

Note

Enjoying Movies

ENTER DISPLAY

3

Depending on the DVD/VIDEO CD disc or the scene being played, noise found in the disc may become more apparent. If this happens, reduce the Digital Video Enhancer level.

The options for DIGITAL VIDEO ENHANCER appear. 12(27) 18(34) 1:32:55 T OFF 1 2 3 SOFT OFF

56

PLAY DVD

57

1-13

Using Various Additional Functions

3

Locking Discs (CUSTOM PARENTAL CONTROL, PARENTAL CONTROL) Yo u can set two kinds of playback restrictions for the desired disc. • Custom Parental Control Yo u can set the playback restrictions so that the player will not play inappropriate discs. • Parental Control Playback of some DVDs can be limited according to a predetermind level such as the age of the users. The same password is used for both Parental Control and Custom Parental Control.

12(27) 18(34) T 1:32:55

4 7

4

6

8

9

Press X/x to select “ON t”, then press ENTER. xIf you have not entered a password The display for registering a new password appears.

Enter a new 4-digit password, then press ENTER .

xWhen you have already registered a password The display for entering the password appears.

x C/X/x ENTER O RETURN

1

Insert the disc you want to lock. If the disc is playing, press x to stop playback.

2

Press DISPLAY while the player is in stop mode. The Control Menu appears.

ENTER

To turn off the Control Menu Press O RETURN, then press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control Menu is turned off.

2

.

In Step 4, select “OFF t,” then press ENTER. Enter your 4-digit password using the number buttons, then press ENTER.

To change the password

1 2 3

CUSTOM PARENTAL CONTROL Enter password, then press

If you make a mistake Press O RETURN, then start from Step 3 again.

1

Enter a 4-digit password by using the number buttons, then press ENTER. The display for confirming the password appears.

0

DISPLAY

1

If you make a mistake entering your password

To turn off the Custom Parental Control function

CUSTOM PARENTAL CONTROL

3

5

Playing the disc for which Custom Parental Control is set Insert the disc for which Custom Parental Control is set. The CUSTOM PARENTAL CONTROL display appears. CUSTOM PARENTAL CONTROL Custom parental control is already set. To play, enter your password and press ENTER .

4

In Step 4, press X/x to select “PASSWORD t,” then press ENTER. The display for entering the password appears. Enter your 4-digit password using the number buttons then press ENTER. Enter a new 4-digit password using the number buttons, then press ENTER. To confirm your password, re-enter it using the number buttons, then press ENTER.

2

Enter your 4-digit password using the number buttons, then press ENTER. The player is ready for playback.

z If you forget your password, enter the 6-digit number “199703” using the number buttons when the CUSTOM PARENTAL CONTROL display asks you for your password, then press ENTER. The display will ask you to enter a new 4-digit password.

Limiting playback by children (Parental Control) Playback of some DVDs can be limited according to a predetermined level such as the age of the users. The “Parental Control” function allows you to set a playback limitation level. A scene that is limited is not played, or it is replaced by a different scene. Number buttons

1

2

4

5

6

7

8

9

3

Using Various Additional Functions

Number buttons

STOP DVD

Enter or re-enter your 4-digit password by using the number buttons, then press ENTER. “Custom parental control is set.” appears and then the screen returns to the Control Menu display.

Press C before you press ENTER and input the correct number.

Yo u can set the same Custom Parental Control password for up to 50 discs. When you set the fifty-first-disc, the first disc is cancelled.

2

5

OFF ON PASSWORD

Custom Parental Control

1

Press X/x to select (CUSTOM PARENTAL CONTROL), then press ENTER. “CUSTOM PARENTAL CONTROL” is selected.

0

H X/x/c ENTER DISPLAY

O RETURN

continued

58

59

1 2

Press X/x to select then press ENTER.

3

Press X/x select “CUSTOM”, then press ENTER. The Setup Display appears.

4

Press X/x to select “CUSTOM SETUP,” then press ENTER. COSTOM SETUP is displayed.

PARENTAL CONTROL Enter password, then press

ENTER

.

6

PARENTAL CONTROL LEVEL: STANDARD: CHANGE PASSWORD

Enter or re-enter your password using the number buttons, then press ENTER. The display for setting the playback limitation level and changing the password appears.

PARENTAL CONTROL LEVEL: STANDARD: CHANGE PASSWORD

Playing the disc for which Parental Control is se t

xIf you have not entered a password The display for registering a new password appears.

OFF USA

PARENTAL CONTROL LEVEL: STANDARD: CHANGE PASSWORD

CUSTOM SETUP

CUSTOM SETUP

OFF USA USA OTHERS

4:

PG13 USA

The lower the value, the more strict the limitation.

If you make a mistake Press O RETURN to go back to the previous screen. To turn off the Setup Display Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Setup Display is turned off.

PARENTAL CONTROL Enter a new 4-digit password, then press ENTER .

8

Insert the disc and press H. The PARENTAL CONTROL display appears.

2

Enter your 4-digit password using the number buttons, then press ENTER. The player starts playback.

z If you forget your password, remove the disc and

CUSTOM SETUP

Press X/x to select “STANDARD,” then press ENTER. The selection items for “STANDARD ” are displayed.

PARENTAL CONTROL LEVEL: STANDARD: CHANGE PASSWORD

1

OFF NC17 R

Press X/x to select a geographic area as the playback limitation level, then press ENTER. The area is selected. When you select “OTHER t” select and enter the standard code in the table on page 62 using the number buttons.

repeat Step 1 to 5 of “Limiting playback by children”. When you are asked to enter your password, enter “199703” using the number buttons, then press ENTER. The display will ask you to enter a new 4digit password. After you enter a new 4-digit password in Step 6, replace the disc in the player and press H. When the PARENTAL CONTROL display appears, enter your new password.

Notes • When you play DVDs which do not have the Parental Control function, playback cannot be limited on this player. • Depending on the DVD, you may be asked to change the parental control level while playing the disc. In this case, enter your password, then change the level. If the Resume Play mode is cancelled, the level returns to the original level.

To turn off the Parental Control function and play the DVD after entering your password Set “LEVEL” to “OFF” in Step 10.

Using Various Additional Functions

7

xWhen you have already registered a password The display for entering the password appears.

Follow Step 6 to enter a new password.

then press ENTER. Parental Control setting is complete.

ON OFF

Press X/x to select “PARENTAL CONTROL t,” then press ENTER.

OFF 8: 7: 6: 5:

10 Select the level you want using X/x,

CUSTOM SETUP

OFF BRIGHT AUTO

Enter a 4-digit password using the number buttons, then press ENTER. The display for confirming the password appears.

2 Press ENTER. The selection items for “LEVEL” are displayed. CUSTOM SETUP

(SETUP),

CUSTOM SETUP AUTO PLAY: DIMMER: PAUSE MODE: PARENTAL CONTROL PLAYBACK MEMORY: TRACK SELECTION:

5

9

CUSTOM SETUP

Press DISPLAY while the player is in stop mode. The Control Menu appears.

To change the password

1

In Step 7, select “CHANGE PASSWORD t” using x, then press ENTER. The display for entering the password appears. continued

60

61

1-14

Area Code Standard

Code number

Standard

Code number

Operation Sound Effects (Sound Feedback)

Argentina

2044

Korea

2304

Australia

2047

Malaysia

2363

Austria

2046

Mexico

2362

Belgium

2057

Netherlands

2376

Brazil

2070

New Zealand

2390

Canada

2079

Norway

2379

Operation

Operation sound

Chile

2090

Pakistan

2427

Power is turned on

One beep

China

2092

Philippines

2424

Power is turned off

Two beeps

Denmark

2115

Portugal

2436

H is pressed

One beep

Finland

2165

Russia

2489

X is pressed

Two beeps

France

2174

Singapore

2501

Playback is stopped

One long beep

Germany

2109

Spain

2149

Operation is not possible

Three beeps

Hong Kong`

2219

Sweden

2499

India

2248

Switzerland

2086

Indonesia

2238

Taiwan

2543

Italy

2254

Thailand

2528

Japan

2276

United Kingdom

2184

The player beeps when the following operations are performed. The default setting of the Sound Feedback function is set to off.

To turn off the Sound Feedback function When there is no disc in the player, press and hold X on the player for more than two seconds. You will hear two beeps and the Sound Feedback function is turned off.

By adjusting the remote signal, you can control your TV or AV amplifier (receiver) with the supplied remote. If you connect the player with a AV amplifier (receiver), you can control the volume with the supplied remote. Notes • Depending on the units being connected, you may not be able to control your TV or AV amplifier (receiver) using some of the buttons below. • If you enter a new code number, the code number previously entered will be erased. • When you replace the batteries of the remote, the code number may be reset to the default setting. Reset the appropriate code number.

To set Sound Feedback A

POWER

Controlling Your TV or AV Amplifier (Receiver) with the Supplied Remote

Power indicator

TV [/1 X Number buttons

[/1

1

2

4

5

6

7

8

9

3

TV/VIDEO VOL

0 1

2

3

4

5

6

8

9

7

0

1

2

Hold down TV [/1, and enter your TV’s manufacturer’s code (see the table) using the number buttons. Then release TV [/1.

Press POWER on the player, then press [/1 on the remote. The power indicator lights up in green. When there is a disc in the player, press A and remove the disc. Then press A again to close the disc tray.

Using Various Additional Functions

Controlling TVs with the remo te

Code numbers of controllable TVs If more than one code number is listed, try entering them one at a time until you find the one that works with your TV.

Press and hold X on the player for more than two seconds. Yo u will hear one beep and the Sound Feedback function is turned on.

continued

62

63 Settings and Adjustments Manufacture

Code number

Manufacture

Code number

Sony (default)

01

Philco

03,04

Akai

04

Philips

08,21

AOC

04

Pioneer

16

Centurion

12

Portland

03

Coronado

03

Quasar

06,18

Curis-Mathes

12

Radio Shack

05,14

Daytron

12

RCA

04,10

Emerson

03,04,14

Sampo

12

Fisher

11

Samsung

20

General Electric

06,10

Sanyo

11

Gold Star

03,04,17

Scott

12

Hitachi

02,03

Sears

07,10,11

J.C.Penney

04,12

Sharp

03,05,18

JVC

09

Sylvania

08,12

KMC

03

Teknika

03,08,14

Magnavox

03,08,12

Toshiba

07

Marantz

04,13

Wards

03,04,12 12

NEC

04,12

15

Panasonic

06,19

Zenith

Using the Setup Display

LANGUAGE SETUP OSD: DVD MENU: AUDIO: SUBTITLE:

TV [/1

Number buttons

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

VOL

By using the Setup Display, you can make various adjustments to items such as picture and sound. You can also set a language for the subtitles and the Setup Display, among other things. For details on each Setup Display item, see page 66. For an overall list of Setup Display items, see page 83.

Hold down TV [/1, and enter your AV receiver’s manufacturer’s code (see the table) using the number buttons. Then release TV [/1.

4

How to use the Setup Display

Press X/x to select the setup item from the displayed list: “LANGUAGE SETUP, ” “SCREEN SETUP, ” “CUSTOM SETUP, ” or “AUDIO SETUP,” and “SPEAKER SETUP.” Then press ENTER. The selected setup item appears. Example: “SCREEN SETUP” Selected item

X/x ENTER

Code numbers of controllable AV amplifiers (receivers) If more than one code number is listed, try entering them one at a time until you find the one that works with your AV amplifiers (receiver). Manufacturer Sony

91, 89

Denon

84, 85, 86

Kenwood

92, 93

Onkyo

81, 82, 83

By pressing

You can

Pioneer

99

TV [/1

Turn the TV on or off

Sansui

87

VOL

Adjust the volume of the TV

Technics

97, 98

TV/VIDEO

Switch the TV’s input source between the TV and other input sources

Yamaha

94, 95, 96

Controlling the AV amplifier (receiver) You can change the volume of the AV amplifier (receiver) using VOL +/–.

SCREEN SETUP TV TYPE: SCREEN SAVER: BACKGROUND:

DISPLAY

4:3 LETTER BOX ON JACKET PICTURE

Setup items

1

Press DISPLAY when the player is in stop mode. The Control Menu appears.

2

Press X/x to select (SETUP), then press ENTER. The options for SETUP appear.

Code number

Controlling the TV You can control your TV using the buttons below.

ENGLISH ENGLISH ORIGINAL ENGLISH

( 47 ) :

:

Press X/x to select “CUSTOM” then press ENTER. The Setup Display appears.

Select an item using X/x, then press ENTER. The options for the selected item appear. Example: “TV TYPE” SCREEN SETUP TV TYPE: SCREEN SAVER: BACKGROUND:

STOP DVD

QUICK CUSTOM RESET QUICK

3

5

4:3 LETTER BOX 4:3 LETTER BOX 4:3 PAN SCAN 16:9

Options

6

Settings and Adjustments

MGA/Mitsubishi 04,12,13,17 Yorx

Controlling AV amplifiers (receivers) with the remote

Select a setting using X/x, then press ENTER. The setting is selected and setup is complate. Example: “16:9”

continued

64

65

1-15

Selected setting SCREEN SETUP TV TYPE: SCREEN SAVER: BACKGROUND:

16:9 ON JACKETPICTURE

z If you select “OTHERS t” in “DVD MENU,”

Setting the Display or Sound Track Language

“SUBTITLE,” and “AUDIO,” select and enter the language code from the list using the number buttons (page 82). After you have made a selection, the language code (4 digits) is displayed the next time you select “OTHERS t.”

(LANGUAGE SETUP)

Note

To turn off the Setup Display Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Setup Display is turned off. z If you select “QUICK” in Step 3, you will enter the Quick Setup mode (page 25). Follow from Step 5 of the Quick Setup explanation to make basic adjustments.

“LANGUAGE SETUP” allows you to set various languages for the on-screen display or sound track.

(SCREEN SETUP) Choose settings according to the TV to be connected. Select “SCREEN SETUP” in the Setup Display. For details on using the display, see “Using the Setup Display” (page 65). The default settings are underlined.

Select “LANGUAGE SETUP” in the Setup Display. For details on using the display, see “Using the Setup Display” (page 65). LANGUAGE SETUP OSD: DVD MENU: AUDIO: SUBTITLE:

z If you select “RESET” in Step 3, you can reset all of the “SETUP” settings on page 83 to 85 (except for PARENTAL CONTROL) to the default settings. After you select “RESET” and press ENTER, select “YES” to reset the settings (it takes a few seconds to complete), or select “NO” and press ENTER to return to the Control Menu. Do not press POWER or [/1 when resetting the player.

When you select a language that is not recorded on the DVD, one of the recorded languages will be automatically selected (except for the “OSD”).

Settings for the Display

SCREEN SETUP TV TYPE: SCREEN SAVER: BACKGROUND:

4:3 LETTER BOX ON JACKET PICTURE

ENGLISH ENGLISH ORIGINAL ENGLISH

xTV TYPE (DVD only) Selects the aspect ratio of the connected TV (4:3 standard or wide).

xOSD (On-Screen Display) Switches the display language on the screen. Selects the language from the displayed list.

xAUDIO (DVD only) Switches the language of the sound track. Selects the language from the displayed list. When you select “ORIGINAL,” the language given priority in the disc is selected.

Select this when you connect a 4:3 screen TV. Displays a wide picture with bands on the upper and lower portions of the screen.

4:3 PA N SCAN

Select this when you connect a 4:3 screen TV. Automatically displays the wide picture on the entire screen and cuts off the portions that do not fit.

16:9

Select this when you connect a wide-screen TV or a TV with a wide mode function.

xSUBTITLE (DVD only) Switch the language of the subtitle. Select the language from the displayed list. When you select “AUDIO FOLLOW, ” the language for the subtitles changes according to the language you selected for the sound track.

Settings and Adjustments

xDVD MENU (DVD only) You can select the desired language for the DVD menu.

4:3 LETTER BOX

continued

66

67

4:3 LETTER BOX

xPA USE MODE (DVD only) Selects the picture in pause mode.

Custom Settings (CUSTOM SETUP)

4:3 PAN SCAN

CUSTOM SETUP AUTO PLAY: DIMMER: PAUSE MODE: PARENTAL CONTROL PLAYBACK MEMORY: TRACK SELECTION:

Note Depending on the DVD, “4:3 LETTER BOX” may be selected automatically instead of “4:3 PAN SCAN” or vice versa.

ON

Turns on the screen saver.

OFF

Turns off the screen saver.

xBACKGROUND Selects the background color or picture on the TV screen in stop mode or while playing a CD. JACKET PICTURE

GRAPHICS

The jacket picture (still picture) appears in the background, but only when the jacket picture is already recorded on the disc (CD-EXTRA etc.). If the disc does not contain a jacket picture, the “GRAPHICS” picture appears. A preset picture stored in the player appears in the background.

BLUE

The background color is blue.

BLACK

The background color is black.

FRAME

The picture, including subjects that do not move dynamically, is output in high resolution.

xPARENTAL CONTROL t (DVD only) Set a password and playback limitation level for DVDs with playback limitation for children. For details, see “Limiting playback by children (Parental Control)” (page 59).

OFF BRIGHT AUTO ON OFF

xPLAYBACK MEMORY The player can store the SUBTITLE and other settings of each disc for up to 50 discs (Playback Memory). Set the Playback Memory function on or off.

xAUTO PLAY Selects the Auto Play setting when you turn on the player. OFF

Does not use “TIMER,” “DEMO1,” or “DEMO2” to start playback.

TIMER

Starts playing when the player is turned on. The player can be played at any time when connected to a timer (not supplied). Set the timer when the player is in standby mode (the power indicator lights up in red).

DEMO1

Starts playing the first demonstration automatically.

DEMO2

Starts playing the second demonstration automatically.

ON

Stores the settings in memory when you eject the disc.

OFF

Does not store the settings in memory.

The following settings are stored in memory by the Playback Memory function. — AUDIO (page 48)* — BNR (page 56) — DIGITAL VIDEO ENHANCER (page 57) — SUBTITLE (page 55)* — SURROUND (page 50) ∗DVD only

OFF

No priority given.

AUTO

Priority given.

Notes • When you set the item to “AUTO,” the language may change. The “TRACK SELECTION” setting has higher priority than the “AUDIO” settings in “LANGUAGE SETUP” (page 66). • If you set “DTS” to “OFF” (page 71), the DTS sound track is not played even if you set “TRACK SELECTION” to “AUTO”. • If PCM, DTS and Dolby Digital sound tracks have the same number of channels, the player selects PCM, DTS and Dolby Digital sound tracks in this order. • Depending on the DVD, the audio channel with priority may be predetermined. In this case, you cannot give priority to the DTS, Dolby Digital, or format by selecting “AUTO.”

Settings and Adjustments

xSCREEN SAVER Turns on and off the screen saver so that the screen saver image appears when you leave the player in pause or stop mode for 15 minutes, or when you play back a CD for more than 15 minutes. The screen saver will help prevent your display device from becoming damaged (ghosting). Press H to turn off the screen saver.

The picture, including subjects that move dynamically, is output with no jitter. Normally select this position.

Allows setting up Parental Control and other settings. Select “CUSTOM SETUP” in the Setup Display. For details on using the display, see “Using the Setup Display” (page 65). The default settings are underlined.

16:9

AUTO

xTRACK SELECTION (DVD only) Gives the sound track which contains the highest number of channels priority when you play a DVD on which multiple audio formats (PCM, DTS, or Dolby Digital format) are recorded.

Notes • The player can store the settings of up to 50 discs. When you store the setting of disc number 51, the first disc setting is canceled. • Depending on the DVD, the information stored in the disc takes priority over the Playback Memory settings and the function does not work. • During playback, do not turn off the player by pressing POWER on the player. Doing so may cancel the settings. When you turn off the player, press x first to stop playback and then press [/1 on the remote. After the power indicator lights up in red and the player enters standby mode, press POWER on the player.

xDIMMER Adjusts the lighting of the front panel display. BRIGHT

Makes the front panel display bright.

DARK

Makes the front panel display dark.

OFF

Turns off the lighting of the front panel display.

68

69

1-16

Settings for the Sound

STANDARD

Normally, select this position.

TV MODE

Makes the low sounds clear even if you turn the volume down. It is especially recommended when you listen to the sound using the speakers of the TV.

(AUDIO SETUP) “AUDIO SETUP” allows you to set the sound according to the playback and connection conditions. Select “AUDIO SETUP” in the Setup Display. For details on using the display, see “Using the Setup Display” (page 65). The default settings are underlined. AUDIO SETUP AUDIO ATT: OFF AUDIO DRC: STANDARD CENTER SPEAKER EQ: FLAT DOWNMIX: DOLBY SURROUND DIGITAL OUT: ON D-PCM DOLBY DIGITAL: DTS: OFF 48kHz/96kHz PCM: 48kHz/16bit

OFF

Turns off the audio attenuation. Normally, select this position.

ON

Reduces the audio output level so that no sound distortion occurs. Select this when the playback sound from the speakers is distorted.

xAUDIO DRC (Dynamic Range Control) (DVD only) Makes the sound clear when the volume is turned down when playing a DVD that has the AUDIO DRC function. This affects the output from the following jacks: — LINE OUT L/R (AUDIO) 1/2 jacks — 5.1CH OUTPUT jacks — DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jack only when “DOLBY DIGITAL” is set to “D-PCM” (page 71).

Gives you the feeling of being at a live performance. When you use high quality speakers, it is even more effective.

ON

Makes the spoken track clear when speech is difficult to hear. This function affects the output to the center speaker that is connected to 5.1CH OUTPUT. Outputs the spoken track as it was recorded.

ENHANCED

Enhances the spoken track only.

SOFT

Makes the sound softer by rounding out the sound frequency above 8kHz. Select this when the spoken track sounds shrill.

xDOWNMIX (DVD only) Switches the mixing down methods when you play a DVD on which rear signal components such as LS, RS, or S are recorded in Dolby Digital format. For details on the rear signal components, see “Changing the Sound” (page 48). This function affects the output of the following jacks: — LINE OUT L/R (AUDIO) 1/2 jacks — DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL or COAXICAL) jack when “DOLBY DIGITAL” is set to “D-PCM” (page 71). DOLBY SURROUND

xDOLBY DIGITAL Selects the Dolby Digital signals output via the DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jack. D-PCM

Select this when the player is connected to an audio component lacking a built-in Dolby Digital decoder. You can select whether the signals conform to Dolby Surround (Pro Logic) or not by making adjustments to the “DOWNMIX” item in “AUDIO SETUP. ” (page 70)

DOLBY DIGITA L

Select this when the player is connected to an audio component with a built-in Dolby Digital decoder. If the player is connected to an audio component lacking a builtin Dolby Digital decoder, do not set this. Otherwise, when you play the Dolby Digital sound track, a loud noise (or no sound) will come out from the speakers, affecting your ears or causing the speakers to be damaged.

xDIGITAL OUT Selects if audio signals are output via the DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jack.

xCENTER SPEAKER EQ (equalizer)

FLAT

Select this when the player is connected to an audio component that does not conform to Dolby Surround (Pro Logic). All of the output signals are downmixed to 2 channels without the Dolby Surround (Pro Logic) effect.

OFF

Normally, select this position. When you select “ON,” set “DOLBY DIGITA L,” “DTS”, and “48kHz/ 96kHz PCM”. For details on setting these items, see “Setting the digital output signal.” The player does not output the audio signals via the DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jack. The influence of the digital circuit upon the analog circuit is minimal.

Setting the digital output signal Switches the method of outputting audio signals when you connect the following component using an optical or a coaxial digital cord via the DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jack. — Amplifier (receiver) with digital input jack — Amplifier (receiver) with a built-in DTS or DOLBY DIGITAL decoder — MD or DAT deck For connection details, see page 19. Select “DOLBY DIGITAL,” and “DTS” after setting “DIGITAL OUT” to “ON.”

xDTS Select if DTS signals are output via the DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL and COAXIAL) jack. OFF

Select this when the player is connected to an audio component lacking a built-in DTS decoder. Note, however, that the DTS signals contained in a CD are output even if “OFF” is selected.

ON

Select this when the player is connected to an audio component having a built-in DTS decoder. If the player is connected to an audio component lacking a built-in DTS decoder, do not set this. Otherwise, when you play the DTS sound track, a loud noise (or no sound) will come out from the speakers, affecting your ears or causing the speakers to be damaged.

AUDIO SETUP AUDIO ATT: OFF AUDIO DRC: STANDARD CENTER SPEAKER EQ: FLAT DOWNMIX: DOLBY SURROUND ON DIGITAL OUT: D-PCM DOLBY DIGITAL: DTS: OFF 48kHz/96kHz PCM: 48kHz/16bit

Select this when the player is connected to an audio component that conforms to Dolby Surround (Pro Logic). The output signals which reproduce the Dolby Surround effect are downmixed to 2 channels.

Settings and Adjustments

xAUDIO ATT (attenuation) If the playback sound is distorted, set this item to “ON.” The player reduces the audio output level. This function affects the output of the following jacks: — LINE OUT L/R (AUDIO) 1/2 jacks — 5.1CH OUTPUT jacks

WIDE RANGE

NORMAL

continued

70

71 x48kHz/96kHz PCM (DVD only) Selects the sampling frequency of the audio signal to be output via the DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jacks. 48kHz/16bit

The audio signals of DVDs are always converted to 48kHz/16 bit.

96kHz/24bit

All types of signals including 96kHz/24bit are output in their original format. However, if the signal is encrypted for copyright protection purposes, the signal is only output as 48 kHz/16 bit. If a receiver (amplifier) which cannot accept 96Hz is connected to the player, do not set this. Otherwise, a loud noise may come out from the speakers.

SMALL

Settings for the Speakers (SPEAKER SETUP) To obtain the best possible surround sound, set the size of the speakers you have connected and their distance from your listening position. Then use the test tone to adjust the volume and the balance of the speakers to the same level. This setting is effective when connecting the speaker with 5.1CH OUTPUT jacks (page 21).

• REAR NONE

Notes

• SUBWOOFER NONE

If you do not connect a subwoofer, select this. This activates the Dolby Digital bass redirection circuitry and outputs the LFE signals from the front speakers as long as the front speaker size is set to “LARGE.”

YES

If you connect a subwoofer, select this to output the LFE (low frequency effect) channel from the subwoofer. When you set the other speakers settings to “SMALL,” the subwoofer makes up for the missing bass frequencies of the speakers.

If you do not connect rear speakers, select this.

LARGE (REAR/SIDE): Normally select this position. Select either of these according to the rear speaker’s position*.

Select “SPEAKER SETUP” in the Setup Display. For details, see “Using the Setup Display” (page 65). The default settings are underlined.

SMALL

SPEAKER SETUP SIZE: DISTANCE: BALANCE: LEVEL: TEST TONE: OFF LARGE FRONT: LARGE CENTER: LARGE(REAR) REAR: SUBWOOFER: YES

(REAR/SIDE): When the sound cracks or the surround sound effects are difficult to hear, select this. Select either of these according to the rear speaker’s position*. This activates the Dolby Digital bass redirection circuitry and outputs the bass frequencies of the rear speaker from other speakers.

Notes • The cut off frequency for the subwoofer is fixed at 120 Hz. • If your speakers are too small to reproduce low bass frequencies, please set all speaker settings to “SMALL” and utilize a subwoofer for low frequency sound. • Even if there are fewer than 6 speakers connected, the player distributes the audio signal components to the front speakers.

xDISTANCE * Rear speaker position (REAR/SIDE) Correctly specify the location of the rear speakers to enjoy the SURROUND effect. •Set to the “SIDE,” if the location of the rear speakers corresponds to section A below. •Set to the “REAR,” if the location of the rear speakers corresponds to section B below.

To return to the default setting Select the item, then press CLEAR. xSIZE Selects the size of the speakers to be connected. • FRONT

This setting affects only “VIRTUAL REAR SHIFT,” “VIRTUAL MULTI REAR,” and “VIRTUAL MULTI DIMENSION” mode (page 51).

The default distance setting for the speakers in relation to the listening position is shown below.

12ft/3.6m 12ft/3.6m

12ft/3.6m

LARGE Normally select this position. SMALL

When the sound cracks or the surround sound effects are difficult to hear, select this. This activates the Dolby Digital bass redirection circuitry and outputs the bass frequencies of the front speaker from the subwoofer.

10ft/3.0m

10ft/3.0m

90 45

• CENTER NONE

Settings and Adjustments

• Even if you set “48kHz/96kHz PCM” in “AUDIO SETUP” to “96kHz/24bit,” the sampling frequency is converted to 48kHz/16bit when a SURROUND mode (page 50) is selected. • The analog audio signals from the LINE OUT L/R (AUDIO) 1/2 jacks are not affected by this setting and keep their original sampling frequency level.

When the sound cracks or the surround sound effects are difficult to hear, select this. This activates the Dolby Digital bass redirection circuitry and outputs the bass frequencies of the center speaker from other speakers.

20

Be sure to change the value in the Setup Display when you move the speakers. The default adjustments are in parentheses.

If you do not connect a center speaker, select this.

LARGE Normally select this position.

continued

72

73

1-17

FRONT (12ft/3.6m)

Front speaker distance from the listening position can be set in 1 foot (0.3 meter) increments from 4 to 50 feet (1.2 to 15.2 meters).

CENTER (12ft/3.6m)

Center speaker distance can be moved up to 2 feet (0.6 meters) backward from the front speakers or 5 feet (1.5 meters) forward closer to the listening position, in 1 foot (0.3 meter) increments.

REAR (10ft/3m)

Rear speaker distance can be moved up to 16 feet (4.8 meters) closer to your listening position from the front speaker position, in 1 foot (0.3 meter) increments.

Notes • If each or the front or rear speakers are not placed at an equal distance from your listening position, set the distance according to the closest speaker. • Do not place the rear speakers farther away from your listening position than the front speakers.

xBALANCE

You can vary the level of each speaker as follows. Be sure to set “TEST TONE” to “ON” for easy adjustment. The default adjustments are in parentheses. CENTER (0dB)

Adjust the level of the center speaker (–6dB to +6dB, 0.5dB increments).

REAR (0dB)

Adjust the level of the rear speakers (–6dB to +6dB, 0.5dB increments).

SUBWOOFER Adjust the level of the subwoofer (–10dB to +10dB, (0dB) 0.5dB increments).

From your listening position, select “BALANCE” or “LEVEL” and adjust the value of “BALANCE” using C/c and “LEVEL” using X/x. The test tone is emitted from both left and right speakers simultaneously.

4

Select “TEST TONE” and set “TEST TONE” to “OFF” to turn off the test tone.

Note When you adjust the speaker settings, the sound cuts off for a moment.

To adjust the volume of all the speakers at one time Use the amplifier’s (receiver’s) volume control. xTEST TONE The speakers will emit a test tone. Use this when you use the 5.1CH OUTPUT jacks and adjust the “BALANCE” and “LEVEL”. OFF

The test tone is not emitted from the speakers.

ON

The test tone is emitted from each speaker in sequence while adjusting balance or level. When you select one of the “SPEAKER SETUP” items, the test tone is emitted from both left and right speakers simultaneously.

FRONT (0dB) Adjust the balance between the front left and right speakers (– 6dB [L] to +6dB [R], 0.5dB increments). REAR (0dB)

3

Adjust the balance between the rear left and right speakers (– 6dB [L] to +6dB [R], 0.5dB increments).

Settings and Adjustments

Yo u can vary the balance of the left and right speakers as follows. Be sure to set “TEST TONE” to “ON” for easy adjustment. The default adjustments are in parentheses.

xLEVEL

Adjusting the speaker volume and leve l

1

After you stop playback, select “SPEAKER SETUP” in the Setup Display.

2

Select “TEST TONE” and set “TEST TONE” to “ON.” Yo u will hear the test tone from each speaker in sequence.

74

75 Additional Information

Troubleshooting If you experience any of the following difficulties while using the player, use this troubleshooting guide to help remedy the problem before requesting repairs. Should any problem persist, consult your nearest Sony dealer.

Power The power is not turned on. , Check that the AC power cord is connected securely.

Sound There is no sound.

The remote does not function.

, The connecting cord is not connected securely. , The connecting cord is damaged. , The player is connected to the wrong input jack on the amplifier (receiver) (page 21, 23, 24). , The amplifier (receiver) input was not changed so that you can listen to the player. , The player is in pause mode or in Slow-motion play mode. , The player is in fast forward or fast reverse mode. , If the audio signal does not come through the DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jack, check the audio settings (page 71).

, There are obstacles between the remote and the player. , The distance between the remote and the player is too far. , The remote is not pointed at the remote sensor on the player. , The batteries in the remote are weak.

Picture There is no picture. , The connecting cords are not connected securely. , The connecting cords are damaged. , The player is not connected to the correct TV input jack (page 17). , The video input on the TV is not set so that you can view pictures from the player.

Sound is noisy. , The disc is dirty or flawed. , When playing a CD with DTS sound tracks, noise will come from the LINE OUT L/R (AUDIO) 1/2 jacks (page 31).

Sound distortion occurs.

Even though you set the aspect ratio in “TV TYPE” of “SCREEN SETUP, ” the picture does not fill the screen. , The aspect ratio of the disc is fixed on your DVD.

The disc does not play. , There is no disc inside. , The disc is turned over. Insert the disc with the playback side facing down on the disc tray. , The disc is skewed. , The player cannot play CD-ROMs, etc. (page 6). , The region code on the DVD does not match the player. , Moisture has condensed inside the player. Remove the disc and leave the player turned on for about half an hour. Turn on the power again before playing the disc (page 3).

The disc does not start playing from the beginning.

, Check the speaker connections and setting (page 21, 27, 71) , Depending on the DVD, the output signal may not be the entire 5.1 channels. It may be monaural or stereo even if the sound track is recorded in Dolby Digital format.

, Program Play, Shuffle Play, Repeat Play, or A-B Repeat Play has been selected (page 35). Press CLEAR to cancel these functions before playing a disc. , Resume Play has been selected. During stop, press x on the player or the remote and then start playback DVD (page 32). , The title, DVD or PBC menu automatically appears on the TV screen.

The sound comes from the center speaker only.

The player starts playing the disc automatically.

, Depending on the disc, the sound may come from the center speaker only. , Set “SURROUND”to “OFF” in the Control Menu display (page 50).

, The DVD features an auto playback function. , “AUTO PLAY ” in “CUSTOM SETUP” is set to “TIMER” (page 68).

The surround effect is difficult to hear when you are playing a Dolby Digital sound track.

Playback stops automatically. , Some discs may contain an auto pause signal. While playing such a disc, the player stops playback at the auto pause signal.

You cannot perform some functions such as stop, Search, Slow-motion play, Repeat Play, Shuffle Play, or Program Play. , Depending on the disc, you may not be able to do some of the operations above. See the operating manual that comes with the disc.

Messages do not appear on the screen in the language you want. , In the Setup Display, select the desired language for the on-screen display in “OSD” under “LANGUAG E SETUP” (page 66).

The language for the sound track cannot be changed. , Multilingual tracks are not recorded on the DVD being played. , The DVD prohibits the changing of the language for the sound track.

The subtitle language cannot be changed. , Multilingual subtitles are not recorded on the DVD being played. , The DVD prohibits the changing of the subtitles.

Additional Information

, Set “AUDIO ATT ” in “AUDIO SETUP” to “ON” (page 70).

Picture noise appears. , The disc is dirty or flawed. , If the picture output from your player goes through your VCR to get to your TV, the copyprotection signal applied to some DVD programs could affect picture quality. If you still experience problems even when you connect your player directly to your TV, please try connecting your player to your TV’s S video input (page 17).

Operation

The subtitle cannot be turned off. , The DVD prohibits the subtitles being turned off.

continued

76

77

1-18

The angles cannot be changed. , Multi-angles are not recorded on the DVD being played. The angle can be changed when the “ANGLE” indicator lights up on the front panel display (page 9). , The DVD prohibits changing of the angles.

The player does not operate properly. , When static electricity, etc., causes the player to operate abnormally, press POWER on the player to turn the player off and then on again.

Self-diagnosis Function

Glossary

(When letters/numbers appear in the Chapter (page 9)

display) When the self-diagnosis function is activated to prevent the player from malfunctioning, a five-character service number (e.g., C 13 00) with a combination of a letter and digits appears on the screen and the front panel display. In this case, check the following table.

Nothing is displayed on the front panel display.

C:13:00

, “DIMMER” in “CUSTOM SETUP” is set to “OFF.” Set “DIMMER” to “BRIGHT” or “DARK” (page 68).

Sections of a picture or a music feature that are smaller than titles. A title is composed of several chapters. Depending on the disc, no chapters may be recorded.

Digital audio compression technology developed by Dolby Laboratories. This technology conforms to 5.1-channel surround sound. The rear channel is stereo and there is a discrete subwoofer channel in this format. Dolby Digital provides the same 5.1 discrete channels of high quality digital audio found in Dolby Digital cinema audio systems. Good channel separation is realized because all of the channel data are recorded discretely and little deterioration is realized because all channel data processing is digital. Dolby Surround (Pro Logic) (page 24)

Index (CD)/Video Index (VIDEO CD) (page 9)

Audio signal processing technology that Dolby Laboratories developed for surround sound. When the input signal contains a surround component, the Pro Logic process outputs the front, center and rear signals. The rear channel is monaural.

A number that divides a track into sections to easily locate the point you want on a VIDEO CD or CD. Depending on the disc, no index may be recorded.

Technology that Sony developed to enjoy surround sound in a home using 4 or more speakers. It simulates the sound of a movie editing studio instead of the usual concert hall so that you can enjoy the surround sound of a movie theater in the comfort of your own home.

Cause and/or Corrective Action

C 13

The disc is dirty. , Clean the disc with a soft cloth (page 7).

C 31

The disc is not inserted correctly. , Re-insert the disc correctly.

, The self-diagnosis function was activated. (See the table on page 78.)

The disc tray does not open and “LOCKED” appears on the front panel display. , Contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility.

E XX To prevent a malfunction, the (xx is a number) player has performed the selfdiagnosis function. , Contact your nearest Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility and give the 5-character service number. Example: E 61 10

DTS (page 21, 71)

Digital audio compression technology that Digital Theater Systems, Inc. developed. This technology conforms to 5.1-channel surround sound. The rear channel is stereo and there is a discrete subwoofer channel in this format. DTS provides the same 5.1

Parental Control (page 59)

A function of the DVD used to limit playback of the disc according to the age of the user and the limitation level in each country. The limitation varies from disc to disc; when it is activated, or playback is completely prohibited, violent scenes are skipped or replaced with other scenes, etc. continued

78

79

Region Code (page 6)

Language Code List

This system is used to protect the copyrights. A region number is allocated on each DVD player or DVD disc according to the sales region. Each region code is shown on the player as well as on the disc packaging. The player can play the discs that match its region code. The player can also play discs with the “ ALL ” mark. Even when the region code is not shown on the DVD, the region limit may still be activated.

For details, see page 48, 55, 66. The language spellings conform to the ISO 639: 1988 (E/F) standard.

Scene (page 9)

On a VIDEO CD with PBC (playback control) functions, the menu screens, moving pictures and still pictures are divided into sections called “scenes.” Title (page 9)

The longest section of a picture or music feature on a DVD, movie, etc., in video software, or the entire album in audio software.

Code Language

Code Language

Code Language

Code Language

1027 1028 1032 1039 1044 1045 1051 1052 1053 1057 1059 1060 1061 1066

1183 1186 1194 1196 1203 1209 1217 1226 1229 1233 1235 1239 1245 1248 1253 1254 1257 1261 1269 1283 1287 1297 1298 1299 1300 1301 1305 1307 1311 1313 1326 1327 1332 1334 1345

1347 1349 1350 1352 1353 1356 1357 1358 1363 1365 1369 1376 1379 1393 1403 1408 1417 1428 1435 1436 1463 1481

1507 1508 1509 1511 1512 1513 1514 1515 1516 1517 1521 1525 1527 1528 1529 1531 1532 1534 1535 1538 1539 1540 1543 1557 1564 1572 1581 1587 1613 1632 1665 1684 1697

1067 1070 1079 1093 1097 1103 1105 1109 1130 1142 1144 1145 1149 1150 1151 1157 1165 1166 1171 1174 1181

Track (page 9)

Sections of a picture or a music feature on a VIDEO CD or CD (the length of a song). TV Virtual Surround (TVS) (page 50)

Technology from Sony developed to produce surround sound for home use using just a stereo TV. Designed to work with the sound characteristics of your TV, this technology brings the excitement of surround sound to your home using nothing more than your stereo TV’s internal speakers. Furthermore, various TVS modes are available. For example, TVS WIDE uses just two speakers to create a virtual sound environment that makes you feel like you are surrounded by multiple steakers.

80

Additional Information

First three characters of the service number

DVD (page 6)

A disc that contains up to 8 hours of moving pictures even though its diameter is the same as a CD. The data capacity of a single-layer and single-sided DVD is 4.7 GB (Giga Byte), which is 7 times that of a CD. The data capacity of a double-layer and single-sided DVD is 8.5 GB, a single-layer and doublesided DVD is 9.4 GB, and double-layer and double-sided DVD is 17GB. The picture data uses the MPEG 2 format, one of the worldwide standards of digital compression technology. The picture data is compressed to about 1/40 (average) of its original size. The DVD also uses a variable rate coding technology that changes the data to be allocated according to the status of the picture. Audio information is recorded in Dolby Digital as well as in PCM, allowing you to enjoy a more real audio presence. Furthermore, various advanced functions such as the multi-angle, multilingual, and Parental Control functions are provided with the DVD.

Digital Cinema Sound (DCS) (page 51)

Dolby Digital (page 21, 71)

5 numbers or letters are displayed on the screen and on the front panel display.

discrete channels of high quality digital audio. Good channel separation is realized because all of the channel data is recorded discretely and little deterioration is realized because all channel data processing is digital.

82

1-19

Afar Abkhazian Afrikaans Amharic Arabic Assamese Aymara Azerbaijani Bashkir Byelorussian Bulgarian Bihari Bislama Bengali; Bangla Tibetan Breton Catalan Corsican Czech Welsh Danish German Bhutani Greek English Esperanto Spanish Estonian Basque Persian Finnish Fiji Faroese French Frisian

Irish Scots Gaelic Galician Guarani Gujarati Hausa Hindi Croatian Hungarian Armenian Interlingua Interlingue Inupiak Indonesian Icelandic Italian Hebrew Japanese Yiddish Javanese Georgian Kazakh Greenlandic Cambodian Kannada Korean Kashmiri Kurdish Kirghiz Latin Lingala Laothian Lithuanian Latvian; Lettish Malagasy

1482 1483 1489 1491 1495 1498 1501 1502 1503 1505 1506

Maori Macedonian Malayalam Mongolian Moldavian Marathi Malay Maltese Burmese Nauru Nepali Dutch Norwegian Occitan (Afan)Oromo Oriya Punjabi Polish Pashto; Pushto Portuguese Quechua RhaetoRomance Kirundi Romanian Russian Kinyarwanda Sanskrit Sindhi Sangho Serbo-Croatian Singhalese Slovak Slovenian

Samoan Shona Somali Albanian Serbian Siswati Sesotho Sundanese Swedish Swahili Tam il Telugu Tajik Thai Tigrinya Turk men Tagalog Setswana Tonga Turk ish Tsonga Tatar Twi Ukrainian Urdu Uzbek Vietnamese Volapük Wolof Xhosa Yoruba Chinese Zulu

1703 Not specified

CUSTOM SETUP (page 68)

List of Setup Display Items

AUTO PLAY

OFF TIMER DEMO1 DEMO2

DIMMER

BRIGHT DARK OFF

PAUSE MODE

AUTO FRAME

The default settings are underlined. LANGUAG E SETUP (page 66) OSD

ENGLISH FRENCH SPANISH PORTUGUESE

DVD MENU

ENGLISH FRENCH SPANISH PORTUGUESE GERMAN ITAL IAN DUTCH CHINESE JAPAN ESE DANISH SWEDISH FINNISH NORWEGIAN RUSSIAN OTHERS t

PARENTAL CONTROL t

SUBTITLE

AUDIO FOLLOW (All other selections are same as the DVD MENU language.)

SCREEN SETUP (page 67) TV TYPE

4:3 LETTER BOX 4:3 PA N SCAN 16:9

SCREEN SAVER

ON OFF

BACKGROUND

JACKET PICTURE GRAPHICS BLUE BLACK

Additional Information

ORIGINAL (All other selections are same as the DVD MENU language.)

83

84

SPEAKER SETUP (page 72)

BALANCE

LEVEL

FRONT

LARGE SMALL

CENTER

NONE LARGE SMALL

REAR

NONE LARGE (REAR) LARGE (SIDE) SMALL (REAR) SMALL (SIDE)

SUBWOOFER

NONE YES

FRONT

4ft ~ 50ft (1.2m ~ 15.2m)

CENTER

0ft ~ 52ft (0m ~ 15.8m) (It changes according to the distance from the front speaker.)

REAR

0ft ~ 50ft (0m ~ 15.2m) (It changes according to the distance from the front speaker.)

FRONT

- 6dB ~ + 6dB

REAR

- 6dB ~ + 6dB

CENTER

- 6dB ~ + 6dB

REAR

- 6dB ~ + 6dB

SUBWOOFER

- 10dB ~ + 10dB

OF F ON

Additional Information

TEST TONE

TRACK SELECTION

OFF AUTO

AUDIO ATT

OFF ON

AUDIO DRC

STANDARD TV MODE WIDE RANGE

CENTER SPEAKER EQ

FLAT ENHANCED SOFT

DOWNMIX

DOLBY SURROUND NORMAL

DIGITA L OUT

ON

OFF

continued

DISTANCE (The distance from the listening position.)

ON OFF

AUDIO SETUP (page 70)

AUDIO

SIZE

PLAYB ACK MEMORY

85

1-20 1-20E

DOLBY DIGITA L D-PCM DOLBY DIGITA L DTS

OFF ON

48kHz/96kHz PCM

48kHz/16bit 96kHz/24bit

DVP-NS400D SECTION 2 DISASSEMBLY Note: Follow the disassembly procedure in the numerical order given.

2-1. CASE REMOVAL

2-3. REAR PANEL REMOVAL (EXCEPT AEP, UK)

4 Case 6 Rear panel

1 Three tapping screws 2 Tapping screw

1 Connector (CN101)

2 Three screws (B3)

5 Claw 3 Six screws (B3)

4 Claw

3 Tapping screw

2-2. MB-98 BOARD REMOVAL

2-4. REAR PANEL, ER-15 BOARD REMOVAL (AEP, UK)

1 Three flexible flat cables (FMO-001: CN201/ 2 Two flexible flat cables FMO-002: CN202/ (FMA-023: CN801/ FMM-035: CN402) FMA-024: CN802) 2 Connector (CN101) 4 Two screws (B3) 6 Claw 5 Two screws (B3)

6 MB-98 board

1 Flexible flat cable (FAE-005: CN901) 9 ER-15 board 7 Rear panel 3 Three screws (B3) 8 Four screws (B3)

4 Five screws (B3) 5 Claw

3 Connector (CN101)

2-1

2-5. TRAY COVER REMOVAL

2-7. POWER BLOCK REMOVAL

3 Two claws

1 Connector (CN101)

4 Tray cover 3 Two screws (WHDB3)

5 Joint (POWER)

B

4 Two screws (WHDB3)

6 Power block

2 Pull the tray in the direction of arrow B. A 2 Connector (CN201)

1 Insert a tapering driver into the aperture of the unit bottom, and move the lever of chuck cam in the direction of arrow A.

2-6. FRONT PANEL REMOVAL

2-8. MECHANISM DECK REMOVAL 1 Connector (CN402)

3 Mechanism deck

3 Claw

1 Three flexible flat cables (FMO-001: CN201/ FMO-002: CN202/ FMM-035: CN402)

5 Front panel

4 Two claws

2 Three screws (B3)

2 Claw

2-2

2-9. AI-23 BOARD REMOVAL

2-11. LOADING MOTOR (M001), MS-81 BOARD REMOVAL

3 Two screws (B3) 1 BELT

1 Two connectors (FMA-023: CN203/ FMA-024: CN301)

4 Multi pillar

2 Two screws (P2.6 x 4)

2 Connector (CN201) 5 Five screws (B3)

6 AI-23 board

3 Two claws

2 Connector (CN101)

4 Loading motor (M001), MS-81 board

2-10. TRAY REMOVAL

2-12. OPTICAL PICK-UP REMOVAL

3 Claw

4 Tray 3 Claw

2 Insulator

A 2 Insulator

2

1 Insulator screw

1 Move the lever of chuck cam in the direction of arrow A. 1 Insulator screw

3 Optical pick-up

2-3

2 Insulator 1 Insulator screw

2-13. INTERNAL VIEWS

DC motor (loading) 1-541-632-11

DC motor (loading) 1-541-632-11

Optical pick-up (KHM-240AAA/J1NP) A-4900-634-A

2-4

2-14. CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION

Power Block (TOP-244U) (US, Canadian) Power Block (HS13S0U) (US, Canadian, Mexican) Power Block (HS13S0E) (AEP, UK, Argentina) Power Block (HS13S0F) (E, Brazilian) (SWITCHING REGULATOR)

AI-23 (AUDIO/VIDEO OUT, INTERFACE CONTROL)

ER-15 (AEP, UK) (EURO AV)

MS-81 (LOADING) MB-98 (SIGNAL PROCESS, SERVO)

2-5 2-5E

DVP-NS400D SECTION 3 BLOCK DIAGRAMS 3-1. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM • Abbreviation AR : Argentina BR : Brazilian CND : Canadian MX : Mexican

AI-23 BOARD

MB-98 BOARD

(SEE PAGE 4-31 to 4-38)

(SEE PAGE 4-11 to 4-28) IC504, 505

US, CND, E, MX, AR, BR

16M SDRAM J102

Y

Y, Cb, Cr

BASE UNIT

IC303

KHM-240AAA/J1NP

16M DRAM

PR

PDO0 – 7 IC601 PDI0 – 7

IC102

BNR

OPTICAL DEVICE

VIDEO BUFFER

IC503 IC202 DVD/CD PD IC

RF

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

PB

RF+

SDI 0 – 7

DVD/CD RF AMP, DIGITAL SERVO

AEP, UK J101 (1/2)

AV DECODER

VIDEO 2

V, Y, C

IC302

J103

ARP, SERVO DSP

CDDOUT, CDDATA, CDBCK, CDLRCK

VIDEO 1

VIDEO

1

S VIDEO OUT

2

LINE OUT

ACH12, ACH34, ACH56, BCK, LRCK

AEP, UK

ER-15 BOARD (SEE PAGE 4-41) V, Y, C CDDOUT

FOCUS COIL

V/Y, R/C, G, B

IC901

R, G, B

R, G, B

RY901 – 903 SW

VIDEO BUFFER, SELECT SW

CNJ901 LINE 2

V

PARALLEL BUS V/Y, R/C, G, B

TRACKING COIL

SPINDLE MOTOR

FOCUS/TRACKING COIL DRIVE, SPINDLE/SLED/ LOADING MOTOR DRIVE

M

IC107

or

FLASH

IC108 OTP

J201 IC701 IC103

SLED MOTOR

LINE 1 (RGB) –TV

RY904 SW

IC401 INLIMIT SENSOR

CNJ902

COAXIAL

SPDIF

DIGITAL OUT

AUDIO DSP

SYSTEM CONTROL

M

IC203

OPTICAL

IC101 US, CND, E, MX, AR, BR

EEPROM

M001 LOADING MOTOR

IC802

M

J101 (2/2)

IC202 AUDIO AMP

AUDIO D/A CONVERTER

AEP, UK

L

L

L

AUDIO 2

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 1

R

R

R

LINE OUT

SERIAL BUS

S001 CHUCK/TRAY DETECT

J302

IC302

AU+5V

+3.3V +5V +11V

+1.8V

IC803

MS-81 BOARD

FRONT

IC303

R

L REAR

IC304

AUDIO D/A CONVERTER

5.1CH AUDIO AMP

(SEE PAGE 4-5)

WOOFER

5.1CH OUTPUT

CENTER

HS13S0E BOARD : AEP, UK, AR

(SEE PAGE 4-45)

HS13S0F BOARD : E, BR

ND401

(SEE PAGE 4-49)

HS13S0U BOARD : US, CND, MX

(SEE PAGE 4-53)

REG

FLUORESCENT INDICATOR TUBE

REG

TOP-244U BOARD : US, CND

IC404

(SEE PAGE 4-57)

POWER SWITCHING REG

AC IN

EVER+3.3V SW+3.3V +5V SW+11V EVER+11V EVER–11V

IF CON FUNCTION KEY

CURSOR STICK

PUSH ENTER

P CON

05

3-1

3-2

DVP-NS400D 3-2. RF/SERVO BLOCK DIAGRAM IC202 2 (DVD play) 200 mV/DIV 50 ns/DIV

IC202 2 (CD play) 200 mV/DIV 200 ns/DIV

IC202 tl (DVD play) 500 mV/DIV 50 ns/DIV

IC202 tl (CD play) 500 mV/DIV 200 ns/DIV

570 mVp-p

550 mVp-p

1.4 Vp-p

1.4 Vp-p

IC202 rs (DVD play) IC202 rs (CD play) 100 mV/DIV 50 ms/DIV 500 mV/DIV 50 ms/DIV

180 mVp-p

860 mVp-p

BASE UNIT MB-98 BOARD (1/4)

KHM-240AAA/J1NP

(SEE PAGE 4-11, 13, 19)

IC202

IC202 ra (DVD play) 500 mV/DIV 50 ms/DIV

IC202 ra (CD play) 500 mV/DIV 200 ms/DIV

1.5 Vp-p

1.7 Vp-p

DVD/CD RF AMP, DIGITAL SERVO

OPTICAL DEVICE CN201 RF

A–D

22

2 RF IN

24 25 17 16

14 ı A–D 11

SIGO 59

IC302
7 ı A2 – D2 10

DVD/CD PD IC E–H

VC

PD SW DVD LD

DVD/CD LD MODULE

CD LD VR

15 23 18 26

15 ı E–H 18

20

19 VC

21 DVDPD 22 CDPD

13

8

Q201 DVD LD DRIVE

6

Q202 CD LD DRIVE

FE TE PI

136 ADC1 135 ADC0 137 ADC2

MIRR 33 TZC 37

197 MIRR 196 TZC

SRD 45 SWD ı SCLK 48 SDEN

173 ı 175 180

DFT 38 MON 44

24 LEDSEL0

10

RF+

SSDFCTI SS MON

25 DVDLD

160 mVp-p

IC302
GIO6/SDI GIO7/SDO GIO8/SCK GIO13

1.4 Vp-p

142 ADC5, 6 143

VCI 39

IC302
860 mVp-p

IC302
1.7 Vp-p

185 DFCTI 144 ADC7 172 GIO5/PGIN

IC302 (1/2)

LDON 27

26 CDLD

SIGNAL PROCESSOR (SEE PAGE 3-5)

SERVO DSP 12 166 GIO0/INT2 +3.3V

IC401 42

40 VREF 43

FCS±

FOCUS COIL

37 36

4 3

FOCUS COIL DRIVE

48 1

FDRV±

204 POM 2, 3 205

19

45

SLE SPFG

PS 39 SPINDLE MOTOR

SPM±

M

27 28

9 8

SPINDLE MOTOR DRIVE

13

21 SLED MOTOR

SLA±, SLB±

M

32 ı 29

1 ı 4

SLED MOTOR DRIVE

XSDPCS

7 10

XRST

139 ADC3 140 ADC4

PWM2

47 46

7

HCS 24

202 POM 0, 1 203

GIO9/FGREF GIO10/FGIN

INLIM

INLIMIT SENSOR

TDRV±

GIO2/INT4

5 CN202

XSDPIT

XDSPRST 156 3 4

PWM0, 1

TRACKING COIL DRIVE

GIO1/INT3

35 34

2 1

MDSO MDPO

TRK±

TRACKING COIL

HINT 22

159 161 167 198 199 168 176 177 200 MDSO, MDPO

SYSTEM CONTROL (SEE PAGE 3-7)

SPMUTE SLDA, SLDB

20

TSD-M 22

MS-81 BOARD (SEE PAGE 4-5) M001 LOADING MOTOR

CN001

M

CN402 1 2

LDM±

25 24

5 4

LOADING MOTOR DRIVE

16 17 15

XDRVMUTE

TSD

LMP, LMM

LMCTL

S001 CHUCK/TRAY DETECT

4 5

CKSW1 OCSW1

XLDON CKSW1 OCSW1

2 1

05

3-3

3-4

DVP-NS400D

3-3. SIGNAL PROCESSOR BLOCK DIAGRAM MB-98 BOARD (2/4) (SEE PAGE 4-13 to 4-18)

• Abbreviation AR : Argentina BR : Brazilian CND : Canadian MX : Mexican

IC504, 505 16M SDRAM IC303

1.4 Vp-p

157 182 187 189

XARPRST 33MARP

XARPRST CLKIN MCKI SCKI

SDCK, XSHD, XSRQ, XSAK, SDEF

CDDATA, CDBCK, CDLRCK, CDDOUT

62 63 65 66

2 ı 9

HA 0 – 21

HD 0 – 15

HD 0 – 15

22 23 25 26

ICLKI IERRI ISTARTI IVALI IREQO

CS, WE, CAS, RAS

CLK, CKE, DQML, DQMU,

660 mVp-p (H)

TDO TCK TDI TMS TRST

CR/B

B OUT 66

COMPOUT

COMPOUT 80

YOUT

Y OUT 74

5

Y/G

3

Cb/R

1

Cr/B

11

V

7

Y

9

C

COUT

C OUT 77

IC503 i;

IC503 uj

1.1 Vp-p (H) IC503 uf

2–5 7 – 10 232 – 235 237 – 240

HD 0 – 15

195 194 193 192 191

118 120 119 121 122

XRD XWRH

TDI TCK TDO TMS TRST

220 HCSB 221 HRWB

810 mVp-p (H)

IC601 BNR

HAD 0 – 21

PDO 0 – 7

102 – 105 107 – 110

PDO 0 – 7

23 24 26 – 28 YCIN 0 – 7 30 – 32

PDI 0 – 7

92 – 95 97 – 100

PDI 0 – 7

9 – 11 14 – 18 YCOUT 0 – 7

HD 0 – 15

AV DECODER

IC503 ik

3.2 Vp-p (H)

FLDO NRSDOUT NRSENB HSYNCO

87 112 113 88

8 2 3 1

FID NRSDIN SCS H SYNC

5

7

27MVGA32

D1CLKO 60

VREFI 84

RV501 VIDEO LEVEL ADJ

231 RSTB 12 ACLK 29 CRPCLKI

XRST 512FSAVD 33MAVD XAVDCS2 XAVDCS3

190 HAD23 191 HAD22 180 182 224 223

27MAVD

XAVDIT

CLKI SCLKI HWAIT0B HIREQ0

ACH12 ACH34 ACH56 LRCKO BCKO

14 15 16 18 19

ACH12 ACH34 ACH56 LRCK BCK AUDIO (SEE PAGE 3-11)

226 – 229 XRST

05

VIDEO (SEE PAGE 3-9)

660 mVp-p (H)

940 mVp-p (H) HD 8 – 15

CB/R

R OUT 63

IC503 yh : AEP, UK IC503 yh : US, CND, E, MX, AR, BR (LINE : RGB mode)

CDIN2I CDIN1I CDBCKI CDLRKI

192 193 195 – 198 200 – 203 205 – 208 210 – 213 215 – 218

HA 0 – 21

HA 0 – 7

LAND (FOR J TAG)

HA 0 – 21

41 43 ı 46

620 mVp-p (H)

IC503

TRST

SYSTEM CONTROL (SEE PAGE 3-7)

DATA BCLK LRCK DOUT

D0–7

207 XWR 208 XRD

XWRH XRD

SDI 0 – 7

CN801 (1/3) Y/G

G OUT 69

620 mVp-p (H)

11 ı A 0 – 7 15 17 ı 19

21 XINT 23 XCS 25 XWAT

31 ı 34 DTI 0 – 7 36 ı 39

660 mVp-p (H)

940 mVp-p (H)

MRST

IC302 (2/2) ARP

SDDT 0 – 15

IC503 yd : AEP, UK IC503 yd : US, CND, E, MX, AR, BR (LINE : RGB mode)

SDCK XSHD 68 XSRQ ı XSAK 72 SDEF

IC302
IC503 yl IC503 yl : AEP, UK : US, CND, E, MX, AR, BR (LINE : RGB mode)

143 144 146 147 149 151 152 154 155

CK27

128 RFIN2

XARPIT XARPCS XWAIT

SDAD 0 – 11

73 ı SD 0 – 7 76 78 ı 81

131 RFIN1

RF+

157 – 160 162 – 165 167 168 170 171 173 174 176 177

38 39 41 42

CDDOUT

RF/SERVO (SEE PAGE 3-4)

ADDT 0 – 15

44 – 51 53 – 60 MD 0 – 15

124 125 127 128 130 131 133 134 136 137 139 140

DM ACK1 DM REQ1 DM ACK0 DM REQ0

1.4 Vp-p

ADAD 0 – 11

MEMD 0 – 15

27 – 36 MA 0 – 9

IC302
OE, WE, RAS LCAS, UCAS

MEMA 0 – 9

16M DRAM

DREQ0 DACK0 DREQ1 DACK1

CDDOUT

3-5

CDDOUT

3-6

DVP-NS400D 3-4. SYSTEM CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM

MB-98 BOARD (3/4) (SEE PAGE 4-21 to 4-24) IC108 OTP

HA 0 – 21

HD 0 – 15

HD 0 – 15

HA0 – 21

HA 0 – 21

HD0 – 15

HA1 – 21

or

HD0 – 15

IC107 FLASH

IC103 tf 58

XRD XWRH

CSOX

1 – 5 102 – 109 111 – 118 120 85 – 100 HA 0 – 21 HD 0 – 15 70 XRD 71 XWRH

SIGNAL PROCESSOR (SEE PAGE 3-5)

X0 54 XARPRST XARPIT XARPCS XWAIT XRST

RF/SERVO (SEE PAGE 3-4)

36 17 62 67 35

XRST XSDPIT XSDPCS XDRVMUTE XLDON CKSW1 OCSW1

18 63 48 84 56 57

1.7 Vp-p (16.5 MHz)

X1 53

XARPRST INT1 CS4X XWAIT XRST

X101 16.5MHz

CN801 (2/3)

INT2 CS5X XDRVMUTE XLDON CKSW1 OCSW1

EUROV/Y/CLAMPSW1 WIDE DISCEXT/CLAMPSW0 RGBSEL/MICMUTE

41 82 42 37

SI0 SO0 SCO XIFCS INT4 XFRRST

25 26 27 51 20 76

MAMUTE INT5 INT6 VESCS/X39CS SI1 SO1 SC1 XDACS

83 21 22 80 28 29 30 79

EUROVY/CLAMPSW1 WIDE CLAMPSW0/DISCEXT RGBSEL/MICMUTE

12 2 10 14

EUROVY WIDE DISC/EXT RGBSEL

VIDEO (SEE PAGE 3-9)

12 13 14 11 10 9

SI0 SO0 SC0 XIFCS XIFBUSY XFRRST

INTERFACE CONTROL (SEE PAGE 3-13)

IC103 SYSTEM CONTROL CN101

IC101 EEPROM

7 6 5

7 WP 39 SCL 38 SDA

16 46 47 49 50 60 61

XAVDIT DREQ0 DACK0 DREQ1 DACK1 XAVDCS2 XAVDCS3

INTO DREQ0 DACK0 DREQ1 DACK1 CS2X CS3X

48/44.1k

WP SCL SDA

SI0 SO0 SC0 XIFCS IFBSY TRST

MAMUTE X39IT/TSENSU/OTASEKE CMDREQ/TSENSD/CLPBSY X39CS/XVESCS SI1 SO1 SC1 XDACS

AUDIO (SEE PAGE 3-11)

81 TRST XRST

IC102 7

IC102

SIGNAL PROCESSOR (SEE PAGE 3-5)

IC102 qd, qg

PLL 1.5 Vp-p (27 MHz) 14 FSEL

3.2 Vp-p (33.87 MHz)

IC102 9, 0

XTI 7 X102 27MHz XTO 8

DVD: 3.3 Vp-p (24.57 MHz) CD: 3.3 Vp-p (22.58 MHz)

33MARP

15 33-1OUT

512-2OUT 9

512FS2CH 512FS6CH

33MAVD

13 33-2OUT

512-1OUT 10

512FS39

27MAVD

3 27-1OUT

27-2OUT 4

27M39 IC102 3, 4

512FSAVD

3.5 Vp-p (27 MHz) 05

3-7

3-8

DVP-NS400D 3-5. VIDEO BLOCK DIAGRAM AI-23 BOARD (1/3) (SEE PAGE 4-31)

* IC102 36 pin : US, CND, E, MX, AR, BR 24 pin : AEP, UK

IC102

J101 (2/2)

VIDEO BUFFER

V

15

21

AEP, UK

LINE OUT

AEP, UK

3 VIDEO IN VIDEO OUT

VIDEO 2 33

US, CND, E, MX, AR, BR

17

AEP, UK

29

US, CND, E, MX, AR, BR

VIDEO

Y

19

2.4 Vp-p (H) IC102 qj : AEP, UK wl : US, CND, E, MX, AR, BR

J103 Y

• Abbreviation AR : Argentina BR : Brazilian CND : Canadian MX : Mexican

VIDEO 1

CN203 (1/2) V

IC102 wa : AEP, UK ed : US, CND, E, MX, AR, BR

US, CND, E, MX, AR, BR

Y OUT

8 Y IN

Y 1

C SIGNAL PROCESSOR (SEE PAGE 3-6)

C

C

17

19 6 C IN

2.0 Vp-p (H) AEP, UK

AEP, UK

C OUT

S VIDEO OUT

US, CND, E, MX, AR, BR IC102 ql : AEP, UK ea : US, CND, E, MX, AR, BR

31 7 MUTE1

Y/G Cb/R Cr/B

Y

21

Cb

23

Cr

25

12 Y IN

6 5

3

7 8

10

Y

Cb OUT 22

17 Cr IN

RY903

J102

Y OUT 24

15 Cb IN

(SEE PAGE 4-41)

2

C

1.8 Vp-p (H)

16 MUTE2

ER-15 BOARD

Y

PB

Cr OUT 20

V IN V/Y OUT BLANKING OUT R/C OUT G OUT FUNCTION SW OUT B OUT

1 COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

A(L)IN A(L)OUT A(R)IN A(R)OUT

Q914 RELAY DRIVE

IC901 wg

PR

20 19 16 15 11 8 7

CNJ902 LINE 1 (RGB) –TV

6 3 2 1

RY901 IC102 w; : US, CND, E, MX, AR, BR

Q104, 105 WIDE SWITCH

IC102 ws : US, CND, E, MX, AR, BR

2.4 Vp-p (H) IC901 wg (LINE : S VIDEO mode)

IC102 wf : US, CND, E, MX, AR, BR 1.3 Vp-p (H)

7 8

10

6 5

3

1.3 Vp-p (H) 1 IC901 VIDEO BUFFER, SELECT SWITCH

2.0 Vp-p (H) CN102 (1/2) V Y

Q106 BUFFER

C

13

G

15

B

EUROVY

17 19

R

INTERFACE CONTROL (SEE PAGE 3-13)

CN901 21

11

10

VMUTE

14

3

V Y C Cb/R Y/G Cr/B

VMUTE

EUROVY

2.0 Vp-p (H) Q912 RELAY DRIVE

13 V IN

1 5

15 Y IN

3

5 C IN

9

7 R IN

7

9 G IN

R/C

R/C OUT 34

11 B IN

11

D907 12

19

IC901 ef (LINE : RGB mode)

IC901 wl (LINE : RGB mode)

28 MUTE2

7 8

10

6 5

3 1

1.4 Vp-p (H)

1.4 Vp-p (H) IC901 wj (LINE : RGB mode)

SYSTEM CONTROL (SEE PAGE 3-8)

A(L)IN A(L)OUT A(R)IN A(R)OUT

RY902 B

B OUT 27

30 SW1 12 SW2

IC901 ef (LINE : S VIDEO mode) Q913 RELAY DRIVE

1.7 Vp-p (H) WIDE

24

9

DISC/EXT

16

7

WIDE

DISCEXT

13

Q906 – 908 FUNCTION SIGNAL GENERATOR

RY904

1.4 Vp-p (H)

Q909, 910 LINE SELECT CONTROL

15

6 5

3

7 8

10 1

RGBSEL

1

12

RGBSEL

21

Q901 – 903 BLANKING SIGNAL GENERATOR

Q915 RELAY DRIVE

05

AUDIO (SEE PAGE 3-12)

3-9

ERAUDIOL

20

ERAUDIOR

17

20 19 16 15 11 8 7

G

G OUT 29

33 MUTE1 24 MUTE3

V IN V OUT BLANKING IN R IN G IN FUNCTION SW IN B IN

V/Y

V/Y OUT 25

3-10

6 3 2 1

CNJ901 LINE 2

DVP-NS400D

3-6. AUDIO BLOCK DIAGRAM MB-98 BOARD (4/4)

AI-23 BOARD (2/3)

(SEE PAGE 4-25 to 4-28)

(SEE PAGE 4-33 to 4-36)

IC701

IC203

1 D IN

OPTICAL

AUDIO DSP CN801 (3/3) CDDOUT ACH12 SIGNAL PROCESSOR (SEE PAGE 3-6)

ACH34 ACH56 LRCK BCK

10 32 160 56 159 57 158 58 161 55 147 69

DSP1DII DSP2DII DSP1CH12I DSP2CH12I DSP1CH34I DSP2CH34I DSP1CH56I DSP2CH56I DSP1LRCKI DSP2LRCKI DSP1BCKI DSP2BCKI

DSP2DO 45

DSP2CH78O 51

CN203 (2/2) 16

Q201 BUFFER

10

IC802

IC202

AUDIO D/A CONVERTER

AUDIO AMP

3 SDTI 2 BICK 4 LRCK 1 6 5 7 8

SPDIF

AOUTL+ 12 AOUTL– 11

17 15

AOUTR+ 10 AOUTR– 9

21 23

DZFL 16 DZFR 15

22 20

MCLK CSN PDN CCLK CDTI

24

ALT+ ALT– ART+ ART–

LMUTE RMUTE

MAMUTE

COAXIAL

3 2

+ –

1

5 3

5 6

+ –

7

Q207 MUTE

L AUDIO 1 Q206 MUTE

R

D202 4 6

L Q202, 204, 205 MUTE DRIVE

US, CND, E, MX, AR, BR

R

Q208 – 210 MUTE DRIVE

27M39

149 8 67 34 22

SYSTEM CONTROL (SEE PAGE 3-8)

XRST

107 108 118 119 117 115

DSP1ACKI DSP1DIACKI DSP2ACKI DSP2DIACKI SCLKI CMD ACKNO CMD REQNO SH CSNI SH SOO SH SII SH CLKI

6 RESET IN

AEP, UK AEP, UK

CN102 (2/2)

A MUTE X39IT/TSENSU/OTASUKE CMDREQ/TSENSD/CLPBSY X39CS/XVESCS SI1 SO1 SC1

AUDIO R

US, CND, E, MX, AR, BR

D203 2

L AUDIO 2

AEP, UK 512FS39

LINE OUT

J101 (2/2)

9 11

DIGITAL OUT

J201

2

ERAUDIOL

5

ERAUDIOR

VIDEO (SEE PAGE 3-9)

INTERFACE CONTROL (SEE PAGE 3-13)

IC803 AUDIO D/A CONVERTER

IC302 CN802

DSP2BCKO 43 DSP2LRCKO 42 DSP2CH12O 48 DSP2CH34O 49 DSP2CH56O 50

5 BICK 9 LRCK 6 SDTI1 7 SDTI2 8 SDTI3

3 PDN 11 CCLK 12 CDTI 512FS2CH XDACS 512FS6CH

LOUT1+ 26 LOUT1– 25

7 5

ROUT1+ 24 ROUT1– 23

11 13

LOUT1+ LOUT1– ROUT1+ ROUT1–

CN301 9 11

5 6

+ –

7

5 3

3 2

+ –

1

J302

5.1CH FRONT AUDIO AMP

L Q309, 310 MUTE

FRONT R

IC303 LOUT2+ 22 LOUT2– 21

2 4

ROUT2+ 20 ROUT2– 19

1 3

LOUT2+ LOUT2– ROUT2+ ROUT2–

14 12

5 6

+ –

7

15 13

3 2

+ –

1

5.1CH REAR AUDIO AMP

L Q307, 308 MUTE

REAR

5.1CH OUTPUT

R

IC304 10 CSN 4 MCLK

LOUT3+ 18 LOUT3– 17

12 14

ROUT3+ 16 ROUT3– 15

8 6

LOUT3+ LOUT3– ROUT3+ ROUT3–

4 2

5 6

+ –

7

8 10

3 2

+ –

1

5.1CH CENTER/WOOFER AUDIO AMP

CENTER Q305, 306 MUTE WOOFER

D801 DZF 2

15

MA 6CH MUTE

1

Q302 – 304 MUTE DRIVE

MAMUTE

05

• Abbreviation AR : Argentina BR : Brazilian CND : Canadian MX : Mexican

3-11

3-12

DVP-NS400D

3-7. INTERFACE CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM AI-23 BOARD (3/3) (SEE PAGE 4-37) CN403

SYSTEM CONTROL (SEE PAGE 3-8)

SI0

12

SO0

13

SC0

14

XIFCS XIFBUSY

11 10

XFRRST

9

SI0 SO0 SC0 XIFCS XIFBUSY

16 SO BUZ 21

REMOTE COMMANDER RECEIVER

17 /SC IR 11

14 /CS 27 BUSY

1

S404 XFRRST

IC401

BZ401 BUZZER

15 SI

7 /FRRST

SURROUND

S401 BNR

S410

S408

OUT

BNRKEY 33

AUDIO (SEE PAGE 3-12)

A MUTE

23 /AMUTE

VIDEO (SEE PAGE 3-9)

VMUTE

24 /VMUTE

S412

S403

O/C 34 IC404 IF CON

D415 SURROUND

45 VES S411

D414 BNR

79 BNR

PLAY 35

D402 US, CND, E, MX, AR, BR AEP, UK

DOLBY DIGITAL

S406

80 MULTI

S409 DISPLAY

S407 DVD MENU

MULTICHANNEL

S405 RETURN

S402 TITLE

DISPLAY 36

CURSOR STICK

ND401 FLUORESCENT INDICATOR TUBE

58 ı 41

48 ı SEG 1 – 18 65

5 ı 12

77 ı DIG 1 – 12 66

CN402 AN5

CURSOR 37

3

PUSH ENTER

XIN 2 X401 8MHz

IC405 RESET VOUT 1

• Abbreviation AR : Argentina BR : Brazilian CND : Canadian MX : Mexican

XOUT 3 8 /RST

IC404 3

3.4 Vp-p (8 MHz)

05

3-13

3-14

DVP-NS400D 3-8. POWER 1 BLOCK DIAGRAM US, CND, MX, AEP, UK, AR

HS13S0E BOARD : AEP, UK, AR (SEE PAGE 4-45)

T101

HS13S0U BOARD : US, CND, MX (SEE PAGE 4-53)

D211

L211

D221

L221

CN201

Q211

6 • 7

US, CND, MX

13 D311

SW101 AC IN

CN101

EVER+11V

Q311

P311

+5V EVER+3.3V

D101

L101 LINE FILTER

EVER+11V EVER–11V

12

AEP, UK, AR

POWER

F101

1 2

L311

SW+11V

L102 LINE FILTER

+5V

Q611

P611

L611

D611

8

SW+3.3V

D413

SW+3.3V SW+11V

Q101, 102 SWITCH

Q411 +3.3V REG

11

D621 (ON/STANDBY)

EVER+3.3V P-CONT P-DET

IC411 Q621, 622 LED DRIVE

SHUNT REG D511

L511 3

Q712 POWER CONTROL

PC101 PHOTO COUPLER

2

IC301

1

SHUNT REG

EVER–11V

P-CONT

P-DET

EVER+3.3V

US, CND

TOP-244U BOARD (SEE PAGE 4-57)

AC IN

CN900 1 2

T910

POWER

F900

D920

L921

D921

L922

CN201

Q922, 923

6 • 7

D901 – 904

LF900 LINE FILTER

13 D922

Q925

L923

PS922 12

SW+11V EVER+11V +5V

PS923 Q924

D926, 927

8

IC910 DC CONTROL

D932, 933

Q927 11

D C F D923

L924

D928 3

2 PC910 PHOTO COUPLER

1

EVER+3.3V

EVER–11V

P-CONT

P-DET

D929 (ON/STANDBY)

IC920 SHUNT REG PC911 PHOTO COUPLER

SW+3.3V

Q928 LED DRIVE Q930 POWER CONTROL

• Abbreviation AR : Argentina CND : Canadian MX : Mexican

Q929 LED DRIVE EVER+3.3V

05

3-15

3-16

POWER 2 (SEE PAGE 3-18)

DVP-NS400D 3-9. POWER 2 BLOCK DIAGRAM

E, BR

AI-23 BOARD (1/2) (SEE PAGE 4-37)

HS13S0F BOARD (SEE PAGE 4-49)

EVER+11V

T101 SW101

AC IN

CN101 1 2

POWER

F101 L101 LINE FILTER

D211

L211

D221

L221

CN201 6 • 7

D101 L102 LINE FILTER

13 D311

EVER–11V

EVER+3.3V 12

+5V

+5V

Q101 – 102, 131 SWITCH D611

L611

D511

L511

P611 8 3

AU+11V Q404, 405

PS401 3

SW–11V

11

EVER+3.3V

12

AI+5V

POWER 3 (SEE PAGE 3-19)

EVER+11V

Q311

P311

L311

SW+11V

CN401 PS402 13

SW+3.3V

D402 DOLBY DIGITAL

EVER–11V

US, CND, E, MX, AR, BR MULTICHANNEL PC101 PHOTO COUPLER

AEP, UK

IC701

CN403

SHUNT REG PC103 PHOTO COUPLER

SW+3.3V Q712 POWER CONTROL

DC CONTROL

SW+11V L411

PB

11

EVER+3.3V

6 • 7

Q621, 622 LED DRIVE

PC131 PHOTO COUPLER

VOUT 5

EVER+3.3V

D615 (ON/STANDBY)

+3.3V

3

+1.8V

1

+11V

8

3.3V MNT

+1.8V REG 1 VIN

D411

7 IC403

P-CONT

T131

D

+5V

SW–11V

IC131

2

8

5

POWER 3 (SEE PAGE 3-19)

F1

IC401 REMOTE COMMANDER RECEIVER

IC401 SHUNT REG

1

P-DET

ND401

Q401, 402, T401

FLUORESCENT INDICATOR TUBE

F2 DC/DC CONVERTER

EVER+3.3V

D405

IC405 RESET

IC404 IF CON

P-CONT P-DET

05

• Abbreviation AR : Argentina BR : Brazilian CND : Canadian MX : Mexican

30 PONCHK 26 PCONT 19 PDET

2 1

VKK

EVER+11V EVER–11V

D414 BNR

EVER+3.3V

POWER 1 (SEE PAGE 3-16)

+5V SW+3.3V

CURSOR STICK CN402

SW+11V

E+3.3V P-CONT P-DET

3-17

3-18

2

PUSH ENTER

DVP-NS400D 3-10. POWER 3 BLOCK DIAGRAM AI-23 BOARD (2/2) (SEE PAGE 4-31 to 4-36) CN102 AI+5V

8 20 6

CN901

+5V –5V +11V

14 2 16

IC102

L905

VIDEO BUFFER, SELECT SWITCH

+11V

ER-15 BOARD (SEE PAGE 4-41) IC101 –5V REG 2 IN

AEP, UK

IC102 VIDEO BUFFER

OUT 3

Q311 POWER 2 (SEE PAGE 3-18)

AU+11V Q312, 313

IC202

SW–11V

AUDIO AMP IC201 +5V REG 1 IN

IC302

OUT 3

5.1CH FRONT AUDIO AMP

D201 MUTE V

EVER+3.3V

IC303 5.1CH REAR AUDIO AMP IC203 OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT DIGITAL OUT

IC304

OPTICAL

5.1CH CENTER/WOOFER AUDIO AMP CN203 1

AU+5V

MB-98 BOARD (SEE PAGE 4-11 to 4-28) IC502 FL103

IC107

FILTER

FLASH MEMORY

+3.3V REG

IC108 or

OTP

5 VIN

VOUT 4

IC802

CN801

AUDIO D/A CONVERTER

25

FL102

IC103

FILTER

SYSTEM CONTROL

FL505

IC504

FILTER

IC505

IC501 +1.8V REG

16M SDRAM

2 VIN

IC803

VOUT 1

IC503 AV DECODER

FL502

AUDIO D/A CONVERTER

FL101 FILTER

IC102

FILTER

IC601 IC101

PLL

FL501

BNR

EEPROM

FILTER

CN101 3.3V MNT

8

+3.3V

7

FILTER FL106

FL201

+5V

5

FILTER

FILTER

CN202

FL105

POWER 2 (SEE PAGE 3-18)

5 CN201 19 11

FL108 3

+1.8V

FILTER IC202 IC301

DVD/CD RF AMP, DIGITAL SERVO

+3.3V REG IC401 FL104 1

+11V

FILTER

FOCUS/TRACKING COIL DRIVE, SPINDLE/SLED/ LOADING MOTOR DRIVE

2 VIN IC701 AUDIO DSP

IC303 16M DRAM

VOUT 1

IC302 ARP, SERVO DSP

05

3-19

3-20 E

LED

VCC MOD

INLIMIT SENSOR

OPTICAL DEVICE

DVP-NS400D SECTION 4 PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS For schematic diagram: • Caution when replacing chip parts. New parts must be attached after removal of chip. Be careful not to heat the minus side of tantalum capacitor, because it is damaged by the heat. • All resistors are in ohms, 1/4 W (Chip resistors : 1/10 W) unless otherwise specified. kΩ : 1000Ω, MΩ : 1000kΩ. • All capacitors are in µF unless otherwise noted. pF : µµF 50V or less are not indicated except for electrolytics and tantalums. • All variable and adjustable resistors have characteristic curve B, unless otherwise noted. • 2 : nonflammable resistor. • 5 : fusible resistor. • C : panel designation. • f : internal component. • C : adjustment for repair. • U : B+ Line. • V : B– Line. • Circled numbers refer to waveforms. • Voltages are dc between measurement point. • Readings are taken with a color-bar signal on DVD reference disc and when playing CD reference disc. • Readings are taken with a digital multimeter (DC 10MΩ). • Voltage variations may be noted due to normal production tolerances.

THIS NOTE IS COMMON FOR PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS. (In addition to this, the necessary mote is printed in each block.) For printed wiring boards: • X : indicates a lead wire mounted on the component side. • x : indicates a lead wire mounted on the printed side. • a : Through hole. • b : Pattern from the side which enables seeing. (The other layers’ patterns are not indicated.) Caution: Pattern face side: (Side A) Parts face side: (Side B)

Parts on the pattern face side seen from the pattern face are indicated. Parts on the parts face side seen from the parts face are indicated.

Note: The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified.

Note: Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce por tant le numéro spécifié.

When indicating parts by reference number, please include the board name. •

Abbreviation AR : Argentina BR : Brazilian CND : Canadian MX : Mexican

•

Description about model name DPX14xxBJ Name of production country J : Japan M : Malaysia Color of set B : Black H : Titanium gray

4-1

DVP-NS400D

DVP-NS400D 4-1. FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 1

3

2

4

5

6

7

9

8

10

12

11

14

13

15 AEP,UK

CN102

21P 21

1

V

-5V

20

2

-5V

C

19

3

C

GND

18

4

GND

Y

17

5

Y

GND

16

6

GND

Y/G

15

7

Y/G

GND

14

8

GND

Cb/R

13

9

Cb/R

GND

12

10

GND

Cr/B

11

11

Cr/B

VMUTE

10

12

VMUTE

HS13S0F BOARD :E,BR

HS13S0U BOARD :US,CND,MX

TOP-244U BOARD

+5V

12

12

+5V

EVER+3.3V

11

11

EVER+3.3V

D_GND

10

10

D_GND

D_GND

9

9

D_GND

SW+3.3V

8

8

SW+3.3V

SW+11V

7

7

SW+11V

SW+11V

6

6

SW+11V

M_GND

5

5

M_GND

WIDE

9

13

WIDE

+5V

8

14

+5V

DISCEXT

7

15

DISCEXT

+11V

6

16

+11V

ERAUDIOR

5

17

ERAUDIOR

GND(AU)

4

18

GND(AU)

EUROVY

3

19

EUROVY

ERAUDIOL

2

20

ERAUDIOL

RGBSEL

1

21

RGBSEL

LOUT3-

MA_6CH_MUTE 1 15 MA_6CH_MUTE

ROUT310

ROUT3+

LOUT111

LOUT1+

LOUT212

8

ROUT213

9

LOUT2+ 14

CN301

ROUT2+ 15

ROUT1-

AU+5V 1

2

MAMUTE 2

14

ART3

LOUT3-

LMUTE 4

LOUT3+

ART+ 5

3

RMUTE 6

13

P_GND_2CH 7

ROUT1-

P_GND_SPDIF 8

ROUT1+

ALT+ 9

4

SPDIF 10

5

6

LOUT1-

ROUT3-

8

4 LOUT2-

7

3 ROUT2-

LOUT1+

2 LOUT2+

ROUT3+

1 15P CN802

ROUT2+

25 AU+5V

22 LMUTE

24

21 ART+

23

20 RMUTE

ART-

19 P_GND_2CH

MAMUTE

18 P_GND_SPDIF

FFC(FMA-024)

17

16 SPDIF

12

ALT11 15 ALT-

LOUT3+

RGBSEL 12 14 RGBSEL

P_GND_6CH

GND 13

5

EUROVY 14

13

12

GND

EUROVY

11

V 15 11 V

ROUT1+

DISC/EXT 16 10 DISC/EXT

P_GND_6CH

C 17 9 C

6

GND 18 8 GND

10

Y 19 7 Y

P_GND_6CH

GND 20 6

4 GND

5

3 Cb/R

Y/G

2 WIDE

GND

1 Cr/B

25P CN801

7

Y/G 21

+11V 1 +11V

9

GND 22

M_GND

1

2 M_GND

P_GND_6CH

Cb/R 23

+1.8V

2

3

7 +3.3V

+1.8V

8 3.3V_MNT

4

9 XFRRST

GND

10 XIFBUSY

5

11 XIFCS

+5V

12 SI0

6

13

FFC(FMA-023)

GND

14 SC0

SO0

6 TXD

15

5 RXD

15P

4 GND

GND

3

CN101

2

1

+3.3V

6P CN103

BASE UNIT KHM-240AAA/J1NP

RF MON

F

GND

B to B

15P

WIDE 24

GND

3

CN203

+5V

4

25P Cr/B 25

GND

5

PCONT

+3.3V

IFRST

10

3.3V_MNT

GND

9

6

SC0

8

XFRRST

SOO

7

7

SIO

6

8

XIFCS

NC 5

5

NC 4

XIFBUSY

AN5 3

4

E+3.3V 2

CN402

GND 1

E

3

AC_IN(N)

5P

AC_IN(L)

2

ER-15 BOARD

DOWNLOAD(JIG)

10P

CURSOR STICK

XIFBUSY

P-DET

9

1

XIFCS

1

10

P-DET

SIO

P-CONT

11

2

SOO

2

12

P-CONT

SC0

EVER-11V

13

3

14

3

15P

EVER-11V

CN101 : HS13S0E/HS13SOF/ HS13SOU BOARDS CN900 : TOP-244U BOARD 2P 1

21P

M_GND

GND

4

4

CN403

B to B

AI-23 BOARD

CN405

M_GND

D

EVER+11V

XFRRST

C

13

13

13P

3.3V_MNT

EVER+11V

CN401

15

CN201 : HS13S0E/HS13SOF/ HS13SOU BOARDS CN920 : TOP-244U BOARD 13P

2

:US,CND

1

B

CN901

V

FFC(FAE-005)

HS13S0E BOARD :AEP,UK,AR

ALT+

A

DIAG(JIG)

G

26P

OPTICAL DEVICE I

J

TRK-

26

1

TRK-

TRK+

25

2

TRK+

FCS-

24

3

FCS-

FCS+

23

4

FCS+

N.C

22

5

N.C

CD LD

21

6

CD LD

N.C

20

7

N.C

DVD LD

19

8

DVD LD

LD GND

18

9

LD GND

SW

17

10

SW

MOD

16

11

MOD

VR

15

12

VR

PD

14

13

PD

GND

13

14

GND

E

12

15

E

D

11

16

D

FFC(FMO-001)

H

CN201

C

10

17

C

G

9

18

G

VCC

8

19

VCC

VC

7

20

VC

GND

6

21

GND

RF

5

22

RF

F

4

23

F

A

3

24

A

B

2

25

B

H

1

26

H

26P

MB-98 BOARD

CN402

CN202

9P

M

SPM+

1

9

SPM+

SPM-

2

8

SPM-

INLIM

3

7

INLIM

GND

4

6

GND

5

LED

4

SLA-

INLIMIT SENSOR

K SLED MOTOR

M

LED

5

SLA-

6

FFC(FMO-002)

SPINDLE MOTOR

SLB-

7

3

SLB-

SLB+

8

2

SLB+

SLA+

9

1

SLA+

5

LDM-

4

9P GND

3

CKSW1

2

OCSW1

1

FFC (FMM-035)

1

LDM+

2

LDM-

3

GND

4

CKSW1

5

OCSW1

5P

M

M001 LOADING MOTOR

MS-81 BOARD

05

FRAME 4-3

CN001

5P LDM+

4-4

DVP-NS400D

4-2. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS MS-81 (LOADING) PRINTED WIRING BOARD AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM – Ref. No.: MS-81 board; 1,000 series – There are a few cases that the part isn't mounted in this model is printed on this diagram.

Power Block (TOP-244U) (US, Canadian) Power Block (HS13S0U) (US, Canadian, Mexican) Power Block (HS13S0E) (AEP, UK, Argentina) Power Block (HS13S0F) (E, Brazilian) (SWITCHING REGULATOR)

AI-23 (AUDIO/VIDEO OUT, INTERFACE CONTROL)

ER-15 (AEP, UK) (EURO AV)

MS-81 (LOADING)

1

2

3

4

MB-98 (SIGNAL PROCESS, SERVO)

5

MS-81 BOARD

A

B

CN001

MB-98 BOARD (5/9) CN402 (SEE PAGE 4-19)

5P

M001 LOADING MOTOR

JL001 LDM+

1

LDM-

2

GND

3

CKSW1

4

OCSW1

5

JL002 JL005 S001

JL004

CHUCK/TRAY DETECT

JL003

1

C

2

3

4

5

05

LOADING 4-5

4-6

MS-81

DVP-NS400D There are a few cases that the part isn't mounted in this model is printed on this diagram.

MB-98 (SIGNAL PROCESS, SERVO) PRINTED WIRING BOARD – Ref. No.: MB-98 board; 2,000 series – MB-98 BOARD (SIDE A)

Power Block (TOP-244U) (US, Canadian) Power Block (HS13S0U) (US, Canadian, Mexican) Power Block (HS13S0E) (AEP, UK, Argentina) Power Block (HS13S0F) (E, Brazilian) (SWITCHING REGULATOR)

CN101 CN103 CN201 CN202 CN402 CN801 CN802

D-3 D-4 A-1 C-1 D-1 A-3 A-4

IC103 IC302 IC503 IC701

C-5 B-2 C-3 B-4

AI-23 (AUDIO/VIDEO OUT, INTERFACE CONTROL)

ER-15 (AEP, UK) (EURO AV)

MS-81 (LOADING) MB-98 (SIGNAL PROCESS, SERVO)

SIGNAL PROCESS, SERVO MB-98

4-7

4-8

DVP-NS400D

MB-98 BOARD (SIDE B) D801

A-4

IC101 IC102 IC107 IC202 IC301 IC303 IC401 IC501 IC502 IC504 IC505 IC601 IC802 IC803

D-4 B-3 C-5 B-2 B-1 A-3 C-1 D-4 C-2 C-3 C-3 C-2 A-3 A-4

Q201 Q202

A-1 A-1

SIGNAL PROCESS, SERVO 4-9

4-10

MB-98

DVP-NS400D MB-98 (RF AMP, SERVO) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM – Ref. No.: MB-98 board; 2,000 series –

1

2

3

• See page 4-7 for printed wiring board.

4

5

6

The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified.

7

8

9

10

Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié.

11

12

13

MB-98 BOARD (1/9)

B+

NO MARK:DVD/CD PLAY D:DVD PLAY C:CD PLAY

A

14

GND +5V +3.3V

MB-98 BOARD (7/9)

RFMON

B+

B+

RF+

B

R202 100

2

SSCK

12 11

SW

10

C206 2200p C207 2200p C208 2200p

JL223 JL224

R203 100

R212 0 R215 0 R216 0 R219 0

D

JL225

C

8

N.C

7 6

CD LD

5

N.C FOCUS COIL

4

FCS+

TRACKING COIL

FCS-

3

TRK+

2

DVD_LD

A

JL201

E

JL227

CD_LD

F

JL202

SLED MOTOR

M

INLIMIT SENSOR

SPINDLE MOTOR

M

2

SLB-

3

SLA-

4

LED

5

GND

6

INLIM

7

SPM-

8

SPM+

9

3.5 3.4 0.6 V33

RX

TPA

MEV

FNN

VNA

VCI

D

DFT

C

TZC

B

PI

A

PII

E

BYP2

TZIN

F

MIRR

TE

0 3.3 3.3 3.3 0 3.5 1.6 1.6 2.5 1.6 0 0.7 1.9 0 2.6 0.1

FE FE SSCS MIRR MIRR

SSCK TZC SSWD

TZC SSDFCTI SSDFCTI

SSRD

C243 0.1u

SS_MON FE TE

4

C247 0.1u

SVC SSDFCTI TZC PI TRK-

C248 0.01u C246 0.01u

TRK-

TRK+ MIRR

TRK+

FCS-

FCS-

FCS+

JL203

FCS+

JL204

FCS-

JL205

TRK+

JL206

TRK-

FCS+

R205 100k

SLB+ SLASLA-

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

2.5 H

5

SLB-

2.9

SLA+

R238 2.2M

SPMSPMSPM+

R206 27k

C240 150p

SPM+ INLIM

SLA+ SLB+

JL209

SLB-

JL210

R208 33 R207 33

SLA-

DVD_LD INLIM

JL211

SPM-

JL212

SPM+

CD_LD

Q201 2SB1132-T100-QR DVD LD DRIVE L201

47uH

C209 10u 16V

C234 0.01u

R223 33 C217 47u 6.3V

R210 47k

D4.8/C5

JL228 R246 3300

INLIM

D4.1/C5 D2.1/C0.7

R220 33 R211 100

C221 10u 16V

B+

C223 47u 6.3V

D5/C4.3

Q202 2SB1132-T100-QR CD LD DRIVE

C218 0.01u

R225 47k

L202 47uH

D5/ C3.6 D0.6/C2

XLDON R229 100

SPINDLE SERVO(SPEED AND PHASE)

C224 0.01u

VIDEO SIGNAL Y/CHROMA

AUDIO SIGNAL

TRACKING SERVO DVD/CD CDV SLED SERVO DVD/CD

PB

FOCUS SERVO

05

• Waveforms

570 mVp-p

1 IC202 2 (CD play) 200 mV/DIV 200 ns/DIV

2 IC202 tl (DVD play) 500 mV/DIV 50 ns/DIV

550 mVp-p

1.4 Vp-p

2 IC202 tl (CD play) 500 mV/DIV 200 ns/DIV

1.4 Vp-p

3 IC202 rs (DVD play) 100 mV/DIV 50 ms/DIV

180 mVp-p

3 IC202 rs (CD play) 500 mV/DIV 50 ms/DIV

4 IC202 ra (DVD play) 500 mV/DIV 50 ms/DIV

860 mVp-p

1.5 Vp-p

RF AMP, SERVO MB-98 (1/9)

4-11

MB-98 BOARD (6/9)

SIGNAL PATH

H

1 IC202 2 (DVD play) 200 mV/DIV 50 ns/DIV

MB-98 BOARD (2/9)

C238 0.047u

JL208

JL229

0

SLA+

C236 0.047u

C226 0.01u

JL207

R224 22

MB-98 BOARD (5/9)

SLB+

SLB-

G

G

1

SLB+

2.4 FNP 2.4

D2

TE

IC202 SP3728AC

R201 330

SLA+

DIP

C2

FE

DVD/CD RF AMP, DIGITAL SERVO

R204 22k

9P

DIN

BYP

2.6

SIGO

AIP

VPA

4.2 AIN 4.2

ATOP

ATON

B2

2.5

CN202

TPH

A2

1

TRK-

F

JL226

IC202

2.5 H

DVD LD

CN

G

E

9

3.6 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.6 2.6 2.6 2.6 2.5 2.5

C205 2200p

E

B LD GND

3.6 3.6

3.8 D

JL222

33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48

VR MOD

JL221

MLPF

13

MON

MB

PD

WPP

MP

14

C219 560p

C

MIN

15

JL220

MEVO

E GND

SRD

LDON

16

WIN

G

CDLD

D

SWD

2.7 3.5 2.3 2.6

17

SCLK

CP

D4.1/C5 DVDLD D5/C3.6

C

JL219

RFIN

LDSELO

18

C216 4700p

JL230

SDEN

D5/C0

G

JL218

PI TE

RFIP

VNB

19

3.6 3.6 3.5

CDPD

20

PI

3

DVDPD

VC VCC

R209 1k

5 3

VPB

21

JL217

1

C215 4700p

0.2 0.2

GND

R245 100

1

22

F

2

RF

A

JL216

3

23

MB-98 BOARD (2/9)

B

JL215

4

F

JL214

5

24

SSCS

64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49

VC

DVD/CD LD MODULE

25

A

SSRD SSCS

6

D

B

H

3.3

7

DVD/CD PD IC

26

SSWD

3.8

SSRD

8

C

JL213 H

SSCK

9

26P

C244 10u 16V

SSWD

C202 0.01u CN201

C239 0.01u

16 15 14 13 12 11 10

OPTICAL DEVICE

C231 C232 0.1u 0.1u

C222 C225 0.1u 0.1u

C201 0.01u

BASE UNIT KHM-240AAA/J1NP

C233 0.001u

C235 0.1u

FL201

R237 12k C228 0.01u

C227 0.01u

4-12

4 IC202 ra (CD play) 500 mV/DIV 200 ms/DIV

1.7 Vp-p

DVP-NS400D MB-98 (ARP, SERVO DSP) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-7 for printed wiring board. – Ref. No.: MB-98 board; 2,000 series –

4

3

7

NO MARK:DVD/CD PLAY D:DVD PLAY C:CD PLAY P:PAL DVD PLAY N:NTSC DVD PLAY *:IMPOSSIBLE TO MEASURE THE VOLTAGE AT THE MARKED POINTS.

8

9

11

10

12

13

14

15

16

17 SDI6

MB-98 BOARD (3/9)

SDI5 SDI5 SDI4 SDI4

CDDATA

CDBCK

CDLRCK

CDDOUT

SDCK

XSHD

XSRQ

B+

XSAK

3.3

SDI7 MB-98 BOARD (3/9,8/9)

MB-98 BOARD (3/9)

SDI3 SDI3 SDI2 SDI1 SDI1 SDI0

2

1

SDI0

MEMD8

MEMD9

MEMD10

MEMD11

MEMD12

MEMD13

C336 0.01u

C334 0.01u

MEMD14

SDI0

SDI1

SDI2

SDI3

SDI4

SDI5

C337 0.01u MEMD15

C332 0.01u

3 IC301 TK71533ASCL R305 4700 R306 4700 R307 4700 R308 4700 R309 4700 R310 4700 R311 4700 R312 4700

IC301

B+

B+

MD8

A5

VSSA0

VSS

ADC5

A4

ADC6

A3

ADC7

A2

VDDA0 3.3V

A1

VSSD0

A0

D7

9

TESTAA

D6

8

VDDA0 3.3V

D5

7

VRTA

D4

6

VSS

D3

5

TESTK0

D2

4

TESTK1

D1

3

TESTK2

D0

2

VSS

1

VRBA

MEMD2

MEMD6

MEMD1

MEMD7

MEMD0

JL358

0

0

0

0

I/O3

I/O12

VDD

GND

I/O4

I/O11

I/O5

I/O10

I/O6

I/O9

I/O7

I/O8

N.C

N.C

3.3 3.3

C340 0.01u MEMA9 MEMA8 MEMA7

MEMA0

MEMA6

MEMA1

MEMA5

MEMA2

MEMA4

MEMA3

0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 3.3

C344 0.01u

MEMA3

N.C

N.C N.C

LCAS

WE

UCAS

RAS

OE

N.C

A9

N.C

A8

A0

A7

A1

A6

A2

A5

A3

A4

VDD

GND

26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36

3.3 3.3 3.3 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2

MEMD15

3 3 3 3

MEMD11

MEMD14 MEMD13 MEMD12

MEMD10 MEMD9 MEMD8

3.3 3.3 0 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2

1.4 Vp-p MEMA9 MEMA8 MEMA7 MEMA6 MEMA5

3 IC302
MEMA4

MEMA2 MEMA1 MEMA0

CL301

3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 1.8 2.6 2.6 0.7

XWAIT

CL302

XSDPCS

CL303

XARPCS

CL304

XSDPIT

CL305

XARPIT

C341 0.01u

HA7 HA6 HA5

0.7 2 2 2.3 0 3.3 2.2 0.8 0.7 1.7 1.6 1.8 2.2 2.2

• Waveforms

HA4 HA3

1.7 Vp-p

MB-98 BOARD (6/9)

HA2 HA1 HA0

C342 0.01u

1 IC302
4 IC302
HD15 HD14 HD13 HD12 HD11 HD10 HD9 HD8

XRD

XWR

VIDEO SIGNAL Y/CHROMA

1.7

3.3

3.3

1.8 0.3 3.3 3.3

JL320

B+

0

I/O13

3 3 3 3

C339 0.01u

157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208

3.3

1

MEMD5

2

MEMD3

3

MEMD4

4

MEMD4

I/O2

5

MEMD5

I/O14

6

MEMD3

I/O15

I/O1

7

MEMD2

MEMD6

GND

I/O0

8

MEMD7

VDD

SIGNAL PATH VSS

PDM3

PDM2

PDM1

VDD 3.3V

GIO3/INT5

GIO2/INT4

GIO1/INT3

GIO0/INT2

VDD 1.8V

LOCK

JITPWM

DFCT

MDP0

PDM0

XDSPRST

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1.8 0 3.3

GM71V18160CT-6TR

9

MD9

MD10

MD11

MD12

MD13

MD14

MD15

DATA

VDD 3.3V

1.6 D0/C0.8 BCLK

VSS

LRCK

P0/N*/C3.3 SD3 P0/N*/C0 SD2 P0/N*/C3.3 SD1 P0/N*/C0 SD0 3.3 SDEF P3.3/N*/C3.3 XSAK P3.3/N*/C3.3 XSRQ 3.3 XSHD 1.6 SDCK 1.8 VDD 1.8V 1.6 DOUT 1.6

VSS

SD4

3.3 P0/N*/C0 SD7 P0/N*/C0 SD6 P0/N*/C0 SD5 P0/N*/C0

VDD 3.3V

A6

ADC4

2.2

R301 3300

MNT0

ADC3

JL326

JL357

MNT1

A7

CL306

TCK

MNT2

VDD 1.8V

4

MON

TDOKT

JL353

MNT3

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52

ADC2 VDDA0 3.3V

JL322

JL352

MNT4

XINT

MDS0

TDIKT

MNT5

HINT

ADC1

VSS

TRST

JL351

MNT6

1.6 1.7

ESTB

3

ADC0

TMS

JL350

MNT7

XCS

XARPRST JL349

K

VDDD1 3.3V

VDD 3.3V

3.3

XRST MB-98 BOARD (6/9)

CL320

HCS

XARPRST

J

TRST

XWAT

VSSD1

3.3 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.7

TRST MB-98 BOARD (7/9)

2

VSS

PWM2

CL319

IC302 CXD9635R

RFIN1 VRB

MA0

PWM1

CL318

D1.6/C0.4

PWM0

TDOKT

CL317

VSSA1

1.6 1.6

TDOKT

MA1

0.7 0.1

TCK

VSSA0

MA2

IC302 ARP,SERVO DSP

MIRR

TCK

3.3 3.3

1

AIN

TZC

TDIKT

JL318

D0.4/C1.6

RFIN2

1.7

MB-98 BOARD (3/9)

C349 0.01u

MA3

JL364

TDIKT

MA4

JL363

TMS TMS

MA5

VRT

TDO

I

VDD 3.3V

VDDD2 3.3V

VDDA1 3.3V

TCK

C321 0.01u

MA6

TDI

C346 4700p

MA7

VSSD2

TMS

C351 0.01u

R321 470 SS_MON

1.7 1.7 0 3.3

MA8

IREF

TRST

SVC

MB-98 BOARD (1/9)

R385 4700

AOUT

VSS

R319 6800

MA9

3.3 3.3 0.8 0.9 3.3

C313 0.033u

VDD 3.3V

VSSA2

SCKI

MB-98 BOARD (5/9)

C348 0.01u C312 0.1u

VDDA2 3.3V

VDD 1.8V

SLE SPFG

XMWR

MCKI

C311 4700p

R316 4700 R317 10k

XCAS

BIAS

1.6 1.8 1.6

PI

C310 4700p

VREF

VSS

FE

C347 0.01u

VSS

DFCTI

TE

C309 4700p

XRAS

VDDA3 3.3V

VDDA5 1.8V

R313 470 R314 470 R315 470

3.3 1.7 1.6 1.9 3.3 1.7 2.2

XOE

Y

1.8

MB-98 BOARD (1/9)

H

0.7

C320 0.01u

VDD 1.8V

FR1

VSSA5

1.6

FR2

CLKIN

0.01u

R345 10k C307 0.01u

MD0

1.6

C326

RF+

FR3

VSS

3.3 2.6 3.3

MD1

GIO13

R336 10k

C306 4700p

C328 0.01u C325 0.01u

INM

JL340

R356 1800

F

0.6 1

MD2

GIO12

C324 0.01u

C318 0.01u

INP

GIO11/TMC2

R335 2200

MD3

JL321

R344 1k

MD4

VSSA3

GIO10/FGIN

C327 0.1u

VDDA4 3.3V

GIO9/FGREF

R343 220

R352 2200

C323 0.01u

MD5

GIO8/SCK

E

C319 0.068u

R2

GIO7/SDO

R349 27k

MD6

GIO6/SDI

R342 33k

R1

GIO5/PGIN

R338 22k

R350 1200 R351 2200

1.6 1.6 1.4 1.4 1.6 1.3 3.3 1 2.5 3.3

MD7

MEMD1

3 IC302
16M DRAM IC303

3.3 3 3 3 3.3 3 3 3 3

MEMD0 VSS

VCO

3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3

R337 100

1.3 0.5 2.4 3.3

R199 2700 R299 150k C322 0.01u

VSSA4

GIO4/PGREF

C315 100p

156 155 154 153 152 151 150 149 148 147 146 145 144 143 142 141 140 139 138 137 136 135 134 133 132 131 130 129 128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105

C317 0.01u

IC303

R320 0 C343 0.01u

40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

11 10

3.3

JL348

JL347

JL346

JL317

JL342

JL316

JL341

JL315

JL314

JL313

JL312

JL311

JL310

JL309

JL307

JL306

JL305

CL316

CL315

CL314

CL313

CL312

CL311

JL329

CL310

CL309

CL307

CL308

1.7 RFD 1.8

VDD 1.8V

VSS

ADO0

PLCKO

VSS

1.7 1.5 1.6 ADO5 1.7 ADO4 1.5 ADO3 1.7 ADO2 1.6 ADO1 1.6 ADO6

ADO7

R341 10k

MB-98 BOARD (7/9)

R330 0

104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 R334 10k

D

B+ +1.8V

R368 4700

+3.3V

+3.3V REG

C

R318 0

B+ B+

25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15

GND

SDI6

VIN

VOUT

C305 0.01u

GND

MB-98 BOARD (7/9)

C304 100u 6.3V

SDI7

R329 0

G

MB-98 BOARD (3/9)

SDI2

+5V

B

18

SDI6 MB-98 BOARD (2/9)

SDEF

A 5

6

SDI7

MB-98 BOARD (2/9) B+

5

KTEMU1

2

KTEMU0

1

AUDIO SIGNAL

PB

R328 10k

1.4 Vp-p

B+

R302 3300

160 mVp-p

C338 0.01u

TDOKT

C335 0.01u

TCK

C350 0.01u

TDIKT

C333 0.01u

KTEMU1

TMS

C331 0.01u

KTEMU0 MB-98 BOARD (2/9)

TRST

SPINDLE SERVO(SPEED AND PHASE) TRACKING SERVO DVD/CD CDV

2 IC302
4 IC302
SLED SERVO DVD/CD

R384 10

MB-98 BOARD (5/9) 05

MB-98 BOARD MB-98 (1/9) BOARD (5/9)

MB-98 BOARD (7/9)

MB-98 BOARD (5/9)

XRD

FDRV-

FDRV+

TDRV-

TDRV+

SLDB

LMCTL

SLDA

TZC

MB-98 BOARD (1/9)

MIRR

SSDFCTI

MB-98 MB-98 BOARD BOARD (1/9) (5/9)

33MARP

LMP

LMM

SSCK

SSWD

SSCS

SSRD

TSD

SPMUTE

INLIM

MDPO

MDSO

L

XWRH

FOCUS SERVO

MB-98 BOARD (6/9)

1.4 Vp-p

860 mVp-p

ARP, SERVO DSP 4-13

4-14

MB-98 (2/9)

DVP-NS400D

MB-98 (AV DECODER) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-7 for printed wiring board. – Ref. No.: MB-98 board; 2,000 series – 4

3

5

6

7

8

MB-98 BOARD (3/9)

12

11

10

14

15

16

C547 0.01u

C523 0.01u

B+

R517 10k

1.6

IC504 B+

ISTARTI

SDAD10

P3.3/N*/C3.3 IVALI P3.3/N*/C3.3

SDAD8

IREQO

IOVDD_07

PWM

SDAD0

CVS03

SDAD7

IOVDD_03

CVD06

DVO0

SDAD1

DVO1

SDAD6

DVO2

IOVSS_06

DVO3

SDAD2

CVD3

SDAD5

DVO4

IOVDD_06

DVO5

SDAD3

DVO6

SDAD4

DVO7

CVS06

7

TRST

ADAD2 ADAD3

ADDT6 ADDT9

1

ADDT10

2

ADAD1

3

ADAD0

ADDT5

4 ADAD10

ADDT11

5

ADAD11

ADDT4

6

ADDT12

2.3 2.1 2.1 1.5 3.3 2.1 2 2.3 1.7

7

2.1 2.2

ADDT3

8

ADDT13

DQ4

DQ11

9

ADDT2

VCCQ

DQ5

DQ10

25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10

ADDT7 C545 0.01u

VCCQ

VSSQ

VSSQ

DQ6

DQ9

DQ7

DQ8

VCCQ

VCCQ

DQML

N.C.

WE

DQMU

CAS

CLK

RAS

CKE

CS

N.C.

A11(BA)

A9

A10/AP

A8

A0

A7

A1

A6

A2

A5

A3

A4

VCC

VSS

B+

C506 10u 16V

B+

C544 0.01u

R513 220

R514 220

3.3 1.9 1.9

ADDT0 ADDT1

2.6 3.3 3.3 2.9 3

1.5 2.1 3.3 2.3 2.1

ADDT2 ADDT3 C528 0.01u

C533 0.01u ADDT4 ADDT5

2.1 2.3 3.3 0.1 3.1 2.8 2.6 3 1.5 0.1 0.1 0.7 1.2 1.5 3.3

ADDT6

1.5 0.1

ADAD11 ADDT7 ADAD9

0.1 0 3.3 0.1 1.8 1.8 0.7 2.1

ADAD10 ADAD8

ADAD0 ADAD7 ADAD11

C529 0.01u

ADAD10 ADAD1 ADAD0 ADAD6 ADAD1 ADAD2

1.2 1.8 3.3 1.5 1.4

ADAD2 ADAD3 ADAD5

ADAD3

3.3 3.3

TRST

NOISE

05

MB-98 BOARD (9/9)

4-15

1.8 3.3 3.3

0.9

CSVGA

DATAVGA

PDO7

PDO6

PDO5

PDO4

PDO3

PDO2

PDO1

PDO0

PDI0

PDI1

PDI2

PDI3

PDI4

ADAD8 ADAD7 ADAD6 ADAD5 ADAD4

MB-98 BOARD (7/9)

B+

K4S161622D-TC80T

VCC

VSS

DQ0

DQ15

DQ1

DQ14

VSSQ

VSSQ

DQ2

DQ13

DQ3

DQ12

VCCQ

VCCQ

DQ4

DQ11

DQ5

DQ10

VSSQ

VSSQ

DQ6

DQ9

DQ7

DQ8

VCCQ

VCCQ

DQML

N.C.

WE

DQMU

CAS

CLK

RAS

CKE

CS

N.C.

A11(BA)

A9

A10/AP

A8

A0

A7

A1

A6

A2

A5

A3

A4

VCC

VSS

PB

TMS

MB-98 BOARD (2/9) TDIKT

PDI5

ADAD9

2.3 2.1

ADDT15 ADDT14

2.1 2.2 3.3 2.1 1.5

ADDT13 ADDT12 C535 0.01u ADDT11 ADDT10

2 1.7 3.3

ADDT9 ADDT8

0.1 1.6 3.3 0.1 0 1.8 2.1 1.8 1.4

ADAD9 ADAD8 ADAD7 ADAD6 ADAD5 ADAD4

VIDEO SIGNAL

TDOKT TCK

MB-98 BOARD (4/9)

AV DECODER MB-98 (3/9)

0.1 0 1.8 2.1 1.8 1.4

SIGNAL PATH

JL528

PDI6

COMPOUT

COUT

YOUT

Y/G

CR/B

C512 220u 4V

CB/R

C503 0.01u

0.1 1.6 3.3

MB-98 BOARD (7/9)

JL526

VIDEO LEVEL ADJ

ADDT8

ADAD4

JL527

3

ADDT9

FL505

CHROMA

JL524

RV501

ADDT10

2 1.7 3.3

C537 0.01u

JL525

C521 0.1u

ADDT11

16M SDRAM IC505

C532 0.01u R533 10

C542 0.01u

R522 3300 RV501 1k

R516 220

R515 220

PDI7

VOUT 2

R512 220

R511 220

ADDT12

+3.3V

C522 0.01u

FLD

VIN

5

1

1.2

C505 10u 16V

4

GND

+3.3V REG

C513 0.01u

3.3 5

IC502 MM1385ENLE

5

C541 0.01u

C520 0.01u

B+

HSYNC

B+

IC502 M

C518 0.1u

C540 0.01u

R521 0

CONT

B+ +5V

ADDT13

C534 0.01u

IC505

R524 10k

C519 0.01u

GND

L

0

3.3 3.3

0.7 0.9 0.4 0.9 3.3 1.6 1.1 1.1 1.7

1

0.4 0.9 0.8

1.8

R518 1200

C501 1u 50V

MB-98 BOARD (7/9)

3

1.1 1.1 1.6 1.8

3.3 0.5 0.4 3.3 1.8

0.5 3.3

0.6 3.3

0.5 3.3

3.3

0.6 3.3

0.6 3.3

0.6 3.3

2

+3.3V

ADDT14

2.1 2.2 3.3 2.1 1.5

GND

0.1 0.1 1.8 3.1 2.8 3.3 1.6

61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120

B+

ADDT15

ADDT8

+1.8V

FL502

2.3 2.1

C536 0.01u

ADDT7

TCK

FL501

TMS

TDO

6

TDI

5

X_SCAN_EN

4

CVD05

3

IOVSS_05

2

D1CLKO

SHTDWNB

1

IOVSS_03

2.1 2.3 3.3 0.1 3.1 2.8 2.6 2.9 1.5 0.1 0.1 0.7 1.2 1.5 3.3

ADDT6

DQ12

1

CVS07

ADDT1 ADDT14

DQ13

DQ3

2

IERRI

ADDT5

DQ2

3

SDAD9

ADDT15 C526 0.01u

VSSQ

4

SDAD11

IOVSS_02

ADDT0

VSSQ

5

ICLKI

1.9 2.3 1.8 1.9 2.1 3.3 1.5 2.1

C531 0.01u ADDT4

DQ14

6

IOVSS_07

ADDT3

DQ15

DQ1

7

SDAD12_SDRAM64(N.C.)

CVD02

1.5 2.1 3.3 2.3 2.1

ADDT2

R525 10k

VSS

DQ0

8

DTI7

1.6 3.3

K4S161622D-TC80T

VCC

9

SDCS1B(SDAD13_SDRAM64)

121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180

SCLKIN

AVDD_06

AVSS_06

AVDD_07

VC

CPOT

AVDD_08

N.C.(BUS_CLOCK)

IOVDD_12

HAD23

HAD22

HAD21

HAD20

CVS09

HAD19

HAD18

HAD17

HAD16

IOVSS_12

HAD15

HAD14

HAD13

HAD12

CVD09

HAD11

HAD9

HAD10

HAD8

IOVDD_13

HAD7

HAD6

HAD5

HAD4

CVS10

HAD3

HAD2

HAD1

HAD0

HCSB

HRWB

IOVSS_13

HIREQO

HHCPU_MD

CVD10

HWAITOB

DM_ACK1

DM_ACK0

DM_REQ1

DM_REQ0

IOVDD_14

RSTB

HD0

HD1

HD2

HD3

1 2 3

SDCS0B

NRSENB

JL542

SDCKEO IOVDD_08

NRSDOUT

B+

SDRASOB

IOVDD_02

CVS05

JL541

DTI3

P0/N*/C0 DTI4 P0/N*/C0 DTI5 P0/N*/C0 DTI6 P0/N*/C0

PDO7

B+

IOVSS_08

IOAVSS_00

K

SDCLKO

PDO6

1.6

27MVGA32

IOVDD_09

PDO5

R554 10 MB-98 BOARD (4/9)

SDCASOB

PDO4

3

SDWEOB

IC503 CXD1933Q

CVS02

IOVDD_05

C502 10u 16V

CRPCLKI

P0/N*/C0 DTI0 P0/N*/C3.3 DTI1 P0/N*/C0 DTI2 P0/N*/C3.3

PDO3

VIN

VOUT

1.8

GND

J

C539 0.01u

1

2

CVD07

PDO2

1.8

AV DECODER

PDO1

3.3

B+

IC503

PDO0

IC501 TK71518ASCL

IOVSS_01

SDDQM1

IOVSS_04

B+

3.3

C538 0.01u

SDDQM0

CDEMPI

PDI0

R519 0

+1.8V REG

IOVSS_09

CDLRKI

PDI1

IC501

CDBCKI

PDI2

I

SDDQ8

PDI3

XSRQ

SDDQ7

IOVDD_01

CVD04

XSAK

SDDQ9

CDIN1I

PDI4

XSHD

CDIN2I

D0/C0.8

PDI5

3.3 3.3

SDEF

SDDQ6

PDI6

SDCK

CVD01

PDI7

1.8 1.6

IOVDD_10

N.C.(PD32FLAG)

H

DO

N.C.

SDI7

SDDQ10

CVS04

SDI6

MB-98 BOARD (2/9)

BCKO

HSYNCO

SDI5

SDDQ5

FLDO

3.3

C510 0.01u SDI4

SDDQ11

LRCKO

IOVDD_04

SDI3

CVS01

IREFI

SDI2

SDDQ4

VREFI

SDI1

ACH56

IOAVDD_00

G

IOVSS_10

VGO

SDI0

SDDQ12

ACH34

AVDD_05

1.6

33MAVD

ACH12

COMPOUT

MB-98 BOARD (7/9)

D0/C0.8

AVSS_05

R510 10k

SDDQ3

AVDD_04

CDBCK CDLRCK

IOVSS_00

COUT

3.3 1.6 1.6 0

CVS08

AVSS_04

CDDATA MB-98 BOARD (2/9)

SDDQ13

ACLK

AVDD_03

CDDOUT

F

CVD00

YOUT

1.8 1.6

SDDQ2

AVSS_03

JL513

HD15

DVDD33

JL512

BCK

SDDQ15

SDDQ14

DVSS33

1.6 1.6

SDDQ0

IOVDD_11

AVDD_02

JL511 LRCK

TESTI IOVSS_11

HD14

GOUT

ACH56 MB-98 BOARD (8/9)

CLKI

HD13

AVSS_00

E

0 0

JL510

SDDQ1

AVSS_02

JL509

ACH34

HD12

AVDD_01

JL508 ACH12

CVD08

BOUT

C509 0.01u

JL507 512FSAVD

CVS00

AVSS_01

HD15

HD11

AVDD_00

HD14

HD10

ROUT

HD13

4

1.7 0.7 0.8 2.2 1.8 1.6

HD12

HD9

5

HD11

HD8

6

HD10

IOVDD_00

7

HD9

ADDT1

8

HD8

3.3 1.9 1.9

ADDT0

9

3.3 2.2 2.2 1.8 1.6

IC504

C530 0.01u

60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10

C508 0.01u

IOVSS_14

HD4

HD5

HD6

HD7

240 239 238 237 236 235 234 233 232 231 230 229 228 227 226 225 224 223 222 221 220 219 218 217 216 215 214 213 212 211 210 209 208 207 206 205 204 203 202 201 200 199 198 197 196 195 194 193 192 191 190 189 188 187 186 185 184 183 182 181

MB-98 BOARD (6/9)

16M SDRAM

1.8

25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10

0

1.8

1.8

JL522

1.9 1.4 3.3 3.3 3.3

2 2

2.4 1.8 1.1 1.3

0.7 0.7 2.6 2.6 3.3 2.7 0.5 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.7 2.5 0.5 2.4

0

2.3

B+

3.3 1.7

1

1.3 1.9 0.3 1.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 1.8 3.3 3.3 3.3

0.4 0.7 0.7

B+

26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

C546 0.01u

B+

MB-98 BOARD (7/9)

20

C525 0.01u

26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

C516 0.01u

C514 0.01u

B

D

19

18

JL523

XRST

C

17

27MAVD

XAVDCS2

XAVDCS3

HA21

HA20

HA19

HA18

HA17

HA16

HA15

HA14

HA13

HA12

HA11

HA10

HA9

HA8

HA7

HA6

HA5

HA4

HA1

HA0

XRD

XWRH

XAVDIT

XWAIT

DACK0

DACK1

DREQ1

HD0

HD1

HD2

HD3

HD4

HD5

HD6

HD7

C524 0.01u C504 0.01u

R507 100

13

MB-98 BOARD (7/9)

MB-98 BOARD (6/9)

*:IMPOSSIBLE TO MEASURE THE VOLTAGE AT THE MARKED POINTS.

DREQ0

NO MARK:DVD/CD PLAY D:DVD PLAY C:CD PLAY P:PAL DVD PLAY N:NTSC DVD PLAY

A

9

HA3

2

HA2

1

4-16

Y

Y/CHROMA

AUDIO SIGNAL

DVP-NS400D MB-98 (BNR) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM – Ref. No.: MB-98 board; 2,000 series –

• See page 4-7 for printed wiring board.

• Waveforms 3 IC503 yl : US, CND, E, MX, AR, BR

1

2

3

4

5

MB-98 BOARD (4/9)

A

9

10

B+

JL604

Y/CHROMA

1.7

1.1

1.8

PDI7

PB

3.3

B

PDI6

PDI7

PDO6

JL603

940 mVp-p (H) 4 IC503 uf

8

C602 0.01u

VIDEO SIGNAL

1 IC503 yd : US, CND, E, MX, AR, BR

7

NO MARK:DVD/CD PLAY SIGNAL PATH

660 mVp-p (H)

6

PDO7

1 IC503 yd : AEP, UK (LINE : RGB mode)

PDI7 PDI6

1.1

PDI6 PDI5

24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17

PDI5

YCOUT6

YCOUT7

VDD

GND

EXPH0

EXPH1

YCOUT2

YCIN_1

YCOUT1

YCIN_0

YCOUT0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

3 0

1.8

10 11 12 13 14 15 16

YCIN_2

9

GND

FID

D

VDD

IC601 CXD9632Q

GND

YCOUT3

MRST

PDO0

MB-98 BOARD (3/9)

0.4 0.9 0.7

BNR

VDD

PDO1

IC601

YCIN_3

CK27

PDO2

PDO7

YCIN_4

1.6 3.3 3.3

PDO7

PDO6

YCOUT4

GND

PDO3

YCIN_5

SCS

PDO4

1.1 1.6 0.9

3.3

PDO6

5 IC503 uj

PDO4

PDO5

PDO5

2 IC503 yh : AEP, UK (LINE : RGB mode)

PDO5

PDO3

YCOUT5

NRSDIN

PDO4

940 mVp-p (H)

PDI2

TMC

H_SYNC

PDO3

PDO2

32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25

PDO2

MB-98 BOARD (3/9) PDI3

PDI2 PDI1

PDO1

PDO1

620 mVp-p (H)

PDI4 PDI3

PDO0

PDO0

C

YCIN_7

YCIN_6

PDI4

PDI1

1.1 1.6 1 3.3

PDI5

0.4 0.9 0.8

PDI2

PDI0 PDI0

PDI4 PDI3 C601 0.01u

PDI1 PDI0

R604 100 XRST

MB-98 BOARD (6/9)

CSVGA DATAVGA

HSYNC

B+ +3.3V MB-98 BOARD (3/9)

GND

C603 0.01u

MB-98 BOARD (7/9)

810 mVp-p (H) 660 mVp-p (H)

C604 0.01u

E

FLD 27MVGA32

05

2 IC503 yh : US, CND, E, MX, AR, BR

6 IC503 i;

1.1 Vp-p (H) 620 mVp-p (H) 3 IC503 yl : AEP, UK (LINE : RGB mode)

7 IC503 ik

3.2 Vp-p (H) 660 mVp-p (H)

BNR

4-17

4-18

MB-98 (4/9)

DVP-NS400D

MB-98 (DRIVE) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM – Ref. No.: MB-98 board; 2,000 series – 1

2

• See page 4-7 for printed wiring board.

4

3

5

6

7

8

9

11

10

12

13

14

MB-98 BOARD (5/9) A

15

16

SIGNAL PATH SPINDLE SERVO(SPEED AND PHASE)

NO MARK:DVD/CD PLAY D:DVD PLAY C:CD PLAY

TRACKING SERVO DVD/CD CDV SLED SERVO DVD/CD B+

+3.3V

B+

+5V

MB-98 BOARD (7/9)

B

FOCUS SERVO

R432 10k

GND

B+ C416 0.01u R430 100k

R427 100k

43

52

42

41

40

39

38

37

OPIN2-

OPOUT2

PS

PVCC1

DO1+

PGND1 IN2-

IC401

IN3+

FOCUS/TRACKING COIL DRIVE, SPINDLE/SLED/ LOADING MOTOR DRIVE

GND

R410 56k

R413 10k

MB-98 BOARD (2/9)

D6.7/C6

DO5-

IN4PGND2 OUT4 DO6+

GND

MUTE12

MUTE34

MUTE5

TSD-M

PVCC2

DO6-

13

14

15

16

17

18

50

19

20

21

22

23

24

0

3.3

C404 1500p

H

C405 0.1u

I

5.3

SLB+

5.3

SLB-

MB-98 BOARD (1/9)

36 35 34 30 29

SLASLASLB+ SLB+ SLBSLBSPMSPM-

C420 0.1u

5.3

LDM+

5.3

LDM-

B+ TSD

R426 470k

MB-98 BOARD (2/9) SPMUTE XDRVMUTE

C406 0.1u

MDPO R412 270k

SLA-

C421 0.1u

R439 0

C411 4700p

R420 R414 470k R417 470k 10k

R415 120k

5.3

R435 10k

MDSO

C401 0.015u

SLA+

28

7 8

1.7

SGND

IN5+

REV

G

IN4+

3.2

1.6

R425 220k

DO5+

FWD

R424 33k

SLDB

1.6

D4/C4.7

3.2

SLDA

1.6

DO4OUT3

CTL

C410 0.001u

IN3-

OUT5

SLE

5.3

SLA+

IN5-

TDRV-

TRKC418 0.01u

SLA+

DO4+

1.3

1.6

9

R423 33k R411 56k

10

FDRVTDRV+

1.6

11

C409 0.001u

FDRV+

GND

IC401 FAN8034

12

1.6

DO3-

31

DO3+ OUT2

TRK+

5.3

33

IN2+

32

DO2-

51

1 49

1.6

OUT1

FCS-

5.3

27

1.6

DO2+

5.4

26

R422 33k

IN

25

1.6

DO1-

3.3

C408 100p

F

10.8

44

10.8

1.6

E

45

3.3

R409 150k

2

1.6

3

R421 33k

4

C403 100p

1.6

5

R408 150k

5.2

46

FCS+

C407 220p

6

R419 33k

1.6

47

OPIN2+

R407 120k

5

48

3.3

D

1.6

3.3

LDM+

GND

JL409

MB-98 BOARD (2/9)

B+

1.6

LDM-

VREF

5

R436 100

2.8

4

JL408

MB-98 BOARD (1/9,2/9)

SPFG R431 56k

SVCC

LDMLDM+

JL405

SVC

CKSW1

3.4

3

OCSW1

OPOUT1

2

GND

R405 1k R404 1k

C412 0.033u

3.3

CKSW1

(SEE PAGE 4-5)

JL406

C402 220p

R406 120k

C417 0.001u

OPIN1-

MS-81 BOARD CN001

1

C413 0.033u

IN1+

C427 0.001u C428 0.001u

JL407 OCSW1

R434 330

R418 33k

OPIN1+

5P

R433 10k

R429 56k

R402 10k R403 10k

C

CN402

C414 0.01u

R416 680k

R428 33k

C415 0.01u

MB-98 BOARD (6/9)

OCSW1 OCSW1

LMCTL

CKSW1 CKSW1

LMP LMM

JL410

J

C419 47u 16V

B+ +11V

JL411

MB-98 BOARD (7/9) M_GND

05

DRIVE

MB-98 (5/9)

4-19

4-20

DVP-NS400D

MB-98 (SYSTEM CONTROL) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM – Ref. No.: MB-98 board; 2,000 series – 1

2

4

3

• See page 4-7 for printed wiring board.

5

6

7

*1: Either IC107 or IC108 is used.

8

9

12

11

10

13

14

15

16

17

18

NO MARK:DVD/CD PLAY D:DVD PLAY C:CD PLAY P:PAL DVD PLAY N:NTSC DVD PLAY

MB-98 BOARD (6/9) A B+

B+

+3.3V MB-98 BOARD (7/9)

GND FL103

FL102

XSDPIT X39IT/TSENSU/OTASUKE

HA17

IC103 MB91307APFV-G-BND-E1

DREQ0

HA3 HA2

DACK0

HA1

XDRVMUTE

HA0

DREQ1

VSS

DACK1

HD15

XIFCS VSS

HD14

X1 X0

HD13

1

HD12

VCC

HD11

CKSW1

HD10

OCSW1

HD9

CS0X

HD8

CS1X

HD7

CS2X

HD6

SO0

OCSW2

CPUCK

XFRRST

VSS

HSTX

NMIX

XWRL

XWRH

XRD

BRQ

BGRNTX

XWAIT

CS7X

CS6X

C

CS5X

CS4X

CS3X

SC0

HA10 HA9

C112 0.1u

R113 10k

R145 R143 10k 10k

CL102

3.3 3.3

3.3

1.7 3.3

JL123

B+

SI2

MB-98 BOARD (7/9)

3.3 3.3

3.3

3.3

0

R129 10k

0

N.C.

DQ12

WE

DQ4

RESET

VCC

N.C.

DQ11

N.C.

DQ3

RY/BY

DQ10

A18

DQ2

A17

DQ9

A7

DQ1

A6

DQ8

A5

DQ0

A4

OE

A3

VSS

A2

CE

A1

A0

25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

DQ5

DQ13

HA5

1.8 3.3

HA17

HA6 HA6 HA7 HA7 HA8 HA8

2.2 1 0.8 0.4 0.7 0.7 1.7 0.7 3.3 1.6 1.3 1.8 1.9 2.2 0.3 2.2 1.3 1.7

HD15

HA9 HA9

HD7

HA10

HD14

HA11

HD6

HA12

HD13

HA13

HD5

HA14

HD12

HA15

HD4

HA16

C124 0.01u HD11

HA17

HD3

HA19

HD10

HA20

HD2

HA21

HA10 HA11 HA12 HA13 HA14 HA15 HA16 HA17 HA18 HA18 HA19 HA20

MB-98 BOARD (3/9)

HA21 HD9 HD1 HD0 HD8

HD0 HD1

HD0

HD1 HD2 HD2 HD3 HD3 HD4

1.3 2.3

HD4 HD5 HA1

HD5 HD6 HD6 HD7

B+

HD7 HD8 HD8 HD9

C116 0.01u

HD9 HD10 HA7

HD10 HD11

HA6

HD11 HD12

HA5

HD12

MB-98 BOARD (2/9,3/9)

HD13 HA4

HD13

HA3

IC108

HA2

OTP

HA1

IC108

HD15 HD14 HD13 HD12 HD11 HD10 HD9 HD8 HD7

HA18 HA8 HA7 HA6 HA5 HA4 HA3 HA2 HA1

HD6

HD0 HD8 HD1 HD9

0.7

HD2 HD10 HD3 HD11

1.3 1.1 2.7 2.6 2.6 0.7 0.7 2 2 2.3 1.3 1.7 1.3 2.2 0.3 2.2 1.9 1.8 1.3 1.6

HD15

HA21

A18

A19

A17

A8

A7

A9

A6

A10

A5

A11

A4

A12

A3

A13

A2

A14

A1

A15

A0

A16

VSS

BYTE VSS

OE

D15/A-1

D0

D7

D8

D14

D1

D6

D9

D13

D2 D10 D3 D11

HD14 HD15

MSMR27V160

N.C.

CE

HD14

*1

HA0

HD5 C114 0.01u

R112 1k

A19

R160 10k

HA19

2.2 0.8 0.7 1.7 1.6 1.8 2.2 2.2 1 0.4

A8

MB-98 BOARD (2/9,3/9)

HA5

HA8

61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90

SI0 SO2

HA2

DQ6

8

HA11

A9

D5 D12 D4 VCC

23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44

HA4

HA3

DQ14

9

HA17

HA18

HA19

HA20

SYSTEM CONTROL

MD2

HA12

A10

24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10

JL111

1.4 1.9 1.3 1.1 HA21

3.3

HA5

HA4

DQ7

1

SI2

WP

IC103

MD1

JL108

SI0 SO2

TRM-/XKRCS

HA6

HA5

HA13

DQ15/A-1

A11

2

MD0

JL109

SO0

HA22

3.3 3.3

AN0

HA7

3.3 3.3 2.5

SC0

AVSS

DISCEXT/CLPSW0

XAVDCS2

MB-98 BOARD (3/9)

J

VCC

HA14

A12

3

I

3.3

OCSW1

EUROV/Y/CLAPSW1

HA6

VSS

4

JL107 CKSW1

HA8

HA15

A13

5

X101 16.5MHz

TRM+/XKRRST

2.4 0.5 2.5 1.7 1.8 1.8 0.5 2.7 3.3 2.6 2.6 0.7 0.7 2 2 2.3 0

BYTE

6

3

R177 10 R178 10

HA9

SCL

HA7

3.3 1.3 1.1 2.7 2.6 2.6 0.7 0.7 2 2

A16

A14

7

2

C109 0.01u

HA10

HA8

3.3

A15

8

R133 10k

SDA

HA16

2.4 2.4 0.5 2.5 1.7 1.8 1.8 0.5 1.9 1.4 3.3 3.3

HA4

MBM29DL324BE-90PFTN

9

R111 470

HA11

1.3 0.3 1.9 1.3 0.7

MB-98 BOARD (5/9)

1.6 1.6 3.3 0 3.3 1.3

RGBSEL/MICMUTE

3.3

1

H

HA12

91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120

R119 10k

XARPRST

2.4

HD5

XDRVMUTE

3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3

HA13

XRST

HD4

R116 10k

DACK1

HA14

HD3

DREQ1

R162 10k

R156 10k

MB-98 BOARD (3/9)

1.8 1

VSS

HD2

DACK0

2

HA15

HD1

DREQ0

3

HA18

HD0

CLAPSW0/DISCEXT

4

HA19

XLDON

3.3 3.3 3.3

EUROVY/CLAPSW1

5

DSENS

MAMUTE

MB-98 BOARD (9/9)

6

VSS

WIDE

R117 1k R118 1k

7

HA16

3.3 D3.3/C0

RGBSEL/MICMUTE

3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3

8

R161 0

SO2

48/44.1K

XARPRST

G

HA10

HA21

SI2

VESCS/X39CS

XRST

0.7 3.2

XDACS

SO2

60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31

R182 100k R114 100k

SI2

9

AVRH

AN2

AN3

INT0

INT1

INT2

INT3

INT4

INT5

INT6

INT7

SI0

VCC

SC0

SO0

30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10

AVCC

2.6 3.1 3.1

3.3 3.3 3.3

0

E

F

HA11

B+

HA20

R132 10k R131 10k R121 10k R146 10k R123 10k R134 10k R149 3300 R151 3300 R153 3300 R155 3300

0

3.4

3.3

R106 10k

0

3.3 3.3

P3.3/N0/C0 3.3 R128 3.3 3300

3.3

SI1

3.3

HA12

HA9

SC1

3.3

C115 0.01u R130 10k

SO1

8

GND SDA

7

SCL

6

A2

WP

5

1 2 3 4

A1

3.3

HA13

B+

C110 100u 4V

3.3

HA14

R150 * R152 47k R154 *

SI0

SC0

SO0

C113 0.01u

IC101 BR24C16F-E2 VCC

HA16

AEP,UK,E,MX,AR

C103 0.01u

A0

IC107

HA15

EEPROM

D

HA3 HA4

22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10

R175 0

IC101

MB-98 BOARD (2/9)

HA2 HA3

R157 0

SC1

MB-98 BOARD (2/9-4/9,8/9,9/9)

HA1 HA2

*R154 12k:E,MX,AR,BR 47k:AEP,UK

SO1 MB-98 BOARD (8/9,9/9)

HA0 HA1

*1

FLASH MEMORY

SI1

C

HA0

IC107

CMDREQ/TSENSD/CLPBSY

AN1

MB-98 BOARD (8/9)

HA18

*R150 6.8k:AEP:DPX1412BM/ DPX1412HM 12k:AEP:DPX1411BM/ DPX1411HM,UK 22k:E,MX,AR,BR

XARPIT

HA19

XAVDIT

MB-98 BOARD (2/9)

HA20

MB-98 BOARD (3/9)

HA21

B

1.4 1.9 0.5 1.8 1.8 1.7 2.5 0.5 2.4 2.4 1.8 3.3 2.2 1 0.8 0.4 0.7 0.7 1.7 0.7 3.3

HA21 HA20 HA9 HA10 HA11 HA12 HA13 HA14 HA15 HA16 HA17 R163 10k HD15 HD7 HD14 HD6 HD13 HD5 HD12

• Waveform

HD4

1 IC103 tf

HD4 HD3

MB-98 BOARD (3/9) MB-98 BOARD (2/9)

K

XIFCS

HD2

XAVDCS3

HD1

XARPCS

HD0

XSDPCS XWAIT

MB-98 BOARD (2/9,3/9)

XRD XWRH

MB-98 BOARD (7/9) MB-98 BOARD (9/9) MB-98 BOARD (8/9)

TRST XDACS

X39CS/XVESCS

MB-98 BOARD (7/9)

FSEL WIDE

L

MB-98 BOARD (9/9)

MAMUTE

MB-98 BOARD (1/9)

XLDON

MB-98 BOARD (7/9)

IFBSY

1.7 Vp-p (16.5 MHz)

05

SYSTEM CONTROL 4-21

4-22

MB-98 (6/9)

DVP-NS400D

MB-98 (CLOCK GENERATOR) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-7 for printed wiring board. – Ref. No.: MB-98 board; 2,000 series –

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

MB-98 BOARD (7/9) R108 10

C104 R101 100u 2.2 4V

10 11 12 13 14 15 16

512-2OUT

9

1

512-1OUT

XTO

2

XTI

3

1.6 1.6 3.2

VSS 27-1OUT

FSEL

27-2OUT

33-2OUT

VDD

6

C106 0.01u

1.6 1.6

C107 15p C108 15p

C

X102 27MHz

R107 1k

N.C 33-1OUT

VDD

VSS

VSS

JL104 1.6 D3.3/C0 JL103 1.6 3.2

1.6 1.6

R124 10

R136 10

R125 10

R137 10

JL105 JL106

10

R141

10

2

512FSAVD

MB-98 BOARD (9/9) 512FS6CH R142 10

SO2

JL117

SI2

JL118

SI0 R170 1k

B+

JL119

B+

SI2

JL120 JL134

CN103

6P

6

TXD

5

RXD

4

GND

3

+3.3V

2

GND

1

RF MON

DIAG (JIG)

RFMON

CN101 SC0

R164 100

SI0 XIFCS IFBSY

R168 0

TRST FB103

FB104

FL106

FB108

FL108

FB110

B+ B+

FB102

FL104

FB105

C122 47u 16V C121 100u 6.3V

C118 47u 4V

C123 220u 4V

GND

• Waveforms 2 IC102 7

1.5 Vp-p (27 MHz)

3 IC102 9, 0

DVD : 3.3 Vp-p (24.57 MHz) CD : 3.3 Vp-p (22.58 MHz)

4 IC102 qd, qg

3.2 Vp-p (33.87 MHz)

CLOCK GENERATOR 4-23

JL132

JL115

JL130 JL113

M_GND

MB-98 (7/9)

JL131

JL114

+1.8V

05

3.5 Vp-p (27 MHz)

JL129

JL116

MB-98 BOARD (5/9)

1 IC102 3, 4

FB106

B+

FB107

+11V

MB-98 BOARD (1/9-6/9,8/9,9/9)

FL105

+5V

B+

G

JL128

+3.3V

B+ MB-98 BOARD (2/9,3/9,8/9)

JL127

JL133

B+ MB-98 BOARD (1/9-3/9,5/9)

JL126 R165 100 R166 470 R167 0 FB109

SO0

B+

MB-98 BOARD (8/9)

512FS39

R127 10

3

E

MB-98 BOARD (1/9-6/9,8/9)

MB-98 BOARD (2/9)

MB-98 BOARD (3/9)

R139

MB-98 BOARD (6/9)

MB-98 BOARD (2/9,3/9,6/9)

33MARP

512FS2CH

SC0

SO2

MB-98 BOARD (3/9)

R138 10 R126 10

JL121

F

MB-98 BOARD (8/9)

27MAVD

33MAVD

C111 0.01u

SO0

SI2

27M39

4

IMIC6001BT-D

VDD

4

CL101 JL102

SO2

MB-98 BOARD (6/9)

FB112

5

3.2

1

SI0

FSEL

B+ IC102

C105 0.01u

SC0

11

FB111

R109 10

B

SO0

10

PLL

7

FL101

B+

D

9

IC102

NO MARK:DVD/CD PLAY D:DVD PLAY C:CD PLAY

8

A

8

4-24

B+

JL112

MB-98 BOARD (1/9)

15P

15

GND

14

SC0

13

SO0

12

SI0

11

XIFCS

10

XIFBUSY

9

XFRRST

8

3.3V_MNT

7

+3.3V

6

GND

5

+5V

4

GND

3

+1.8V

2

M_GND

1

+11V

AI-23 BOARD (4/4) CN403 (SEE PAGE 4-38)

DVP-NS400D

MB-98 (AUDIO DSP) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-7 for printed wiring board. – Ref. No.: MB-98 board; 2,000 series – 1

2

4

3

5

6

7

8

9

11

10

12

13

14

15

16

MB-98 BOARD (8/9) A

NO MARK:DVD/CD PLAY D:DVD PLAY C:CD PLAY P:PAL DVD PLAY N:NTSC DVD PLAY

LRCK ACH12 ACH34

BCK

SIGNAL PATH

SI1

AUDIO SIGNAL

B

MB-98 BOARD (3/9)

ACH56

X39CS/XVESCS FB701 FB702

PB

SO1 MB-98 BOARD

SC1

(6/9)

CMDREQ/TSENSD/CLPBSY X39IT/TSENSU/OTASUKE

MB-98 BOARD (7/9)

512FS39 C718 0.01u

C715 0.01u

3.3

3.3

3.3

JL712

1.8

1.8

3.3

3.3

C

C717 0.01u

3.3 3.3 3.3

C710 0.01u

0

1.8

3.3

3.3

ADDRO17

DSP1BCKI

ADDRO18

GND33

CVD06

DSP1ACKI

GND18

GND34

IOVDD7

DSP1NMII

GND17

GND35

DSP2BCKI

IC701

DSP1REQI0

GND16

AUDIO DSP

IOVDD18

DSP2ACKI

IC701 CXD1939R

GND36

GND15

CVD13

DSP2NMII

DSP1EMPI

GND14

DSP1CH56I

DSP2REQIO

DSP1CH34I

CVD05

DSP1CH12I

GND13

DSP1LRCKI

IOVDD6

IOVDD19

DSP2EMPI

GND37

DSP2CH56I

CVD14

DSP2CH34I

DSP1CH78O

DSP2CH12I

DSP1CH56O

DSP2LRCKI

DSP1CH34O

IOVDD5

DSP1CH12O

GND12

IOVDD20

CVD04

GND38

DSP2CH78O

DSP1DO

DSP2CH56O

DSP1EMP0

DSP2CH34O

DSP1BCK0

DSP2CH12O

DSP1LRCK0

GND11

IOVDD21

IOVDD4

GND39

1.8 3.3

C722 0.01u

3.3

1.8 3.3

C720 0.01u C723 0.01u

1.6 1.6

1.8 3.3 0 0 D0/C0.8 1.6 3.3 1.8 D0/C1.2 0 0 D0/C1.2

C724 0.01u C721 0.01u ACH78O ACH56O ACH34O ACH12O

MB-98 BOARD (9/9)

BCKO

3.3 1.6

LRCKO SPDIF

DSP2EMPO

DSP2BCKO

DSP2LRCKO

CVD03

GND10

IOVDD3

DSP2ACKO2

DSP2ACKO1

DSP2ACKO0

GND09

DSP2DIACKI

GND08

DSP2DII

CVD02

GND07

IOVDD2

PLL_AVSS

PLL_TST4I

PLL_TST3I

PLL_TST2I

PLL_TST1I

GND06

9

SCLKI

8

GND05

7

PLL_AVDD

6

IOVDD1

5

PLL_CLKO

4

GND04

3

PLL_CLNI

2

PLL_ENNI

1

JL727

1.8 1.7 1.6

3.3

JL722

JL720

JL718

1.6

1.8 1.6

3.3

3.3

1.6

3.3 3.3

JL711

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44

3.3

1.8

PLL27_CLNI

J

CVD01

DSP2DO

45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88

ADDRO8

GND21

ADDRO7

ADDRO6

IOVDD10

ADDRO5

ADDRO4

ADDRO3

IOVDD11

CVD08

GND22

ADDRO2

ADDRO1

ADDRO0

SRM_RDNO

GND23

IOVDD12

SRM_WRNO

CMD_ACKNO

CMD_REQNO

IOVDD13

DMA_ACKNO

CVD09

GND24

STCCLKI

GND25

SH_CLKI

SH_SII

GND26

SH_CSNI

P3.3/N0/C0

SH_SOO

IOVDD14

CVD10

GND27

DATAIO0

GND28

DATAIO1

DATAIO2

DATAIO3

GND29

IOVDD15

ADDRO16

CVD12

1.8

3.3

GND32

GND03

I

ADDRO15

IOVDD0

JL707

IOVDD17

DSP1DII

3.3

IOVDD8

GND02

C705 0.01u

GND19

TCK

1.6 3.3

H

1.8

ADDRO14

TRST

DSP1DIACKI

C707 0.01u

ADDRO13

TMS

GND01

0 0 D0/C0.8 1.6 3.3

ADDRO12

TDI

RESET_NI

G

TDO

1.6

1.8

ADDRO11

GND00

3.3

IOVDD9

XSCAN

DSP1ACKO0

C704 0.01u

CVD11

3.3

1.6

GND20

JL710

F

1.8 1.6

DATAIO4

GND30

C706 0.01u

CVD07

GND31

DSP1ACKO1

3.3

ADDRO9 ADDRO10

IOVDD16

DSP1ACKO2

E

DATAIO7

CVD00

1.8

DATAIO6

JL709

3.3

JL708

C703 0.01u

176 175 174 173 172 171 170 169 168 167 166 165 164 163 162 161 160 159 158 157 156 155 154 153 152 151 150 149 148 147 146 145 144 143 142 141 140 139 138 137 136 135 134 133

D

DATAIO5

132 131 130 129 128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89

3.3 +1.8V

R710 0

C708 0.01u

+3.3V MB-98 BOARD (7/9)

K

R724 10k GND C709 0.01u

05

MB-98 BOARD (2/9)

C711 0.22u

R721 100

R741 10k

R726 10k C713 0.01u

C714 0.22u

C719 0.01u C716 0.01u 27M39

MB-98 BOARD (7/9)

XRST

MB-98 BOARD (6/9)

CDDOUT

AUDIO DSP 4-25

4-26

MB-98 (8/9)

DVP-NS400D

MB-98 (D/A CONVERTER) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-7 for printed wiring board. – Ref. No.: MB-98 board; 2,000 series –

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

MB-98 BOARD (9/9)

A

SPDIF

AI-23 BOARD

14 MB-98 BOARD (8/9)

MAMUTE RGBSEL/MICMUTE

NO MARK:DVD/CD PLAY D:DVD PLAY C:CD PLAY P:PAL DVD PLAY N:NTSC DVD PLAY

EUROVY/CLAPSW1

MB-98 BOARD (6/9)

CLAPSW0/DISCEXT WIDE COMPOUT COUT YOUT

SIGNAL PATH

B

Y/G

VIDEO SIGNAL CHROMA

Y

Y/CHROMA

CR/B

JL817

PB

JL818 JL819

C

JL820

JL821

JL822 JL823 JL824 JL825

D JL826 JL827 JL828 JL829 JL858 GND

JL855

C819 0.1u

MB-98 BOARD (7/9)

JL830 C812 0.01u

AUDIO D/A CONVERTER

JL831 JL832

PDN

AOUTL+

CSN

AOUTL-

CCLK

AOUTR+

10 11 12 13 14 15 16

CDTI

AOUTR-

1

LRCK

9

SC1 SO1

2

XRST MB-98 BOARD (6/9)

3

F

SDTI

4

R805 100

BICK

5

ACH78O

6

1.6 1.6 D0/C1.2 1.7 3.3 3.3 3.3

512FS2CH

JL833

CXD9627N-E2

7

IC802

R801 0

MB-98 BOARD (8/9)

IC802

8

E

MB-98 BOARD (3/9)

CB/R

AUDIO SIGNAL

MCLK

DZFL DZFR VDD VSS

JL834

D0/C5 D0/C5 5

JL835 C813 0.22u

C816 10u 16V

B+

CN801

25P

1

Cr/B

2

WIDE

3

Cb/R

4

GND

5

Y/G

6

GND

7

Y

8

GND

9

C

10

DISC/EXT

11

V

12

EUROVY

13

GND

14

RGBSEL

15

ALT-

16

SPDIF

17

ALT+

18

P_GND_SPDIF

19

P_GND_2CH

20

RMUTE

21

ART+

22

LMUTE

23

ART-

24

MAMUTE

25

AU+5V

AI-23 BOARD (2/4) CN203 (SEE PAGE 4-33)

CN102 CN203 CN301 CN401 CN402 CN403 CN405

C-5 C-3 C-2 F-13 H-2 H-3 H-3

D004 D005 D006 D007 D201 D202 D203 D301 D402 D403 D404 D405 D406 D412 D414 D415

A-5 A-5 A-5 A-6 B-2 B-1 B-1 C-12 I-13 I-11 I-11 I-11 I-11 I-11 I-13 I-12

IC101 IC102 IC201 IC202 IC203 IC302 IC303 IC304

E-7 B-6 B-2 B-3 A-2 B-10 B-11 B-12

IC401 IC403 IC404 IC405

I-13 F-11 H-9 G-9

Q104 Q105 Q106 Q201 Q202 Q204 Q205 Q206 Q207 Q208 Q209 Q210 Q302 Q303 Q304 Q305 Q306 Q307 Q308 Q309 Q310 Q311 Q312 Q313 Q401 Q402 Q404 Q405

B-8 B-7 C-7 A-1 B-1 B-2 B-2 A-3 A-4 A-2 A-2 B-1 B-8 B-9 B-8 A-10 A-10 A-10 A-10 A-9 A-9 C-12 C-12 D-12 H-12 I-12 G-13 G-13

B+

2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5

P3.3/ N0/C0

G JL801

IC803

JL802 JL804

AUDIO D/A CONVERTER JL805

B+

JL808

MB-98 BOARD (6/9)

XDACS

C803 0.22u

1 2 3

LRCKO

LOUT1+

4

ACH56O

PDN MCLK

LOUT1-

5

ACH34O

AVSS

BICK

ROUT1+

6

MB-98 BOARD (8/9)

I

DZF

SDTI1

ROUT1-

7

BCKO ACH12O

AVDD

SDTI2

LOUT2+

8

512FS6CH

VREF

SDTI3

LOUT2-

9

MB-98 BOARD (7/9)

5 D0/C5 R809 10 3.3 1.6 1.6 D0/C1.2 0 0 1.7 3.3 3.3 P3.3/N0/C0 4.9

LRCK

ROUT2+

CSN

ROUT2-

CCLK

JL809

CXD9628N-E2

14 13 12 11 10

C829 0.22u

IC803

LOUT3+

CDTI

LOUT3-

DVDD

ROUT3+

DVSS

ROUT3-

15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28

C827 10u 16V

H

JL806

B+

5

C806 0.22u

JL810 R821 0

2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5

JL811 JL857 JL812 JL813 JL814 JL815 JL816

J

CN802

15P

1

ROUT2+

2

LOUT2+

3

ROUT2-

4

LOUT2-

5

LOUT1-

6

ROUT3-

7

LOUT1+

8

ROUT3+

9

P_GND_6CH

10

P_GND_6CH

11

ROUT1+

12

LOUT3+

13

ROUT1-

14

LOUT3-

15

MA_6CH_MUTE

AI-23 BOARD (3/4) CN301 (SEE PAGE 4-35)

Power Block (TOP-244U) (US, Canadian) Power Block (HS13S0U) (US, Canadian, Mexican) Power Block (HS13S0E) (AEP, UK, Argentina) Power Block (HS13S0F) (E, Brazilian) (SWITCHING REGULATOR)

D801 1SS300-TE85L

AI-23 (AUDIO/VIDEO OUT, INTERFACE CONTROL)

05

ER-15 (AEP, UK) (EURO AV)

MS-81 (LOADING) MB-98 (SIGNAL PROCESS, SERVO)

D/A CONVERTER MB-98 (9/9)

4-27

4-28

DVP-NS400D

AI-23 (AUDIO/VIDEO OUT, INTERFACE CONTROL) PRINTED WIRING BOARD – Ref. No.: AI-23 board; 1,000 series –

There are a few cases that the part isn't mounted in this model is printed on this diagram.

4-30

AUDIO/VIDEO OUT, INTERFACE CONTROL 4-29

AI-23

DVP-NS400D AI-23 (VIDEO BUFFER) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM – Ref. No.: AI-23 board; 1,000 series – 1

3

2

4

• See page 4-29 for printed wiring board. 5

6

7

9

8

10

12

11

14

13

15

16

17

AI-23 BOARD (1/4)

A

NO MARK:DVD/CD PLAY

2L 1L AI-23 BOARD (2/4)

B+

2R

B+

AI+5V AI-23 BOARD (4/4)

1R L101 100uH

VMUTE

B

US,CND,E,MX,AR,BR

B+

J101

1 3

NC

NC

Y_IN(NC) DCCNT2 GND Cb_IN

+5V(NC)

4 5

MUTE2 Cr_IN

6

-5V

Y_OUT GND Cb_OUT NC Cr_OUT -5V

C112 0.1u

0

0.5 0

0

L

L

JL116

R131 68

JL117

VIDEO 1

VIDEO

VIDEO 2

LINE OUT

US,CND,E,MX,AR,BR

0.5 -5 -5

J103 JL118

3

4.9

R132 68

4 2

JL119

8

R133 68

6

0.6 9

0.1

S VIDEO OUT

0.1 -5

C111 47u 16V US,CND,E,MX,AR,BR

4.9

R130 68

G

1.2

4.9

-5V

NC(GND)

L

US,CND,E,MX,AR,BR

Y

Q105 UN2111-TX WIDE SWITCH

-5V

2

4.9 0.5

C

E

R122 1k

Y_OUT

AUDIO

G

Q106 2SA1162YG-TE85L BUFFER

NC(DCCNT2)

NC

AUDIO 1

G

CR/B

Y_IN

C_OUT

R

AUDIO 2

Y

0.6 3.3 0.6 -5

CB/R

MUTE1

GND

R

C

D

C_IN

+5V VIDEO_OUT

1

AEP,UK

R

R129 10k

G

1.2

AI-23 BOARD (2/4)

GND

19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36

0.6 Y/G

4

C110 47u 16V

DCCNT1

5 Y

0.6 3.3 0.5 1.2

VIDEO_IN

6

C

NC

7

C

NC

NC

8

V

NC

9

0.5 0.6

18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10

C109 0.047u

2

IC102 LA73050-TLM:36pin:US,CND,E,MX,AR,BR LA73051-TLM:24pin:AEP,UK

5

R134 68

JL120

R135 68

JL121

7 1 3

IC102

10

VIDEO BUFFER

2

WIDE

1

AEP,UK Q104 UN2213-TX WIDE SWITCH

C114 0.1u

R121 10k

C113 47u 16V

F

D004 HZM6.8ZWA1TL

D006 HZM6.8ZWA1TL D005 D007 HZM6.8ZWA1TL HZM6.8ZWA1TL US,CND,E,MX,AR,BR

R126 68

R127 68

JL122

1

J102

JL123

2

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

4 JL124

3 PR

R128 68

PB

Y

US,CND,E,MX,AR,BR

G

AEP,UK

B-

JL101 JL102 JL103 JL104 JL105

B+

H

JL106

JL107

JL109

IC101

JL110

-5V REG

JL111

IC101 L79M05TLL-SONY-TL

JL112

B+

I

JL113

2

JL131 OUT

-10.5

1

IN

GND

JL114

JL132 JL133 JL134

-5

C101 0.01u

B-

3

B-

JL135

JL115

SW-11V

J

CN102 21

V

20

-5V

19

C

18

GND

17

Y

16

GND

15

Y/G

14

GND

13

Cb/R

21P

12

GND

11

Cr/B

10

VMUTE

9

WIDE

8

+5V

7

DISCEXT

6

ER-15 BOARD CN901 :AEP,UK (SEE PAGE 4-41)

+11V

5

ERAUDIOR

4

GND(AU)

3

EUROVY

2

ERAUDIOL

1

RGBSEL

C102 47u 16V

AI-23 BOARD (4/4) D_GND

P_GND RGBSEL ERAUDIOL

AI-23 BOARD (2/4)

EUROVY

SIGNAL PATH

ERAUDIOR

B+

VIDEO SIGNAL

K

CHROMA

Y

Y/CHROMA

AUDIO SIGNAL

AU+11V

AI-23 BOARD (4/4)

DISCEXT

AI-23 BOARD (2/4)

PB 05

• Waveforms 1 IC102 wa : AEP, UK IC102 ed : US, CND, E, MX, AR, BR

2 IC102 ql : AEP, UK IC102 ea : US, CND, E, MX, AR, BR

3 IC102 qj : AEP, UK IC102 wl : US, CND, E, MX, AR, BR

4 IC102 wf : US, CND, E, MX, AR, BR

2.0 Vp-p (H) 2.4 Vp-p (H)

1.8 Vp-p (H)

5 IC102 ws : US, CND, E, MX, AR, BR

1.3 Vp-p (H)

2.0 Vp-p (H)

VIDEO BUFFER AI-23 (1/4)

4-31

4-32

6 IC102 w; : US, CND, E, MX, AR, BR

1.3 Vp-p (H)

DVP-NS400D

AI-23 (AUDIO AMP) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM – Ref. No.: AI-23 board; 1,000 series – 1

3

2

• See page 4-29 for printed wiring board.

4

5

6

7

9

8

10

11

12

14

13

15

AI-23 BOARD (2/4)

A

NO MARK:DVD/CD PLAY D:DVD PLAY C:CD PLAY

B+ RGBSEL EUROVY R201 4700

V

R210 2200

DISCEXT AI-23 BOARD (1/4) Y

B

R229 47k

R202 4700

Y/G

R205 5600

C214 47u 16V

R226 470

R208 2200

CB/R

B+

C209 180p

C205 180p

WIDE

C218 0.01u

R213 5600

C202 560p

C

OPAMP+11V AI-23 BOARD (3/4) OPAMP-11V

D_GND

1.4 5

25P

D

25 24

Cb/R

23

GND

22

Y/G

21

GND

20

Y

19

GND

18

C

17

DISC/EXT

16

MB-98 BOARD (9/9) CN801 (SEE PAGE 4-28)

E

Cr/B WIDE

V

15

EUROVY

14

GND

13

RGBSEL

12

ALT-

11

SPDIF

10

ALT+

9

P_GND_SPDIF

8

P_GND_2CH

7

RMUTE

6

ART+

5

LMUTE

4

ART-

3

MAMUTE

2

AU+5V

1

F

10.6

JL206 JL207 JL208

JL211

-8.6

JL213

R234 4700

2

1

JL216

2L

R204 4700

R242 470

C208 180p

1R R243 470

R207 2200

R206 5600

JL217 JL218

1L R241 470

0

C206 180p R203 4700

US,CND,E,MX,AR,BR R240 470

3

JL214

JL215

R211 5600

R209 2200

C203 560p

C215 47u 16V

C217 0.01u

2R

R227 470 R230 47k

C229 220p

AEP,UK

JL220

10

JL221

Q205 2SB709A-QRS-TX

JL223

R224 10k

JL224 R222 10k

D202 DAP202K-T-146

D0/C10 D5.9/C0

R212 4700

D5.9/ C0

D9.1/C10 R228 10k

Q202,204,205 MUTE DRIVE

Q204 DTC124TKA-T146 R225 47k

AEP,UK

Q202 UN2213-TX

10

B+ MUTE_V

G

D201 DAN202K-T-146 2 3 1

B+ B+ EVER+3.3V

C216 1u 50V

D5.9/ C0

D203 DAP202K-T-146

R231 10k

D0.6/ C3.1

H

Q209 2SB709A-QRS-TX

R232 10k

D0/C10 D5.9/C0

R233 47k

R218 4700 AI-23 BOARD (1/4,3/4)

ERAUDIOR

D9.8/C-8.5

ERAUDIOL C213 1u 50V

JL222

D0.6/ C3.1

AI-23 BOARD (4/4)

AI-23 BOARD (1/4)

C228 220p

JL219

A_MUTE

AI-23 BOARD (3/4)

US,CND,E MX,AR,BR

0 4

JL212

B+

AI-23 BOARD (4/4)

AEP,UK

Q207 2SD1938(F)-T(TX).SO MUTE

AUDIO AMP JL210

B-

R239 100k

R235 4700

D0.8/ C-8.5

IC202

JL209

R238 100k

R237 4700

D0.8/ C-8.5

8 Q206 2SD1938(F)-T(TX).SO MUTE

1.4

C

7

BA4558F-E2

JL205

0 6

IC202

CN203

0

1.4

AI-23 BOARD (4/4)

1.4

CR/B

D9.8/ C-8.5

D9.1/C10 R236 10k Q208-210 MUTE DRIVE Q208 DTC124TKA-T146

P_GND Q210 UN2213-TX

IC201

R217 68

B+

10.6

OUT

1

2

3

SIGNAL PATH 5

C227 R223 1k 47u 16V C204 0.01u

R221 1k

VIDEO SIGNAL CHROMA

C207 0.01u

C210 47u 16V

Y

Y/CHROMA

AUDIO SIGNAL

PB

C226 47u 16V

JL201

COAXIAL

J

2.5 1.8

R215 220

J201

B+ R220 1k

Q201 2SC2712-YG-TE85L BUFFER

GND

5

I

IN

+5V REG IC201 NJM78M05DL1A-TE1

R219 10k

VCC

JL202

5

JL203

B+

2

D IN OPTICAL

1.6 1

DIGITAL OUT

GND

3

JL204

IC203 GP1FA551TZ

K

C225 47u 16V

ET201

IC203 OPTICAL DIGITAL OUTPUT

C212 220p

05

AUDIO AMP 4-33

4-34

AI-23 (2/4)

DVP-NS400D

4

3

5

6

AI-23 BOARD (3/4)

R347 2200

R341 10k

R326 10k

1.2 5

15P JL305

ROUT2-

13

LOUT2-

12

LOUT1-

11

ROUT3-

10

MB-98 BOARD (9/9)

LOUT1+

9

CN802 (SEE PAGE 4-28)

ROUT3+

8

P_GND_6CH

7

P_GND_6CH

6

ROUT1+

5

LOUT3+

4

ROUT1-

3

LOUT3-

2

C

D

MA_6CH_MUTE

7

JL306 JL307 JL308

B+ OPAMP-11V

B-

JL310

4

JL311

-8.6

3

JL312

2

IC302

B+

5.1CH FRONT AUDIO AMP

B-

AU+11V

R327 10k

JL316

0 10.6

JL318

R349 1800

R330 3300

R361 6800

1.6

6

R314 220k

R313 100k

-9.3

-10.5

-9.3 Q313 2SB709A-QRS-TX

R309 470

-10

Q312,313 B- SWITCH

R310 10k

10.6

7

8

C327 47u 16V

C346 0.01u

BA4558F-E2

5

0

-8.6

C339 47u 16V

B+

1.6

C321 390p

E

D301 1SS355TE-17

R356 1800

R342 6800

R311 5600

-9.2 Q312 2SC2712-YG-TE85L

C329 0.001u

R329 3300

1

10.1

C338 47u 16V

R355 10k

IC303

IC303

5.1CH REAR AUDIO AMP

4

3

1.6

-8.6

2

1 C345 0.01u

0

1.6

F

C322 390p

R350 1800

R332 3300

G

B-

R345 1800

C332 390p

R331 3300 R339 6800

C340 47u 16V

R357 6800

C326 0.001u

C330 0.001u

R358 2200

R343 27k

R334 6800

R351 2200

H

R362 27k

C336 150p

R333 6800

C341 47u 16V

B+

2

C323 150p

2

6

C348 0.01u

10.6

7

8

BA4558F-E2

5

0

IC304 5.1CH CENTER/WOOFER AUDIO AMP

IC304

I

2.1

3

2

C313 470p C314 470p C315 470p C316 470p C317 470p

1

0

2.1

4

-8.6

C347 0.01u

B-

C324 0.001u R335 4700 R302 4700

R336 4700

10

Q305-310 MUTE R353 3300

R363 3300

K

R322 10k

C306 1u 50V

D0.8/ C-8.5

R337 10k

D0.8/ C-8.5

R364 3300

D0.8/ C-8.5

R365 3300

R366 3300

D0.8/ C-8.5

D0.8/ C-8.5

AI-23 BOARD (4/4)

D0.6/C3.1

A_MUTE C305 1000u 16V

Q302 UN2213-TX

0 Q303 DTC124TKA-T146

JL340

Q302-304 MUTE DRIVE

PB

JL330

Q310 2SD1938(F)T(TX).SO

JL332

FRONT R

L REAR

Q308 2SD1938(F)-T(TX).SO

0

JL333

Q307 2SD1938(F)-T(TX).SO

Q306 2SD1938(F)-T(TX).SO

Q305 2SD1938(F)-T(TX).SO

C349 0.001u

5.1CH AUDIO AMP 4-35

5.1CH OUTPUT

JL331

0

JL341

0

AI-23 (3/4)

J302

0

L 05

R376 47k R377 47k R378 47k R379 47k R380 47k

Q309 2SD1938(F)-T(TX).SO

AEP,UK R399 0

R324 47k

AUDIO SIGNAL

0

D0/C10

D5.9/C0

R368 3300

D0.8/ C-8.5

D5.9/C0 R308 4700

SIGNAL PATH

AEP,UK

R375 47k

D9.1/C10

MUTE_V

R369 R370 R371 R372 R373 R374 470 470 470 470 470 470

R367 100k

C342 47u 16V

R359 47k

D9.8/C-8.5 Q304 2SB709A-QRS-TX

R323 10k

B+ AI-23 BOARD (2/4)

R340 47k

C333 0.001u

J

R301 4700

AI-23 BOARD (2/4)

D_GND

AI-23 BOARD (4/4)

C309 R312 330u 10k 6.3V

10.9

C325 560p

R328 10k

JL317

Q311 2SB710-RTX B+ SWITCH

B-

R344 2200

P_GND R395 0

C343 0.01u

1

R338 10k

JL315

AI-23 BOARD (4/4) SW-11V

C320 220p

JL313

AI-23 BOARD (2/4)

B-

JL309

JL314

15

OPAMP+11V C344 0.01u

8

1.2

14

6

10.6

C331 220p

LOUT2+

14

B+

0

1.2

15

13

IC302

ROUT2+

12

11

10

C337 47u 16V

BA4558F-E2

B

R360 10k

1.2

C319 220p

CN301

9

C328 560p

R325 10k

NO MARK:DVD/CD PLAY D:DVD PLAY C:CD PLAY

8

R348 2200

A

7

C334 220p

2

C335 390p

1

• See page 4-29 for printed wiring board.

R354 2200

AI-23 (5.1CH AUDIO AMP) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM – Ref. No.: AI-23 board; 1,000 series –

4-36

FB301 0

JL334

R386 0

JL335

WOOFER

CENTER

DVP-NS400D

AI-23 (IF CON) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-29 for printed wiring board. – Ref. No.: AI-23 board; 1,000 series –

1

3

2

4

5

6

The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified.

7

9

8

10

12

11

14

13

15

Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié.

16

17

AI-23 BOARD (4/4)

A

NO MARK:DVD/CD PLAY

13P

C416 0.01u

B+

AI+5V

B+

R474 100

-26.5

1

2

3

4

2

AN5

3

NC

4

NC

5

SEL1

BUSY

PCONT

STATUS

SEL0

JL406

R491 22k

2

XFRRST

3

XIFBUSY

4

XIFCS

5

SIO

6

SOO

7

SC0

8

GND

9

IFRST

10

PCONT

DOWNLOAD (JIG)

2 ND401 1, 2

R426 220

US,CND,E,MX,AR,BR

D415 SLR-342DCT32 (AMBER)

R487 220

-0.2

DOLBY DIGITAL

MULTICHANNEL

5

6

7

8

9

10 11 12 13 14 15 16

DIG9

DIG8

DIG7

DIG6

DIG5

DIG4

DIG3

DIG2

DIG1

41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58

F2

2

P1

1

AEP,UK

SURROUND

FLUORESCENT INDICATOR TUBE

P2

ND401

-29.4

3.4

10P

3.3V_MNT

SEG1

0.01u

3.4 3.4

R449 10k

3.4

3.4 3.4

C420 0.01u

1 IC404 3

1

61 62

8 Vp-p (200 kHz)

2

B+

3 T401 3

JL417 JL418

R402 100k

R424 33

IC405

B-

CURSOR STICK

RESET

K

IC405 S-80830ANUP-EDT-T2

OUT

2

1

L R412 47 C402 47u 6.3V

B+

B+

B+

REMOTE COMMANDER RECEIVER IC401 GP1UD28SYK

R446 100k

C419 220u 25V

3.4

C404 0.01u

C430

390p

R429

5600

R417 100k

B+

-10.5

-10.6 Q401,402 DC/DC CONVERTER

T401 DC/DC CONVERTER C417 4700p

R413 5600

3.4

D405 MA113-(TX)

D406 MA113-(TX)

2

9

3

1

4

6

D403 MA113-(TX)

C422 0.1u

C425 22u 50V R490 22k

D404 MA113-(TX)

-0.2 Q402 2SC5053T100Q

1

C421 0.001u

3

-0.2 -10.4

2

L401 47uH

Q401 2SC5053T100Q

B-

3

D412 MA8062-L-TX

VCC

3

3.4

GND

IC401

VOUT

E+3.3V

R470 10k

JL405

GND

3.4

1

3.4

R472 10k

JL401 GND

SC0

15

VCC

PUSH ENTER

5P

SOO

14

GND

CN402

2.6

13

• Waveforms

C432

J

0

SIO

D402 EB3803X-TP-J300K (BLUE)

SEG2

25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

3.3 S411

XIFCS

3.4 Vp-p (8 MHz)

SEG3

B+ BZ401 (BUZZER)

XIFBUSY

12

P3

N.C

XFRRST

11

P6

N.C

/VMUTE

9 10

MB-98 BOARD (7/9) CN101 (SEE PAGE 4-24)

B+

P7

/AMUTE

3.3V_MNT

SEG5

N.C

+3.3V

8

SEG4

P8

N.C

JOGCCW

GND

7

SEG5

SEG6

VES

BUZ

SEG6

G12

JOGCW

+5V

6

SEG7

DIG12

N.C

GND

5

SEG8

G11

N.C

PDET

JL403

VKK

AN8

JL402

SEG9

G10

SEG1

SEG10

DIG11

/SC

+1.8V

4

SEG11

G9

SEG2

3

CN405

JL451

SEG12

G8

SEG3

SO

JL450

DIG10

SI

SEG13

G7

SEG4

JL449

G6

/CS

SEG14

G5

SEG5

JL448

G4

SEG6

IC404 TMP86CK74F-3CB8

AN9

JL447

SEG15

G3

SEG7

IF CON

N.C

R440 10k R401 4700

SEG8

IC404

IR

SEG16

G2

SELF_CHECK

JL445 JL446

G1

SEG9

C439 0.1u

C423 0.1u

SEG17

F1

/STOP

41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64

SEG10

-29.3 -29.3 -15.6 -18.3 -29.3 -23.8 -26.5 -21 -26.5 -18.3 -26.5 -15.6 -21 -29.3 -23.8 -26.5 -12.9

F1

DIG12

DIG11

SEG18

DIG10

DIG9

DIG8

DIG7

DIG6

DIG5

DIG4

DIG3

VCC

DIG2

DIG1

1 2

SEG11

/RST

VREF

VMUTE

/FRRST

AVSS

3.2 3.3

A_MUTE

SEG12

CURSOR

AI-23 BOARD (1/4)

3.3

SEL2

DISPLAY

3.3 C428 0.01u

SEG13

3.4

R420 100

SEG14

VDD

PLAY

H

TEST

O/C

3 0 3.2 3.3

SEG15

BNRKEY

R450 10k

3.4 3.4

SEG16

XOUT

AN6

R444 100

SEG17

XIN

AN11

R455 10k

VSS

3

1.3 1.5 0 3.4 0 3.3 3.4

R448 10k C427 0.01u

PONCHK

G

AI-23 BOARD (2/4,3/4)

C438 100u 6.3V

4

X401 8MHz

R437 120

I

BNR

MULT

1

S412

5

S410

6

S408

S403

R435 10k

R414 2700

7

F

R431 3900

8

R428 8200

AI-23 BOARD (1/4-3/4)

SEG1

DIG12

1.8 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65

DISPLAY

D_GND

5

3.3

9

DVD MENU

24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10

RETURN

M_GND

P4

2.8 2.2

SEG7

TITLE

+11V

2

SEG2

D414 SLR-342DCT32 (AMBER)

JL453

P9

S406

VIN

S409

S407

3.4 -26.9 -26.9 -26.9 -26.9 -26.9 -26.9 -26.9 -26.9 -26.9 -26.9 -26.9 -27

BNR S405 S402

E

B+

SEG18

DIG9

DIG11

DIG10

DIG8

DIG7

DIG6

DIG5

R486 220

DIG4

R434 10k R430 2700

DIG3

R427 3900

DIG2

R422 8200

JL454

IC403 AN80P18RSPE1 DIG1

R423 22k

B+

+1.8V REG

B+

BNR

JL436 JL457

IC403

SURROUND C437 0.01u

AI-23 BOARD (1/4,3/4)

15P

1

P5

S404

CN403

JL455

P10

S401

JL456

FB401

SEG4

R421 2700

B+

R481 100 R482 100 R483 100 R484 100 R485 100

R433 10k

AI-23 BOARD (1/4)

AU+11V

B+

R425 100

SEG3

B+

PS402 1.0A

B+

D

B+

F2

B+

JL413

SEG8

13

C401 0.01u

Q405 UN2111-TX SWITCH

JL412

P11

EVER+11V

JL411

P12

12

SEG9

11

+5V

SEG10

:US,CND (SEE PAGE 4-58)

10

C429 100u 16V

C414 0.01u

P13

C

D_GND EVER+3.3V

3.2

R416 1800

C412 0.01u

C411 100u 16V

SEG11

TOP-244U BOARD CN920

R418 10k

B+ JL410

C409 0.01u

P14

9

AI-23 BOARD (1/4,3/4)

B+

3.4

P15

D_GND

CN201 :US,CND,MX (SEE PAGE 4-54)

C407 0.01u R415 1800

SEG12

8

-9.8

B+

JL416

SEG13

SW+3.3V

JL415

P16

7

SEG14

SW+11V

HS13S0U BOARD

JL414

P17

6

SEG15

5

P18

M_GND SW+11V

SW-11V

B-

SEG16

CN201 :E,BR (SEE PAGE 4-50)

HS13S0F BOARD

PS401 1.0A

AI-23 BOARD (2/4)

EVER+3.3V

Q404 2SD1766-T100-QR B- SWITCH

SEG17

4

-10.5

SEG18

M_GND

B+

-10.6

B-

JL409

VOUT

3

N.C

EVER-11V

JL408

GND

2

B-

1

(SEE PAGE 4-46)

B

B+

JL407 P-DET P-CONT

CN201 :AEP,UK,AR

VC

CN401 HS13S0E BOARD

C431 0.1u

20 Vp-p (409 kHz)

7

M C436 390p

5

8

IF CON

05

4-37

4-38

AI-23 (4/4)

DVP-NS400D ER-15 (EURO AV) PRINTED WIRING BOARD – Ref. No.: ER-15 board; 1,000 series –

There are a few cases that the part isn't mounted in this model is printed on this diagram.

– AEP, UK –

ER-15 BOARD CN901

C-4

D901 D902 D903 D904 D905 D907 D917 D918 D919 D920 D922 D924 D926 D927 D929 D930

B-1 A-2 A-3 B-1 B-5 B-1 A-1 A-2 A-2 A-3 A-6 A-6 A-4 A-6 A-1 A-2

IC901

B-2

Q901 Q902 Q903 Q906 Q907 Q908 Q909 Q910 Q912 Q913 Q914 Q915

C-1 C-1 B-1 B-1 A-1 A-1 B-1 B-1 B-2 A-3 A-1 A-5

Power Block (TOP-244U) (US, Canadian) Power Block (HS13S0U) (US, Canadian, Mexican) Power Block (HS13S0E) (AEP, UK, Argentina) Power Block (HS13S0F) (E, Brazilian) (SWITCHING REGULATOR)

AI-23 (AUDIO/VIDEO OUT, INTERFACE CONTROL)

ER-15 (AEP, UK) (EURO AV)

MS-81 (LOADING)

EURO AV ER-15

4-39

4-40

MB-98 (SIGNAL PROCESS, SERVO)

DVP-NS400D ER-15 (EURO AV) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM – Ref. No.: ER-15 board; 1,000 series – – AEP, UK – 1

2

4

3

5

6

7

8

9

11

10

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

ER-15 BOARD A

NO MARK:DVD/CD PLAY C901 47u 16V

JL933

6

Y/G

7

GND

8

CN102

Cb/R

9

:AEP,UK (SEE PAGE 4-32)

GND

10

Cr/B

11

VMUTE

12

WIDE

13

+5V

14

DISCEXT

15

AI-23 BOARD (1/4)

C

+11V

16

ERAUDIOR

17

GND(AU)

18

EUROVY

19

ERAUDIOL

20

RGBSEL

21

JL937

12

JL938

10

8

7

RY901

L905 100uH

LINE2

B+ D902 1SS355TE-17

JL939

1

3

5

6 JL903

IC901

JL941

C913 0.22u

JL942 JL943

IC901

C905 47u 16V

JL944 JL945

1.1

C903 47u 16V

JL946

0.6

DCCNT1 GND

0.6 0.6

D

R905

47k

0.6 3.3 0 0 R906 47k

E

NC

C_IN NC R_IN NC

G_OUT

G_IN

MUTE2

NC

B_OUT

JL950

0.6

+5V

DCCNT2

JL948 JL949

LA73052-TLM

R/C_OUT MUTE1 GND NC SW1

B_IN

NC

SW2

V/Y_OUT

V_IN

MUTE3

NC

NC

Y_IN

NC

NC

-5V

DCCNT3

NC

GND

-5V

4.7

R930 4700 C927 0.01u

C907 47u 16V

0.6 3.3

JL904 JL905

1

GND

JL947

B+

FB901

VIDEO BUFFER, SELECT SWITCH

19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36

5

1

Y GND

FB903

C902 47u 16V

JL936

2

4

JL935

3

GND

B-

JL934

4

3

5

2

C

6

-5V

7

1

8

B

V

9

21P

18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10

CN901

R927 68

0.1

JL906

FB904

0.8

D926 UDZ-TE-17-6.2B

JL901

Q912 2SD601A-QRS-TX RELAY DRIVE

C951 100p 12

R928 68

10

8

7

JL909

JL910 D903 1SS355TE-17

R918 68

1

3

5

FB905

6

JL911 JL912

R931 4700

4

0.1

JL913 JL914

C940 100p

JL915

0.8

JL916

FB913

Q913 2SD601A-QRS-TX RELAY DRIVE

-5 C914 0.22u

21P

21

GND(E)

20

V_IN

19

V_OUT

18

GND(E)

17

GND(E)

16

BLANKING_IN

15

R_IN

14

GND(E)

13

GND(E)

12

N.C.

11

G_IN

10

AVLINKI(NC)

9

GND(E)

8

FUNCTION_SW_IN

7

B_IN

6

A(L)IN

5

GND(E)

4

GND(A)

3

A(L)OUT

2

A(R)IN

1

A(R)OUT

FB911

C938 100p

3 -5

R938 68

RY902

R929 68

-0.1 3.3

JL908

D927 UDZ-TE-17-13B

2 3.3 0.6 3.5 0.6

JL907

C950 100p

CNJ901

D907 DAP202K-T-146 R950 22k

F 12

10

8

7

1

3

5

6

RY903

B+

B+

D904 1SS355TE-17

B+

Q907 UN2111-TX

G 4.9 Q903 UN2111-TX

4.9 Q902 2SD601AQRS-TX

R909 330

10.9 3.3

R910 330

0

D901 1SS355TE-17

R911 330

Q906 UN2213-TX

0

0

R916 2200 R914 2200

3.3

R908 220k

0.1

0.8

D917 HZM6.8ZWA1TL

FB907

Q914 2SD601A-QRS-TX RELAY DRIVE

R917 2200

JL919 JL920

3.3

JL921 JL922

10.9 0

Q908 UN2211-TX

Q909 UN2213-TX LINE SELECT CONTROL

12

10

8

D929 UDZ-TE-17-6.2B

7

1

D905 1SS355TE-17

3

5

C963 100p

JL924 R939 68 JL925

D919 HZM6.8ZWA1TL

FB909

6

JL923

C962 100p

D930 UDZ-TE-17-13B

Q901 UN2213-TX

D920 HZM6.8ZWA1TL

FB910

JL926

R924 470

SIGNAL PATH

JL927 R933 4700

VIDEO SIGNAL

J

JL917 JL918

RY904

I

LINE1(RGB)-TV

D918 HZM6.8ZWA1TL

FB908

R923 470 R915 1k

Q901-903 BLANKING SIGNAL GENERATOR

R932 4700

Q910 UN2111-TX LINE SELECT CONTROL

4.9

R912 330

0

4.9

Q906-908 FUNCTION SIGNAL GENERATOR

0.1

R907 47k

H

10.9

CHROMA

Y

Y/CHROMA

AUDIO SIGNAL

0.8

0.1

JL928

Q915 2SD601A-QRS-TX RELAY DRIVE

JL902

C943 100p

FB916

JL929

D922 HZM6.8ZWA1TL

JL930 JL931

PB

C945 100p

05

FB918

JL932

D924 HZM6.8ZWA1TL

CNJ902

21P

21

GND(E)

20

V_IN

19

V/Y_OUT

18

GND(E)

17

GND(E)

16

BLANKING_OUT

15

R/C_OUT

14

GND(E)

13

GND(E)

12

N.C.

11

G_OUT

10

AVLINKO(NC)

9

GND(E)

8

FUNCTION_SW_OUT

7

B_OUT

6

A(L)IN

5

GND(E)

4

GND(A)

3

A(L)OUT

2

A(R)IN

1

A(R)OUT

• Waveforms 1 IC901 ef (LINE : RGB mode)

1.4 Vp-p (H)

1 IC901 ef (LINE : S VIDEO mode) 2 IC901 wl (LINE : RGB mode)

1.7 Vp-p (H)

1.4 Vp-p (H)

3 IC901 wj (LINE : RGB mode)

1.4 Vp-p (H)

4 IC901 wg

2.4 Vp-p (H)

4 IC901 wg (LINE : S VIDEO mode)

2.0 Vp-p (H)

EURO AV 4-41

4-42

ER-15

DVP-NS400D

HS13S0E (SWITCHING REGULATOR) PRINTED WIRINNG BOARD – Ref. No.: HS13S0E board; 3,000 series –

There are a few cases that the part isn't mounted in this model is printed on this diagram.

– AEP, UK, AR –

HS13S0E BOARD HS13S0E BOARD CN101 CN201

B-3 A-1

D101 D102 D104 D105 D211 D212 D221 D311 D413 D511 D611 D621

A-3 A-3 A-2 A-2 B-2 A-1 A-2 A-2 A-2 A-2 A-2 B-1

IC301 IC411

B-2 A-1

Q101 Q102 Q211 Q311 Q411 Q611 Q621 Q622 Q712

A-3 A-2 B-1 A-1 A-2 A-1 B-1 B-1 A-1

A

B K Power Block (TOP-244U) (US, Canadian) Power Block (HS13S0U) (US, Canadian, Mexican) Power Block (HS13S0E) (AEP, UK, Argentina) Power Block (HS13S0F) (E, Brazilian) (SWITCHING REGULATOR)

A

A

(ON/STANDBY)

SW101 POWER 1-468-585-

AI-23 (AUDIO/VIDEO OUT, INTERFACE CONTROL)

05

1

2

3

ER-15 (AEP, UK) (EURO AV)

MS-81 (LOADING) MB-98 (SIGNAL PROCESS, SERVO)

SWITCHING REGULATOR HS13S0E

4-43

4-44

11

DVP-NS400D

HS13S0E (SWITCHING REGULATOR) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM – Ref. No.: HS13S0E board; 3,000 series –

The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified.

– AEP, UK, AR –

1

2

3

4

HS13S0E BOARD

T101

NO MARK: E-E MODE

D211 D2S6M

5

6

7

8

Q211 2SJ525 B+ SWITCH 11 11

L211 39uH

B+

Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié.

B+

S C211 150uF 35V

A

C213 47uF 35V

+

R212 10k

+

1

B+

R105 1M 1/2W

B+ L221 100uH

D221 D1NS6 C221 100uF 35V

+ C110 47uF 400V

D311 D1NS4

C223 47uF 35V

+

L150 120

303.5 Q101 2SK2700 SWITCH

C116 0.01uF 50V

D611 D1NS4

R116 220 1/2W

R314 10k

P311 1A 60V

L611 39uH

B+

Q311 2SD1768S B+ SWITCH

1.5 C150 47pF 2kV

Q102 2SC3377 SWITCH 0

C117 0.0033uF 50V

R115 18k

B+

+

B+ 4.2 R614

P611 1A 60V

B+

10k

R311 1k

B+ B+

3.4 Q611 2SD1768S B+ SWITCH

3.5

D104 RD3.3ES-B2

D413 D1N60

R113 10k

R621 220

B+

5.2

C311 + 330uF 35V

R110 3k

R411 470

+ C611 330uF 35V

D102 RD24FB2

B–

C314 22uF 50V

5.1

1.5 S

CN201 13P

R213 1k

+

5.9

L311 39uH

B+

R613 270 1/2W

R313 330

5.2

B

R211 1.5k

C613 47uF 35V

C115 0.01uF 50V

+

C313 47uF 35V

3.4 Q411 2SD1768S +3.3V REG 4

+

IC411 HA17431VP

C

B+

3.6 Q621 2SC1740S

R623 10k

0 R412 680

C414 0.01uF 50V

4

B+

C413 47uF 35V

+

0.6

Q622 DTC143ES

0

P-DET

2

P-CONT

3

EVER–11V

4

M_GND

5

M_GND

6

SW+11V

7

SW+11V

8

SW+3.3V

9

D_GND

10

D_GND

11

EVER+3.3V

12

+5V

13

EVER+11V

AI-23 BOARD(4/4) (SEE PAGE 4-37)

R711 1.8k 2.6

3.4

R622 120 D621 SPR-325MVW

2.5 R413 1.8k Q621, 622 LED DRIVE

IC411

B+

1

Q712 DTC143ES POWER C711 + CONTROL 47uF 35V

D621 (ON/STANDBY)

SHUNT REG D105 1SS270A

C511 100uF 35V CN101 2P

D

+

R114 270

SW101 F101 2A 250V

+

C513 47uF 35V

D212 RD33FB2

D511 D2L20U

POWER

L511 100uH

B–

B–

1 C101 0.1uF 250V

AC IN

R101 2.2M 1/2W

C102 0.1uF 250V

PC101 PS2561 D101 S1WBA60

2 L101 18mH

L102 18mH

5.1

R301 68

13 R303 1k 0

4.1

R531 1k

R304 680 R307 680

IC301 C103 330pF 250V

C104 330pF 250V

E

SHUNT REG C107 330pF 250V

IC301 HA17431VP

4.1

+ C301 1uF 50V

R533 47k

2.5 R306 1.5k

B+

05

FG201

FG101

SWITCHING REGULATOR 4-45

4-46

HS13S0E

DVP-NS400D

HS13S0F (SWITCHING REGULATOR) PRINTED WIRINNG BOARD – Ref. No.: HS13S0F board; 4,000 series –

There are a few cases that the part isn't mounted in this model is printed on this diagram.

– E, BR –

HS13S0F BOARD HS13S0F BOARD CN101 CN201

B-3 A-1

D101 D102 D104 D105 D131 D132 D135 D211 D212 D221 D311 D411 D511 D611 D615

A-3 A-2 A-2 B-2 B-2 B-2 A-2 B-1 B-1 A-2 A-1 B-1 A-1 A-1 B-1

IC131 IC401 IC701

B-2 B-1 B-1

Q101 Q102 Q103 Q131 Q311 Q621 Q622 Q712

A-2 A-2 A-2 B-3 A-1 B-1 B-1 B-1

A

B Power Block (TOP-244U) (US, Canadian) Power Block (HS13S0U) (US, Canadian, Mexican) Power Block (HS13S0E) (AEP, UK, Argentina) Power Block (HS13S0F) (E, Brazilian) (SWITCHING REGULATOR)

D615 ON/ STANDBY

SW101 POWER 1-468-586-

AI-23 (AUDIO/VIDEO OUT, INTERFACE CONTROL)

05

1

2

3

ER-15 (AEP, UK) (EURO AV)

MS-81 (LOADING) MB-98 (SIGNAL PROCESS, SERVO)

SWITCHING REGULATOR HS13S0F

4-47

4-48

11

DVP-NS400D

HS13S0F (SWITCHING REGULATOR) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM – Ref. No.: HS13S0F board; 4,000 series –

The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified.

– E, BR –

1

2

3

4

5

HS13S0F BOARD

D211 D2S6M T101

C112 0.047uF 630V

A C110 + 150uF 400V

C113 47pF R104 2kV 680k 1/2W

6

D221 D1NS6

R152 0.22

B+

L221 100uH

B+ C211 + 150uF 35V

Q103 2SK2750 SWITCH

B+

+ C223 47uF 35V

C221 + 100uF 35V

C213 + 47uF 35V

R313 330

D311 D1NS4

L311 100uH

B+

R314 10k

P311 1A 60V Q311 2SD1768S B+ SWITCH

C131 + 33uF 50V

R131 22k

C117 0.0033uF 50V

B

C116 R116 0.01uF 220 50V 2W

S

R115 27k

R211 1.5k

CN201 13P

L150 35

S

Q101 2SK2750 SWITCH

7

L211 39uH

B+

Q131 2SD1768S SWITCH

L611 100uH

Q102 2SC3377 SWITCH

R134 2.2k

R113 680

R110 1.8k

B+

+

B+

+

C314 22uF 50V

R711 1.8k

B+ B+

C313 47uF 35V

B+

B+

B+ B+

R114 2.2k

C311 + 150uF 35V

D105 1SS270A

C115 0.033uF 50V

R311 1k

B–

P611 1A 60V

D104 R112 MTZJ-3.0B 22K

R132 10k

D102 RD24FB2

D611 D1NS4

R701 82

C611 + 150uF 35V

D511 D2L20U

C613 + 47uF 35V

D212 RD33FB2

+ B–

L511 100uH

+

1

P-DET

2

P-CONT

3

EVER–11V

4

M_GND

5

M_GND

6

SW+11V

7

SW+11V

8

SW+3.3V

9

D_GND

10

D_GND

11

EVER+3.3V

12

+5V

13

EVER+11V

B+

C711 47uF + 35V C511 100uF 35V

Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié.

AI-23 BOARD (4/4) (SEE PAGE 4-37)

C512 100uF 35V B–

PC103 PS2561

C

CN101 2P

F101 1.6A 250V

L101 18mH

SW101 POWER

L102 18mH

R704 470 D101 S1WBA60

1 C101 0.1uF 250V

AC IN

R413 470

Q712 DTC143ES POWER CONTROL

PC101 PS2561

R101 2.2M 1/2W

C104 330pF 250V

R632 10k

R621 1k

R705 120 Q621 2SC1740S

C701 + 4.7uF 50V

C703 + 1uF 50V

2

R631 220

R703 1k

IC701 AN1431T

C103 330pF 250V

D615 SPR-325MVW

R706 1.5k

IC701

Q622 DTC143ES

R633 120

R623 47k

SHUNT REG

T131

C107 330pF 250V

D

R135 47k 1W

C135 3300pF 1kV

C401 + 150uF 35V

IC131 DC CONTROL

S

FG101

S

S

D615 (ON/STANDBY)

C413 + 47uF 35V

R401 68

D

S

D131 1SS270A PB D132 MTZJ-22B

R137 47k

Q621, 622 LED DRIVE

L411 39uH

B+

D135 EG01C

IC131 MIP0254SPSCF BP

D411 D1INS4

C132 + 1uF 50V

C137 0.1uF 50V

E PC131 PS2561

IC401 SHUNT REG

IC401 HA17L431P

R402 1k

R403 1.5k

FG201

C402 + 0.47uF 50V R405 820

B+

05

SWITCHING REGULATOR 4-49

4-50

HS13S0F

DVP-NS400D

HS13S0U (SWITCHING REGULATOR) PRINTED WIRINNG BOARD – Ref. No.: HS13S0U board; 5,000 series –

There are a few cases that the part isn't mounted in this model is printed on this diagram.

– US, CND, MX –

HS13S0U BOARD HS13S0U BOARD CN101 CN201

B-3 A-1

D101 D104 D105 D211 D212 D221 D311 D413 D511 D611 D621

A-3 A-2 A-2 B-2 A-1 A-2 A-2 A-2 A-2 A-2 B-1

IC301 IC411

B-2 A-1

Q101 Q102 Q211 Q311 Q411 Q611 Q621 Q622 Q712

A-3 A-2 B-1 A-1 A-2 A-1 B-1 B-1 A-1

A

B Power Block (TOP-244U) (US, Canadian) Power Block (HS13S0U) (US, Canadian, Mexican) Power Block (HS13S0E) (AEP, UK, Argentina) Power Block (HS13S0F) (E, Brazilian) (SWITCHING REGULATOR)

K A

A

(ON/STANDBY)

SW101 POWER 1-468-583-

AI-23 (AUDIO/VIDEO OUT, INTERFACE CONTROL)

05

1

2

3

ER-15 (AEP, UK) (EURO AV)

MS-81 (LOADING) MB-98 (SIGNAL PROCESS, SERVO)

SWITCHING REGULATOR HS13S0U

4-51

4-52

11

DVP-NS400D

HS13S0U (SWITCHING REGULATOR) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM – Ref. No.: HS13S0U board; 5,000 series –

The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified.

– US, CND, MX –

1

2

3

4

HS13S0U BOARD

T101

NO MARK: E-E MODE

D211 D2S4M

5

6

7

8

Q211 2SJ525 B+ SWITCH 11 11

L211 39uH

B+

Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié.

B+

S C211 150uF 35V

A

C213 47uF 35V

+

1

B+ L221 100uH

D221 D1NS4 C221 100uF 35V

R106 270k 1/2W D311 D1NS4

C223 47uF 35V

+

L150 120/160

168.7 Q101 2SK2750 SWITCH

D611 D1NS4

C116 0.01uF 50V

R116 220

R314 10k

P311 1A 60V

L611 39uH

B+

5.1 Q311 2SD1768S B+ SWITCH

2.4 C150 470pF 1kV

Q102 2SC3377 SWITCH 0.2

R115 33k

C117 0.0033uF 50V

B–

C314 22uF 50V

B+

+

B+ 4.2 R614

P611 1A 60V

B+

10k

R311 1k

B+ B+

3.4 Q611 2SD1768S B+ SWITCH

3.5 R621 220

2.4 S

CN201 13P

R213 1k

+

5.9

L311 39uH

B+

R613 270 1/2W

R313 330

5.2

B

R211 1.5k

B+

R105 270k 1/2W

+ C110 120uF 200V

R212 10k

+

D104 HZS2C3-TE

D413 D1N60

R113 680 C311 + 330uF 35V

R110 1k

B+

5.2

R411 470

+ C611 330uF 35V

C613 47uF 35V

C115 0.033uF 50V

+

C313 47uF 35V

3.4 Q411 2SD1768S +3.3V REG 4

+

IC411 AN1431T

C

B+

3.6 Q621 2SC1740S

R623 10k

0 R412 680

C414 0.01uF 50V

4

B+

C413 47uF 35V

+

0.7

Q622 DTC143ES

0

P-DET

2

P-CONT

3

EVER–11V

4

M_GND

5

M_GND

6

SW+11V

7

SW+11V

8

SW+3.3V

9

D_GND

10

D_GND

11

EVER+3.3V

12

+5V

13

EVER+11V

AI-23 BOARD(4/4) (SEE PAGE 4-37)

R711 1.8k 2.6

3.4

R622 120 D621 SPR-325MVW

2.5 R413 1.8k Q621, 622 LED DRIVE

IC411

B+

1

Q712 DTC143ES POWER C711 + CONTROL 47uF 35V

D621 (ON/STANDBY)

SHUNT REG D105 1SS270A

C511 100uF 35V CN101 2P

D

+

R114 270

SW101 F101 2A 125V

+

C513 47uF 35V

D212 RD33FB2

D511 D1NS4

POWER

L511 100uH

B–

B–

1 C101 0.1uF 250V

AC IN

PC101 PS2501 D101 S1WBA60

2 L101 18mH

5.1

8.2 R303 1k 0.2

4.1

IC301 SHUNT REG C107 2200pF 250V

E

R301 68

IC301 AN1431T

4.1

R531 1k

R304 680 + C301 2.2uF 50V

R533 47k

2.5 R306 1.5k

B+

FG201

05

SWITCHING REGULATOR 4-53

4-54

HS13S0U

DVP-NS400D

TOP-244U (SWITCHING REGULATOR) PRINTED WIRINNG BOARD – Ref. No.: TOP-244U board; 6,000 series –

There are a few cases that the part isn't mounted in this model is printed on this diagram.

– US, CND –

TOP-244U BOARD TOP-244U BOARD

Q922 Q923 Q924 Q925 Q927 Q928 Q929 Q930

A-2 A-2 A-1 A-1 A-1 B-1 B-1 B-2

D904

Q923

Q922 B

E

D903 D902

D920

A

B

D913

D921

D901 D910

E

E B

B

Q927

Q925

5

D922

E

IC910

A-2 B-1

E

3 1

D911

IC910 IC920

B

D926

A-3 A-3 A-3 A-3 A-2 A-2 A-2 A-2 A-2 A-1 B-1 A-1 A-1 A-1 B-1 B-1 B-1 B-1 B-1 A-1

D927

D901 D902 D903 D904 D910 D911 D913 D920 D921 D922 D923 D925 D926 D927 D928 D929 D930 D931 D932 D933

Q924

B-3 A-1

D925

CN900 CN920

D932 D923

D933

K

D928

N

IC920

R

B A D929

B

(ON/STANDBY)

D930

Q928

Power Block (TOP-244U) (US, Canadian) Power Block (HS13S0U) (US, Canadian, Mexican) Power Block (HS13S0E) (AEP, UK, Argentina) Power Block (HS13S0F) (E, Brazilian) (SWITCHING REGULATOR)

E B

E

Q929 AI-23 (AUDIO/VIDEO OUT, INTERFACE CONTROL)

05

L CN900

1

D931

Q930 B

POWER

E

1-468-584-

2

3

ER-15 (AEP, UK) (EURO AV)

MS-81 (LOADING) MB-98 (SIGNAL PROCESS, SERVO)

SWITCHING REGULATOR TOP-244U

4-55

4-56

11

DVP-NS400D

TOP-244U (SWITCHING REGULATOR) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM – Ref. No.: TOP-244U board; 6,000 series –

The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified.

– US, CND –

1

2

3

TOP-244U BOARD

4 L921 11.3uH

D920 UF202G

NO MARK: E-E MODE

11.1

5

Q923 2SB733-4 B+ SWITCH

A

11.1

3.6 R933 6.8k

10.3 + C921 470u 25V

2.1

+ C940 470u 25V

Q922 DTC114ESA-TP B+ SWITCH

T910

+ C925 100u 25V

D921 UF4003

C916 0.01u 400V

D910 UF4007

D922 UF5402G

+ C936 47u 25V

R948 1k L923 11.3uH

5.1

PS923 1.25A

+ C910 150u 200V

3.5

L

D

+ C931 100u 25V

C

X

C

C912 0.1u 50V

S

R911 6.8 13.6 + C913 47u 25V

0

C914 10u 50V

4.8

R938 150

B–

5.8

0.1

3.7 K A REF

3 2 1

SHUNT REG

C917 4700P

C920 0.1u 50V

+

C929 100u + 25V

B+ B+ C943 0.1u 50V

D928 IN4001

B+

R925 47

C922 4700p

R947 220

3.2

R923 11k

E

D901 IN4007 R900 1M 1/2W

C902 330p 250V

2 C903 330p 250V

05

EVER–11V

4

M_GND

5

M_GND

6

SW+11V

7

SW+11V

8

SW+3.3V

9

D_GND

10

D_GND

11

EVER+3.3V

12

+5V

13

EVER+11V

2.1 2.8

Q929 2SC1740SLN-TP-RS LED DRIVE 2.1

2.8

R927 15k

AI-23 BOARD(4/4) (SEE PAGE 4-37)

Q928 DTA114GSTP LED DRIVE

– 0.6 D929 SPR-325MVW (ON/STANDBY)

B+

1

LF900 23mH

P-CONT

3

2.1

D930 IN4001

R949 22k

Q930 DTC114ESA-TP POWER CONTROL

SW911 POWER

F900 2A/125V

P-DET

2

D931 IN4001

R926 1k

ET901

C900 0.1u 250V

C947 0.1u 50V

C954 0.1u 50V

R937

0.1

2.5

1

B+ C941 470u 25V

R924 11.5k

R928 6.8k

IC920

AC IN

C944 0.1u 50V

D925 MTZJ-4.3A

R921 1k

3.7

PC911 PC123FY2

CN101 2P

B–

B+

PC910 PC123FY2

5.8

D

CN920 13P

B+

4.2

B+ +

IC920 TL431A

R917 22k

B+ 3.4

Q927 2SC4040-TL2-R B+ SWITCH

R936 6.8k L924 11.3uH

D923 UF4003

R922 100

B+

D932 D933 IN4001 IN4001 3.5

C930 + 10u 50V

5.8

F

PS922 1A

4.1

DC CONTROL IC910 TOP-244Y

165.5

B+

3.5

D911 IN4001

IC910

+ C934 10u 50V

C926 0.1u 50V

5

Q924 2SC4040-TL2-R B+ SWITCH D926 D927 IN4001 IN4001

R935 33

R940 220

R934 150 5.8

Q925 2SC4040-TL2-R B+ SWITCH

B

R932 100k

C924 + 470u 25V

L922 11.3uH

C927 1000u + 16V

C911 0.01u 400V

D913 P6KE200A

7

B+

R931 390 1W

R930 10k

6

Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié.

C901 2200p 250V

D902 IN4007 D903 IN4007 D904 IN4007

ET902

SWITCHING REGULATOR 4-57

4-58 E

TOP-244U

Pin name

HA17-HA21

HA22 WP

TRM–/XKRCS AVCC

AVRH AVSS

AN0 AN1

AN2 AN3

INT0 INT1

INT2 INT3

INT4 INT5

INT6 INT7

VCC SI0

SO0 SC0

SI1 SO1

SC1 SI2

SO2 DSENS

VSS XRST

XARPRST RGBSEL/MICMUTE

SDA

Pin No.

1-5

6 7

8 9

10 11

12 13

14 15

16 17

18 19

20 21

22 23

5-1

24 25

26 27

28 29

30 31

32 33

34 35

36 37

38

I/O

O O

O

O -

O I

I O

O O

I

I -

I I

I -

I I

I I

I I

-

-

O

O

I/O

I2C bus seria data input/output

Reset signal output for ARP RGB signal select signal output/Mic mute signal output

Ground System reset signal output

Serial bus 2 (for data output) Not used

Serial clock output Serial bus 2 (for data input)

Serial bus 1 (for data input) Serial bus 1 (for data output)

Serial data output to IF CON Serial clock output to IF CON

Power supply Serial data input from IF CON

Input of interrupt from audio DSP Not used

Input of interrupt from IF CON Input of interrupt from audio DSP

Input of interrupt from servo DSP Not used

Input of interrupt from AV DEC Input of interrupt from ARP

Set of mode 2 Set of mode 3

Set of mode 0 Set of mode 1

Reference power supply (+3.3 V) Ground

Not used Power supply

Not used Write control signal output to EEPROM

Address bus A17-A21

Function

5-1. SYSTEM CONTROL PIN FUNCTION (MB-98 BOARD IC103)

DISCEXT/CLPSW0 MD0 MD1 MD2 DREQ0 DACK0 XDRVMUTE DREQ1 DACK1 XIFCS VSS X1 X0 VCC CKSW1 OCSW1 CS0X CS1X CS2X CS3X CS4X CS5X C CS6X CS7X XWAIT BGRNTX BRQ XRD

44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70

TRM+/XKRRST EUROV/Y/CLAPSW1

SCL

Pin name

42 43

40 41

39

Pin No.

O

-

I

-

O O

O O

O -

I I

I -

O

O O

O I

I O

I I

O I

O

O

I/O

Read enable signal output

Test terminal (fixed at “H”) Test terminal

Not used Wait signal input

Capacitor (0.1uF) connect between ground Not used

Chip select signal output (for ARP) Chip select signal output (for servo DSP)

Chip select signal output (for AV DEC) Chip select signal output (for AV DEC)

External ROM chip select signal output Not used

Chuck sensor input Tray sensor input

Clock input (16.5 MHz) Power supply

Ground Clock output (16.5 MHz)

Output of DMA-ACK 1 to AV DEC Chip select signal to IF CON

Drive mute signal output Input of DMA-REQ 1 from AV DEC

Input of DMA-REQ 0 from AV DEC Output of DMA-ACK 0 to AV DEC

Input of mode select 1 (fixed at “ L”) Input of mode select 2 (fixed at “ L”)

Not used EURO V/Y select signal output/Mute signal output to video buffer Line input select signal output (DISC: “H”, EXT: “ L”) Input of mode select 0 (fixed at “ H”)

I2C bus serial clock output

Function

SECTION 5 IC PIN FUNCTION DESCRIPTION DVP-NS400D

5-2 E

Pin name

XWRH

XWRL NMIX

HSTX VSS

XFRRST CPUCK

OCSW2 XDACS

VESCS/X39CS 48/44.1K

WIDE MAMUTE

XLDON HD0-HD7

HD8-HD15 VSS

HA0-HA7 VCC

HA8-HA15 VSS

HA16

Pin No.

71

72 73

74 75

76 77

78 79

80 81

82 83

84 85-92

93-100 101

102-109 110

111-118 119

120

O

O -

O -

I/O -

O I/O

O O

O O

O

I O

-

-

O

I/O

Function

Address bus A16

Address bus A08-A15 Ground

Address bus A00-A07 Power supply

Data bus D8-D15 (16 bit) , D0-D7 (8 bit) Ground

LD control signal output Data bus D0-D7 (16 bit only)

WIDE select signal output Audio mute signal output

Chip select signal output to DSP PLL FS control signal output

Not used Chip select signal output to DAC (2ch, 6ch)

Reset signal input from IF CON CPU clock signal output

Not used (fixed at “H”) Ground

Not used Not used (fixed at “H”)

High byte write enable signal output (16 bit and 8 bit)

DVP-NS400D SECTION 6 TEST MODE 6-1.

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

6-3.

The Test Mode allows you to make diagnosis and adjustment easily using the remote commander and monitor TV. The instructions, diagnostic results, etc. are given on the on-screen display (OSD).

6-2.

The same contents as board detail check by serial interface can be checked from the remote commander. On the Test Mode Menu screen, press [0] key on the remote commander, and the following check menu will be displayed.

STARTING TEST MODE

Press the [TITLE], [CLEAR], [POWER] keys on the remote commander in this order with the power of main unit in OFF status, and the Test Mode starts, then “DIAG START” will be displayed on the fluorescent display tube and the menu shown below will be displayed on the TV screen. At the bottom of menu screen, the model name and revision number are displayed. Last Off at the lower right of screen indicates the information code concerning the last power off. To execute each function, select the desired menu and press its number on the remote commander. To exit from the Test Mode, press the [POWER] key.

0. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. _

Quit the Syscon Diagnosis and return to the Test Mode Menu.

Syscon Diagnosis Drive Auto Adjustment Drive Manual Operation Mecha Aging Emergency History Version Information Video Level Adjustment Exit: POWER Key

1. All All items continuous check This menu checks all diagnostic items continuously. Normally, all items are checked successively one after another automatically unless an error is found, but at a certain item that requires judgment through a visual check to the result, the following screen is displayed for the key entry.

_ Model : DPX-14xxxx Revision : 1.xxxx Last Off: xx

### Syscon Diagnosis ### Diag All Check No. 2 Version

Power Off Information Code List 00 : 01 : 02 :

03 : 04 : 05 : 06 :

### Syscon Diagnosis ### Check Menu Quit All Version Peripheral Servo Supply AV Decoder Video Audio

0. Quit

Test Mode Menu 0. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

SYSCON DIAGNOSIS

2-3. ROM Check Sum Check Sum = xxxx

Primary Power Off Power Off Request from SYSTEM CONTROL Power Off by Emergency Power Off Command from SYSTEM CONTROL (if information is sent from SYSTEM CONTROL) IF CON Judged that SYSTEM CONTROL is Faulty Power Off from Diagnosis Mode of IF CON Forced Power Off by the User Power Off by Power Supply Voltage Monitor

Press NEXT Key to Continue Press PREV Key to Repeat _

For the ROM Check, the check sum calculated by the Syscon is output, and therefore you must compare it with the specified value for confirmation. Following the message, press [NEXT] key to go to the next item, or [PREV] key to repeat the same check again. To quit the diagnosis and return to the Check Menu screen, press [STOP] or [ENTER] key. If an error occurred, the diagnosis is suspended and the error code is displayed as shown below.

### Syscon Diagnosis ###

3-3. EEPROM Check Error 03: EEPROM Write/Reed N Address : 00000001 Write Data : 2492 Read Data : 2490 Press NEXT Key to Continue Press PREV Key to Repeat _

Press [STOP] key to quit the diagnosis, or [PREV] key to repeat the same item where an error occurred, or [NEXT] key to continue the check from the item next to faulty item.

6-1

Submenu

(2-4) Model Type Model code is displayed. Error: Not detected. The model code read from the EEPROM is displayed with 2-digit hexadecimal number.

Selecting 2 and subsequent items calls the submenu screen of each item. For example, if “5. Supply” is selected, the following submenu will be displayed.

Model Type

0. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. _

### Syscon Diagnosis ### Check Menu No. 5 Supply Quit All ARP Register Check ARP to RAM Data Bus ARP to RAM Address Bus ARP RAM Check

US, CND

1

0

AR, E, MX

1

2

AEP (DPX1411BM, DPX1411HM), UK

1

3

AEP (DPX1412BM, DPX1412HM)

1

4

BR

1

6

• Abbreviation AR : Argentina BR : Brazilian CND : Canadian MX : Mexican • Description about model name DPX14xxBM Color of set B : Black H : Titanium gray

0. Quit Quit the submenu and return to the main menu.

1. All All submenu items continuous check. This menu checks 2 and subsequent items successively. At the item where visual check is required for judgment or an error occurred, the checking is suspended and the message is output for key entry. Normally, all items are checked successively one after another automatically unless an error is found. Selecting 2 and subsequent items executes respective menus and outputs the results. For the contents of each submenu, see “General Description of Checking Method” and “Check Items List”.

(2-5) Region Region code is displayed. Error: Not detected. The region code determined from the model code is displayed. (2-6) AD 3 PORT Check AD 3 PORT status is displayed. Error: Not detected. Which status, High (Pull Up), NC (Non Connect), or Low (Pull Down), the AD 3 PORT is placed in now is checked.

General Description of Checking Method

2. Version

3. Peripheral

(2-2) Revision ROM revision number is displayed. Error: Not detected. The revision number defined in the source file of ROM (IC107) is displayed with four digits.

(3-2) Gate Array Check Data write → read, and accord check Error 02: Gate array write/read discord Data of 0x00 to 0xFF is written sequentially to the address 0xF and then read for checking.

(2-3) ROM Check Sum Check sum is calculated. Error: Not detected. 8-bit data are added up to the ROM (IC107) address 0x000F0000 to 0x002EFFFF, and the result is displayed with 4-digit hexadecimal number. Error is not detected. Compare the result with the specified value.

(3-3) EEPROM Check Data write → read, and accord check Error 03: EEPROM write/read discord 0x9249, 0x2942 and 0x4294 are written to the address 0x00 to 0xFF of the EEPROM and then read for checking. Before writing, the data are saved, then after checking, they are written to restore the contents of EEPROM.

6-2

4. Servo

address, and read address are displayed in this order. However, the message uses same template, and accordingly exchange Address and Data when reading. The following display, for example,

(4-2) Servo DSP Check Data write → read, and accord check Error 12: Read data discord 0x9249, 0x2942 and 0x4294 are written to the RAM address 0x602 of the Servo DSP and then read for checking. Also, OPT type “1 LASER” or “2 LASER” is displayed.

### Syscon Diagnosis ###

(4-3) DSP Driver Test Test signal data → DSP Driver Error: Not detected. Caution: Do not perform this checking with the mechanical deck connected. The maximum voltage is applied to the Servo Driver IC (IC401). If the mechanical deck is connected, it will be destroyed immediately. Following the output message, disconnect the mechanical deck, then enter the specified 4- or 5-digit value from the commander, and press the [ENTER] key. The test is conducted only if the entered value accords. To exit the test, check the output level, then press [NEXT] key. This check is not conducted, but skipped in “All” menu item.

5-4. ARP to RAM Address Bus Error 10: ARP - RAM Address B Address : 0000A55A Write Data : 00000000 Read Data : 00080000 Press NEXT Key to Continue Press PREV Key to Repeat _

shows the data 0xA55A was read from address 0x00080000 though it was written to the address 0x00000000. This implies that these addresses are in the form of shadow. Also, if the read data is not 0xA55A, another error will be present. (5-5) ARP RAM Check Data write → read, and accord check Error 11: ARP RAM read data discord The program code data stored in ROM are copied to all areas of RAM (IC303) connected to the ARP (IC302) through the bus, then they are read and checked if they accord. If the detail check was selected initially, the data are written to all areas and read, then the same test is conducted once again with the data where all bits are inverted between 1 and 0. If discord is detected, faulty address, written data, and read data are displayed following the error code 11, and the test is suspended.

Supplement: How to disconnect mechanical deck Disconnect flexible flat cables connected to the CN201 and CN202 of MB-98 board. Also, disconnect flat cable from the CN402.

5. Supply (5-2) ARP Register Check Data write → read, and accord check Error 08: ARP register write, and read data discord Data 0x00 to 0xFF is written sequentially to the ARP TMAX register (address 0xC6) and then read for checking.

6. AV Decoder

(5-3) ARP to RAM Data Bus Data write → read, and accord check Error 09: ARP ←→ RAM data bus error Data 0x0001 to 0x8000 where one bit each is set to 1 are written to the address 0 of RAM (IC303) connected to the ARP (IC302) through the bus, then they are read and checked. In case of discord, written bit pattern and read data are displayed. If data where multiple bits are 1 are read, the bits concerned may touch each other. Further, if data where certain bit is always 1 or 0 regardless of written data, the line could be disconnected or shorted.

(6-2) 1930 RAM Data write → read, and accord check Error 13: AVD RAM read data discord The program code data stored in ROM (IC107) are copied to all areas of RAM (IC504, IC505) connected to the AVD (IC503) through the bus, then they are read and checked if they accord. Further, the same test is conducted once again with the data where all bits are inverted between 1 and 0. If discord is detected, faulty address, written data, and read data are displayed following the error code 13, and the test is suspended. During the test, OSD display becomes blank as the OSD area is also checked.

(5-4) ARP to RAM Address Bus Data write → other address read discord check Error 10: ARP ←→ RAM address bus error Caution: Address and data display in case of an error is different from the display of other diagnosis (described later). Before starting the test, all addresses of RAM (IC303) are cleared to 0x0000. First, 0xA55A is written to the address 0x00000, and the address data are read and checked from addresses 0x00001 to 0x80000 while shifting 1 bit each. Next, the data at that address is cleared, and it is written to the address 0x00001, and read and checked in the same manner. This check is repeated up to the address 0x80000 while shifting the address data by 1 bit each. If data other than 0 is read at the addresses except written address, an error is given because all addresses were already cleared to 0. In this check, the error display pattern is different from that of other diagnosis; read data, written

(6-3) 1930 SP ROM → AVD RAM → Video OUT Error: Not detected. The data including sub picture streams in ROM (IC107) are transferred to the RAM (IC504, IC505) in AVD (IC503), and output as video signals from the AVD (IC503). Though OSD display becomes blank, the output of video signals continues until the key is pressed. They are output from all video terminals (Composite, Y/ C, Component) except EURO AV terminal.

6-3

7. Video

Check Items List

(7-2) Color Bar AVD color bar command write → Video OUT Error: Not detected. The command is transferred to the AVD, and the color bar signals are output from video terminals. They are output from all video terminals (Composite, Y/C, Component) except EURO AV terminal.

2) Version (2-2) Revision (2-3) ROM Check Sum (2-4) Model Type (2-5) Region 3) Peripheral (3-2) Gate Array Check (3-3) EEPROM Check

(7-3) Composite Out (AEP, UK Model) EURO-AV Composite video output check AVD color bar command write → Video (EURO-AV Composite) OUT Error: Not detected. With the Component of video output turned off, the color bar signals are output from the EURO-AV terminal.

4) Servo (4-2) Servo DSP Check (4-3) DSP Driver Test 5) Supply (5-2) ARP Register Check (5-3) ARP to RAM Data Bus (5-4) ARP to RAM Address Bus (5-5) ARP RAM Check

(7-4) Y/C Out (AEP, UK Model) EURO-AV Y/C video output check AVD color bar command write → Video (EURO-AV Y/C) OUT Error: Not detected. With the Y/C of video output turned on, the color bar signals are output from the EURO-AV terminal.

6) AV Decoder (6-2) 1930 RAM (6-3) 1930 SP

(7-5) RGB Out (AEP, UK Model) EURO-AV RGB video output check AVD color bar command write → Video (EURO-AV RGB) OUT Error: Not detected. With the RGB of video output turned on, the color bar signals are output from the EURO-AV terminal.

7) Video (7-2) Color Bar (7-3) Composite Out (AEP, UK Model) (7-4) Y/C Out (AEP, UK Model) (7-5) RGB Out (AEP, UK Model) (7-6) Component Out (AEP, UK Model) (7-7) Euro AV Through (AEP, UK Model)

(7-6) Component Out (AEP, UK Model) EURO-AV Component video output check AVD color bar command write → Video (EURO-AV Component) OUT Error: Not detected. With the Component of video output turned on, the color bar signals are output from the EURO-AV terminal.

8) Audio (8-2) ARP → 1930 (8-3) Test Tone

Error Codes List

(7-7) Euro AV Through (AEP, UK Model) Euro-AV Through Out ON/OFF check. AV through out is turned on, check video and audio signal pass through from Euro-AV2 to Euro-AV1. Error: Not detected.

00: Error not detected 01: RAM write/read data discord 02: Gate array NG 03: EEPROM NG 04: Flash memory clear error 05: Flash memory write error 06: Flash memory read data discord 07: 2725 read data discord 08: ARP register read data discord 09: ARP ←→ RAM data bus error 10: ARP ←→ RAM address bus error 11: ARP RAM read data discord 12: Servo DSP NG 13: 1930 SDRAM NG 14: ARP → 1930 video NG 15: ARP → 1930 audio NG 16: 1910 UCODE download NG 17: System call error (function not supported) 18: System call error (parameter error) 19: System call error (illegal ID number) 20: System call error (time out) 21: NAND Flash faulty blocks exceed 10 90: Error occurred 91: User verification NG 92: Diagnosis cancelled

8. Audio (8-2) ARP → 1930 Error 14 : ARP → 1930 video NG 15 : ARP → 1930 audio NG (8-3) Test Tone A pink noise signal is output from the AVD (IC503) through optical coaxial digital terminal and analog audio terminal. Error: Not detected. After turning on all outputs, each time the [NEXT] key is pressed, the output channel is switched for individual channel checking. All channels → 2ch Left → 2ch Right → Front Left → Front Right → Rear Left → Rear Right → Center → Sub Woofer are checked in this order. Caution: Sub Woofer is checked only for low-frequency components, and no sound will be heard unless a proper super woofer is connected.

6-4

6-4.

1. DVD-SL (single layer) Select [1], insert DVD single layer disc, and press [ENTER] key, and the adjustment will be made through the following steps, then adjusted values will be written to the EEPROM.

DRIVE AUTO ADJUSTMENT

On the Test Mode Menu screen, press [1] key on the remote commander, and the drive auto adjustment menu will be displayed.

DVD Single Layer Disc Adjustment Steps

## Drive Auto Adjustment ##

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26.

Adjustment Menu 0. 1. 2. 3. 4.

ALL DVD-SL CD DVD-DL LCD

Exit: RETURN

Normally, [0] is selected to adjust DVD (single layer), CD, DVD (dual layer), and LCD (SACD) in this order. But, individual items can be adjusted for the case where adjustment is suspended due to an error. In this mode, the adjustment can be made easily through the operation following the message displayed on the screen. Which disc is currently adjusted is displayed on the fluorescent display tube. The disc used for adjustment must be the one specified for adjustment. 0. ALL You will be asked if EEPROM data are initialized or not, and for this prompt, select [0] and press the [ENTER] key. First , the servo setting data in EEPROM, Emergency History and Hour Meter are cleared to initialize. Then, 1. DVD-SL disc, 2. CD disc, 3. DVDDL disc, and 4. LCD disc (SACD disc) are adjusted in this order. Each time one disc was adjusted, it is ejected, and therefore exchange the disc following the message. Though the message to confirm whether the discs is to be adjusted is not displayed except for LCD disk (SACD disk), you can exit the adjustment by pressing the [STOP] button. In adjusting each disc, the mirror time is measured to check the disk type. In the auto adjustment, whether the disc type is correct is not checked unlike conventional models, and accordingly, take care not to insert a different type of disc.

6-5

SLED TILT Reset Disc Check Memory SL Set Disc Type SL Spdl Start Wait 1 sec LD ON Focus Error Check Focus ON 0 Auto Track Offset Adjust L0 Trv Level Check Tracking ON Wait 100 msec CLVA ON Wait 500 msec Sled ON Auto Loop Filter Offset Adjust Auto Focus Gain Adjust L0 Auto Focus Balance Adjust L0 EQ Boost Adjust Auto Loop Filter Offset Adjust RF Level Measure Jitter Disp ON Jitter Memory Jitter Disp OFF Eep Copy Loop Filter Offset All Servo Stop

2. CD Select [2], insert CD disc, and press [ENTER] key, and the adjustment will be made through the following steps, then adjusted values will be written to the EEPROM.

3. DVD-DL (dual layer) Select [3], insert DVD dual layer disc, and press [ENTER] key, and the adjustment will be made through the following steps, then adjusted values will be written to the EEPROM.

CD Adjustment Steps

DVD Dual Layer Disc Adjustment Steps

1. Sled Tilt Reset 2. Disc Check Memory CD 3. Set Disc Type CD 4. Spdl Start 5. Wait 1 sec 6. LD ON 7. Focus Error Check 8. Fcs ON 1 9. Auto Track Offset Adjust L0 10. Trv Level Check 11. Tracking ON 12. Wait 100 msec 13. CLVA ON 14. Wait 500 msec 15. Sled ON 16. Auto Loop Filter Offset Adjust 17. Auto Focus Gain Adjust L0 18. Auto Focus Balance Adjust L0 19. Eq Boost Adjust 20. Auto Loop Filter Offset Adjust 21. Auto Track Gain Adjust 22. RF Level Measure 23. Jitter Disp ON 24. Jitter Memory 25. Jitter Disp OFF 26. All Servo Stop

1. Sled Tilt Reset 2. Disc Check Memory DL 3. Set Disc Type DL

4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18.

Layer 1 Adjust Spdl Start (Wait 1 sec) LD ON Fcs ON 1 Auto Track Offset Adjust L1 Tracking ON Wait 100 msec Clva ON (Wait 500 msec) Sled ON Auto Focus Gain Adjust L1 Auto Focus Balance Adjust L1 Eq Boost Adjust L1 Auto Track Gain Adjust L1 Jitter Disp ON Jitter Memory Jitter Disp Off

19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31.

Layer 0 Adjust Focus Jump (L1 → L0) Auto Track Offset Adjust L0 Tracking ON (Wait 100 msec) Clva ON (Wait 500 msec) Sled ON Auto Focus Gain Adjust L0 Auto Focus Balance Adjust L0 Eq Boost Adjust L0 Auto Track Gain Adjust L0 Jitter Disp ON Jitter Memory Jitter Disp OFF All Servo Stop

4. LCD This model does not adjust it because the adjusted data of CD are reflected.

6-6

6-5.

0.

DRIVE MANUAL OPERATION

Disc Check

On the Test Mode Menu screen, select [2], and the manual operation menu will be displayed. For the manual operation, each servo on/off control and adjustment can be executed manually.

1. SL Disc Check 2. CD Disc Check 3. DL Disc Check

## Drive Manual Operation ##

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Operation Menu Disc type Servo Control Track/Layer Jump Manual Adjustment Auto Adjustment Memory Check

0. Reset SLED TILT

On this screen, the mirror time is measured and written to the EEPROM to check the disc type. First, set a DVD SL disc and press [1], then set a CD disc and press [2], and finally set a DVD DL disc and press [3]. The measured mirror time is displayed respectively. The adjustment must be executed more than once after default data were written. Reference value for DVD is from 10 to 20, and for CD, from 28 to 4F. Check that the value of CD is larger than that of DVD. When those values are beyond a range perform this adjustment again. From this screen, you can go to another mode by pressing [NEXT] or [PREV] key, but you cannot enter this mode from another mode. You can enter this mode from the Operation Menu screen only.

0. Disc Check Memory Exit: RETURN

In using the manual operation menu, take care of the following points. These commands do not provide protection, thus requiring correct operation. The sector address or time code field is displayed when a disc is loaded. 1. Set correctly the disc type to be used on the Disc Type screen. The disc type must be set after a disc was loaded. The set disc type is cleared when the tray is opened. 2. After power ON, if the Drive Manual Operation was selected, first perform “Reset SLED TILT” by opening 1. Disc Type screen. 3. In case of an alarm, immediately press the [STOP] button to stop the servo operation, and turn the power OFF.

1. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 0.

Basic operation (controllable from front panel or remote commander)

[POWER] [STOP] [OPEN/CLOSE] [RETURN] [NEXT], [PREV] [1] to [9], [0] Cursor UP/DOWN

Disc Check Memory

Power OFF Servo stop Stop+Eject/Loading Return to Operation Menu or Test Mode Menu Transition between sub modes of menu Selection of menu items Increase/Decrease in manually adjusted value

Disc Type Disc Type Disc Type Auto Check DVD SL 12 cm DVD DL 12 cm CD 12 cm LCD 12 cm DVD SL 8 cm DVD DL 8 cm CD 8 cm LCD 8 cm Reset SLED TILT EMG. 00

On this screen, select the disc type. To select the disc type, press the number of the loaded disc. The selected disc type is displayed at the bottom. Selecting [1] automatically selects and displays the disc type. In case of wrong display, retry “Disc Check Memory”. Also, opening the tray causes the set disc type to be cleared. In this case, set the disc type again after loading. In performing manual operation, the disc type must be set. Once the disc type has been selected, the sector address or time code display field will appear as shown below. These values are displayed when PLL is locked. Disc Type Disc Type Auto Check DVD SL 12 cm DVD DL 12 cm CD 12 cm LCD 12 cm DVD SL 8 cm DVD DL 8 cm CD 8 cm LCD 8 cm Reset SLED TILT SA.------ SI.-- EMG. 00 DVD SL 12 cm 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 0.

Display when DVD SL 12cm disc was selected

6-7

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 0. CD

Disc Type Disc Type Auto Check DVD SL 12 cm DVD DL 12 cm CD 12cm LCD 12 cm DVD SL 8 cm DVD DL 8 cm CD 8 cm LCD 8 cm Reset SLED TILT TC.---:---:--- EMG. 00 12 cm

Display when CD 12cm disc was selected

[0] Reset SLED TILT [1] Disc Type Check

[2] to [9]

Reset the Sled and Tilt to initial position.

[5] Sled

Turn ON/OFF the sled servo.

[6] CLVA

Turn ON/OFF normal servo of spindle servo.

[7] FCS. Srch

Apply same voltage as that of focus search to the focus drive to check the focus drive system.

→ Sled FWD

Move the sled outward. Perform this operation with the tracking servo turned off.

← Sled REV

Move the sled inward. Perform this operation with the tracking servo turned off.

3. Track/Layer Jump

Judge automatically the loaded disc. As the judged result is displayed at the bottom of screen, make sure that it is correct. If Disc Check Memory menu has not been executed after EEPROM default setting, the disc type cannot be judged. In this case, return to the initial menu and make a check for three types of discs (SL, DL, CD).

Tracking/Layer Jump 1Tj FWD R. Fj (L1 → L0) 1Tj REV L. Fj (L0 → L1) 2Tj FWD U. Lj (L1 → L0) 2Tj REV D. Lj (L0 → L1) NTj FWD NTj REV 500Tj FWD 500Tj REV 10k/20k FWD 10k/20k REV SA.------ SI.-- EMG. 00 DVD SL 12 cm 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 0.

Select the loaded disc. The adjusted value is written to the address of selected disc. No further entry is necessary if [1] was selected.

On this screen, track jump, etc. can be performed. Only for the DVD-DL, the focus jump and layer jump are displayed in the right field.

2. Servo Control [1] 1Tj FWD

1-track jump forward.

[2] 1Tj REV

1-track jump reverse.

[3] 2Tj FWD

2-track jump forward.

[4] 2Tj REV

2-track jump reverse.

[5] NTj FWD

N-track jump forward.

[6] NTj REV

N-track jump reverse.

[7] 500Tj FWD

Fine search forward.

On this screen, the servo on/off control necessary for replay is executed. Normally, turn on each servo from 1 sequentially and when CLVA is turned on, the usual trace mode becomes active. In the trace mode, DVD sector address or CD time code is displayed. This is not displayed where the spindle is not locked. The spindle could run overriding the control if the spindle system is faulty or RF is not present. In such a case, do not operate CLVA.

[8] 500Tj REV

Fine search reverse.

[9] 10k/20k FWD

Direct search forward.

[0] 10k/20k REV

Direct search reverse.

[0] Reset SLED TILT

Reset the Sled and Tilt to initial position.

→ Fj (L1 → L0)

Focus jump forward. (Trk/Sled Servo OFF)

[1] LD

Turn ON/OFF the laser.

← Fj (L0 → L1)

[2] SP

Turn ON/OFF the spindle.

Focus jump reverse. (Trk/Sled Servo OFF)

[3] Focus

Search the focus and turn on the focus.

↑ Lj (L1 → L0)

Layer jump forward. (Trk/Sled Servo ON)

[4] TRK

Turn ON/OFF the tracking servo.

↓ Lj (L0 → L1)

Layer jump reverse. (Trk/Sled Servo ON)

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Servo Control LD Off R. Sled FWD SP Off L. Sled REV Focus Off TRK. Off Sled Off CLVA Off FCS. Srch Off

0. Reset SLED TILT SA.------ SI.-- EMG. 00 DVD SL 12 cm

– The following commands are valid for DVD-DL disc only –

6-8

[6] Auto EQ

4. Manual Adjustment

[7] Auto L.F. Offset

Manual Adjustment 1. TRK. Offset 2. Focus Gain 3. TRK. Gain 4. Focus Offset 5. Focus Balance 6. L.F. Offset 7. EQ BOOST 8. GD ADJ Adjustment : Up/Down Jitter 1D SA.------ SI.-- EMG. 00 DVD SL 12 cm

[8] Auto Group Delay 6. Memory Check EEPROM DATA 1 CD LCD xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx --

Focus Gain TRK. Gain FCS Balance Focus Bias TRV. Offset L.F. Offset EQ Boost Mirror Time _ DOWN : Next Data CLEAR: Default Set

On this screen, each item can be adjusted manually. Select the desired number [1] to [8] from the remote commander, and current setting for the selected item will be displayed, then increase or decrease numeric value with ↑ key or ↓ key. This value is stored in the EEPROM. If CLV has been applied, the jitter is displayed for reference for the adjustment.

[1] TRK. Offset

Adjusts loop filter offset.

[2] Focus Gain

Adjusts focus gain.

[3] TRK. Gain

Adjusts track gain.

[4] Focus Offset

Adjusts focus offset.

[5] Focus Balance

Adjusts focus balance.

[6] L.F. Offset

Adjusts loop filter offset.

[7] EQ BOOST [8] GD ADJ

Auto Adjustment TRK. Offset Focus Balance Focus Offset Focus Gain TRK. Gain EQ L.F. Offset Group Delay

SA.------ SI.-- EMG. 00 DVD SL 12 cm

On this screen, each item can be adjusted automatically. Select the desired number [1] to [8] from the remote commander, and selected item is adjusted automatically.

[1] Auto TRK. Offset

page. 1/2

Adjusts tracking offset.

[2] Auto Focus Balance Adjusts focus balance. [3] Auto Focus Offset

Adjusts focus offset.

[4] Auto Focus Gain

Adjusts focus gain.

[5] Auto TRK. Gain

Adjusts track gain.

CD LCD RF Jitter xx -RF Level xx -FE Level xx -FE Balance xx -TRV. Level xx -Analog FRSW xx xx PLL Dac Gain xx xx

-– SL xx xx xx xx xx xx xx

DL -– L0 L1 xx xx -- --- --- --- -xx xx xx xx

_ UP : Prev Data CLEAR: Default Set

page. 2/2

On this screen, current servo adjusted data stored in the EEPROM are displayed. The adjusted data are initialized by pressing the [CLEAR] key, but be careful that they are not recoverable after initialization. Before clearing the adjusted data, make a note of the set data. This screen will also appear if [0] All is selected in the Drive Auto Adjustment. In this case, default setting cannot be made. For reference, the drive has been designed so that the gain center value is 20 and offset value is 80. Other values will be in a range of 10 to 80. If extreme value such as 00 or FF is set, adjustment will be faulty. In such a case, check for disc scratch or cable disconnection, then perform adjustment again.

5. Auto Adjustment Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto

DL -– L0 L1 xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx

Adjusts tracking offset. EEPROM DATA 2

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

-– SL xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx

6-9

How to see Emergency History

6-6. MECHA AGING

3

1

2

### Mecha Aging ###

1.

Press OPEN key

2

1: Emergency Code 2: Don't Care These codes are used for verification of software designing. 3: Historical order 1 to 9

Abort: STOP key

Emergency Codes List 10: Communication to IC202 (MB-98 board) failed. 11: Each servo for focus, tracking, and spindle is unlocked. 12: Communication to EEPROM, IC101 (MB-98 board) failed. 13: Writing of hours meter data to EEPROM, IC101 (MB-98 board) failed. 14: Communication to Servo DSP IC302 (MB-98 board) failed, or Servo DSP is faulty. 20: Initialization of tilt servo and sled servo failed. They are not placed in the initial position. 21: Tilt servo operation error 22: Syscon made a request to move the tilt servo to wrong position. 23: Sled servo operation error 24: Syscon made a request to move the sled servo to wrong position. 30: Tracking balance adjustment error 31: Tracking gain adjustment error 32: Focus balance adjustment error 33: Focus bias adjustment error 34: Focus gain adjustment error 35: Tilt servo adjustment error 36: RF equalizer adjustment error 37: RF group delay adjustment error 38: Jitter value after adaptive servo operation is too large. 40: Focus servo does not operate. 41: With a dual layer (DL) disc, focus jump failed. 50: CLV (spindle) servo does not operate. 51: Spindle does not stop. 60: With a DVD disc, Syscon made a request to seek nonexistent address. 61: With a CD disc, Syscon made a request to seek nonexistent address. 62: With a CD disc, Syscon made a request to seek nonexistent track No. and index No. 63: With a DVD disc, seeking of target address failed. 64: With a CD disc, seeking of target address failed. 65: With a CD disc, seeking of target index failed. 70: With a DVD disc, physical information data could not be read. 71: With a CD disc, TOC data could not be read. 80: Disc type judgment failed. 81: As disc type judgment failed, retry was repeated. 82: As disc type judgment failed, a measurement error occurred. 83: Disc type could not be judged within the specified time. 84: Illegal command code was received from Syscon. 85: Illegal command was received from Syscon.

On the Test Mode Menu screen, selecting [3] executes the aging of mechanism. First, open the tray and load a disc. Press the [PLAY] key, and the aging will start. When the tray is closed, the disc type and size are judged and displayed. During aging, the repeat cycle is displayed. Aging can be aborted at any time by pressing the [STOP] key. After the operation has stopped, unload the disc and press again the [STOP] key or the [RETURN] key to return to the Test Mode Menu.

6-7. EMERGENCY HISTORY ### MEG. History ### Laser Hours

CD DVD

xxxxxxxh xxxxxxxh

1. 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 2. 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Select: 1 – 9 Scroll: UP/DOWN (1: Last EMG.) Exit: Return

On the Test Mode Menu screen, selecting [4] displays the information such as servo emergency history. The history information from last 1 up to 10 can be scrolled with ↑ key or ↓ key. Also, specific information can be displayed by directly entering that number with ten keys. The upper two lines display the laser ON total hours. Data below minutes are omitted. Clearing History Information Clearing laser hours Press [DISPLAY] and [CLEAR] keys in this order. Both CD and DVD data are cleared. Clearing emergency history Press [TITLE] and [CLEAR] keys in this order. Initializing set up data Press [DVD] and [CLEAR] keys in this order. The data have been initialized when “Set Up Initialized” message is displayed. The EMG. History screen will be restored soon.

6-10

6-8.

VERSION INFORMATION

6-10. IF CON SELF DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION 1. AI-23 BOARD (IF CON) TEST MODE

## Version Information ## IF con.

The front board test mode is the IF CON self diagnostic mode. The IF CON can diagnose the functions of the front panel boards that the IF CON controls. Normally, the IF CON makes a serial communication with the SYSTEM CONTROL and operates following the commands from the SYSTEM CONTROL, but in the Test mode, the IF CON operates independently from the SYSTEM CONTROL.

Ver : x. xxx (xxxx) Group 00

SYScon.

Ver : x. xxx (xxxx) Model xx Region 0x Servo DSP. Ver : 1. xxxx OPT Type : x LASER

In the Test mode, the following functions can be checked. 1. Button function 2. Remote commander receiving function 3. SYSTEM CONTROL-IF CON serial communication 4. Click shuttle function 5. Fluorescent display tube lighting check Grid check Anode check 6. LED control function

Exit: RETURN _

The ROM version, region code, OPT type, etc. are displayed if [5] is selected in the Test Mode Menu. The parenthesized hexadecimal number in the version number field indicates the checksum value of the ROM. Note : After down loading ROM data, sometimes it happens that checksum is not the same as that of ROM data which has been down loaded. In such a case, go back to the menu and select “0. Syscon Diagnosis”, then select “1. All” in “2. Version”. If the result of this operation does not give an agreement, it must be either Down Load error or ROM error.

6-9.

In the Test mode, the set operates same as usual, except voltage monitoring, communication monitoring, display of fluorescent display tube, and LED control. 1. The routine that monitors +3.3 V (P-CONT) of MB-98 board is not provided. 2. The monitoring timer for serial communication with the SYSTEM CONTROL is not provided. The set is not placed in the Standby mode, even if the communication with SYSTEM CONTROL is normal. 3. Display of fluorescent display tube (normally, display is made following the commands from SYSTEM CONTROL) 4. LED control (normally, control is made following the commands from SYSTEM CONTROL)

VIDEO LEVEL ADJUSTMENT

On the Test Mode Menu screen, selecting [6] displays color bars for video level adjustment. During display of color bars, OSD disappears but the menu screen will be restored if pressing any key. Measurement point

: LINE OUT VIDEO (75 Ω terminating resistance) Measuring instrument : Oscilloscope Adjustment device : RV501 on MB-98 board 0.04 Vp-p Specified value : 1.0 +– 0.02

2. OPERATION OF SELF CHECK MODE The Self Check mode is the function to conduct the basic test to the FL display and DVD panel section. 2-1. Self Check Mode Transition Processing At the AC Power ON after IF CON (IC404) was reset, the input to 10pin (SELF CHECK) is judged and if “Low” is entered, the main unit transits to the Self Check mode. In this port input judgment, the result of 3-time attempts must be same (assuming that the MB98 board is not connected). While pressing the [STOP] key on the main unit with the IF CON in STANDBY mode, enter [RETURN] → [DISPLAY] (or [SET UP]) on the remote commander, and the unit transits to the Self Check Mode. The Self Check mode terminates when the IF CON transits to the STANDBY mode.

0.04 Vp-p 1.0 +– 0.02

6-11

2-2. Operation of Auto Self Check When the Self Check mode becomes active at the AC Power ON or by key input, the test display of the following steps (1) to (4) is repeated. (1) FLD and LED all ON (for 5 seconds) VIDEO CD DVD CD

DISC

NTSC

PGM

SHUFFLE

DTS ANGLE

REPEAT 1

MPEG

Digital

TITLE

TRACK

CHAP

INDEX

HOUR

MIN

SEC

TITLE

TRACK

CHAP

INDEX

HOUR

MIN

SEC

TITLE

TRACK

CHAP

INDEX

HOUR

MIN

SEC

TITLE

TRACK

CHAP

INDEX

HOUR

MIN

SEC

PBC

A- B

(2) MODEL display (for 2 seconds) VIDEO CD DVD CD

DISC

NTSC

PGM

SHUFFLE

DTS ANGLE

REPEAT 1

MPEG

Digital

PBC

A- B

(3) Version display (for 2 seconds) VIDEO CD DVD CD

DISC

NTSC

PGM

SHUFFLE

DTS ANGLE

REPEAT 1

MPEG

Digital

A- B

PBC

(4) ROM creation date display (for 2 seconds) VIDEO CD DVD CD

DISC

NTSC

PGM

SHUFFLE

DTS ANGLE

REPEAT 1

MPEG

Digital

A- B

PBC

6-12

2-3. Each Self Check Function Each Self Check function tests the FLD display, LED display, and key input. Input Voltage [V]

IC404: Pin No. (Signal) Pin ed (BNRKEY)

Pin ef (O/C)

Pin eg (PLAY)

Pin eh (DISPLAY) Pin ej (CURSOR)

0

SURROUND

OPEN/CLOSE

PLAY

STOP

ENTER

0.70

BNR

PAUSE

–

DISPLAY

DOWN

1.31

–

PREVIOUS

–

DVD MENU

LEFT

1.97

–

NEXT

–

RETURN

UP

2.59

–

–

–

TITLE

RIGHT

3.3

–

–

–

–

–

2-3-1. FLD and LED All ON 2-3-1-1. Transition Keys in Self Check Mode • [STOP] key and [OPEN/CLOSE] key on the main unit • [LEFT] key on the main unit and the remote commander 2-3-1-2. Operation and Display In this mode, all LEDs except STANDBY LED and all segments of FLD turn ON. Example of FLD all ON VIDEO CD DVD CD

DISC

NTSC

PGM

SHUFFLE

DTS ANGLE

REPEAT 1

MPEG

Digital

A- B

TITLE

TRACK

CHAP

INDEX

HOUR

MIN

SEC

CHAP

INDEX

HOUR

MIN

SEC

PBC

2-3-2. Main Unit Key Name Display and Key Code Display 2-3-2-1. Transition Keys in Self Check Mode • Keys on main unit except keys transited in self check 2-3-2-2. Operation and Display When a key on the main unit is pressed in the Self Check mode, the name of that key is displayed on the FLD. Also, the key name display and the key code display can be switched with the [DISPLAY] key on the remote commander. “NOTHING” is displayed when nothing is entered. Also, VIDEO CD, DVD, and CD segments turn on when a communication error occurred. FLD display (at input of [PLAY] key on the main unit) VIDEO CD DVD CD

DISC

NTSC

PGM

SHUFFLE

DTS ANGLE

REPEAT 1

MPEG

Digital

A- B

TITLE

TRACK

PBC

6-13

Key code display (at input of [PLAY] key, Key code: 0Ah) VIDEO CD DVD CD

DISC

NTSC

PGM

SHUFFLE

DTS ANGLE

REPEAT 1

MPEG

Digital

A- B

PBC

DISC

NTSC

TITLE

TRACK

CHAP

INDEX

HOUR

MIN

SEC

TITLE

TRACK

CHAP

INDEX

HOUR

MIN

SEC

TITLE

TRACK

CHAP

INDEX

HOUR

MIN

SEC

CHAP

INDEX

HOUR

MIN

SEC

CHAP

INDEX

HOUR

MIN

SEC

At input of faulty voltage VIDEO CD DVD

MPEG

PGM

DTS ANGLE

CD

Digital

REPEAT 1 A- B

PBC

DISC

NTSC

When two keys are pressed VIDEO CD DVD CD

PGM

SHUFFLE

DTS ANGLE

REPEAT 1

MPEG

Digital

A- B

PBC

2-3-3. Remote Commander Key Name Display and Key Code Display 2-3-3-1. Transition Keys in Self Check Mode • Remote commander keys except keys transited in self check 2-3-3-2. Operation and Display When a key on the remote commander is pressed in the Self Check mode, the name of that key is displayed on the FLD. Also, the key name display and the key code display can be switched with the [DISPLAY] key on the remote commander. “NOTHING” is displayed when nothing is entered. Also, VIDEO CD, DVD, and CD segments turn on when a communication error occurred. Remote commander key name display (at input of [PAUSE] key)

VIDEO CD DVD CD

DISC

NTSC

PGM

SHUFFLE

DTS ANGLE

REPEAT 1

MPEG

Digital

A- B

TITLE

TRACK

PBC

Remote commander key code display (at input of [PAUSE] key, Key code: 39h)

VIDEO CD DVD CD

DISC

NTSC

PGM

SHUFFLE

DTS ANGLE

REPEAT 1

MPEG

Digital

A- B

TITLE

TRACK

PBC

6-14

2-3-4. Communication Monitoring Display The communication state is monitored and displayed while the key name on the main unit and the remote commander is displayed. When the communication to the System Controller failed, VIDEO CD, DVD, and CD segments turn on. Communication error display (at no key input)

VIDEO CD DVD CD

DISC

NTSC

PGM

SHUFFLE

DTS ANGLE

REPEAT 1

MPEG

Digital

A- B

TITLE

TRACK

CHAP

INDEX

HOUR

MIN

SEC

CHAP

INDEX

HOUR

MIN

SEC

CHAP

INDEX

HOUR

MIN

SEC

HOUR

MIN

SEC

PBC

Communication error display (at code display without input of the remote commander)

VIDEO CD DVD CD

DISC

NTSC

PGM

SHUFFLE

DTS ANGLE

REPEAT 1

MPEG

Digital

A- B

TITLE

TRACK

PBC

2-3-5. FLD Anode Test Display and SHUTTLE Click Operation Test 2-3-5-1. Transition Keys in Self Check Mode • [RIGHT] on the main unit and the remote commander • SHUTTLE on the remote commander during Anode Test display (This model does not provide JOG/SHUTTLE, and therefore use another DVD remote commander having the JOG/ SHUTTLE) 2-3-5-2. Operation and Display The Self Check mode transits to this mode when [RIGHT] key is entered. Only the first segment of each grid of FLD turns on, and each time the SHUTTLE is entered, the segment of each grid is switched in order. When SHUTTLE input is clockwise, the segment switches in 1 → 2 → 3 direction, or counterclockwise it switches in 3 → 2 → 1 direction. This tests whether each segment turns on individually. Display at the start of Anode Test VIDEO CD DVD CD

DISC

NTSC

PGM

SHUFFLE

DTS ANGLE

REPEAT 1

MPEG

Digital

A- B

TITLE

TRACK

PBC

↓ VIDEO CD DVD CD

DISC

NTSC

PGM

SHUFFLE

DTS ANGLE

REPEAT 1

MPEG

Digital

A- B

TITLE

(Input in CW direction)

TRACK

CHAP

PBC

6-15

INDEX

2-3-6. FLD Grid Test Display and SHUTTLE Click Operation Test 2-3-6-1. Transition Keys in Self Check Mode • [UP] on the main unit and the remote commander • SHUTTLE on the remote commander during Grid Test display (This model does not provide JOG/SHUTTLE, and therefore use another DVD remote commander having the JOG/ SHUTTLE) 2-3-6-2. Operation and Display The Self Check mode transits to this mode when [UP] key is entered. The first grid of FLD all turns on and other grids turn off. Each time the SHUTTLE is entered, the grid is switched in order. When SHUTTLE input is clockwise, the grid switches in 1 → 2 → 3 direction, or counterclockwise it switches in 3 → 2 → 1 direction. This tests whether each grid turns on individually. Display at the start of Grid Test

VIDEO CD DVD CD

DISC

NTSC

PGM

SHUFFLE

DTS ANGLE

REPEAT 1

MPEG

Digital

A- B

TITLE

DVD CD

DISC

NTSC

PGM

SHUFFLE

DTS ANGLE

REPEAT 1

MPEG

Digital

A- B

CHAP

INDEX

HOUR

MIN

SEC

PBC

↓ VIDEO CD

TRACK

TITLE

(Input in CW direction) TRACK

CHAP

INDEX

HOUR

MIN

SEC

CHAP

INDEX

HOUR

MIN

SEC

PBC

2-3-7. LED Test Display 2-3-7-1. Transition Keys in Self Check Mode • [DOWN] on the main unit and the remote commander • SHUTTLE on the remote commander during LED Test display (This model does not provide JOG/SHUTTLE, and therefore use another DVD remote commander having the JOG/ SHUTTLE) 2-3-7-2. Operation and Display LED is switched in order by the input of JOG/SHUTTLE. Also, LED ON/OFF is switched by the input of same key as the function that turns on the LED concerned. For the MULTI LED (DOLBY DIGITAL or MULTICHANNEL) only, there is no key which switches that function, and therefore use the [RETURN] key on the main unit. FLD display during LED Test VIDEO CD DVD CD

DISC

NTSC

PGM

SHUFFLE

DTS ANGLE

REPEAT 1

MPEG

Digital

A- B

TITLE

TRACK

PBC

2-3-8. Beep Sound Test 2-3-8-1. Transition Keys in Self Check Mode • Input of a key on main unit 2-3-8-2. Operation and Display In the Self Check mode, each time a key on the main unit is entered, a beep sound of 1kHz (100ms) is generated.

6-16

1G

2G

4G

3G

5G

6G

7G

8G

9G

10G

11G

a

f g

e

j

h

b

k

s n

r

col

m c

p

Dp d ( 1G~12G ) ANODE CONNECTION 1G

2G

3G

4G

5G

6G

7G

8G

9G

10G

11G

12G

P1

a

a

a

a

a

a

a

a

a

a

a

P2

h

h

h

h

h

h

h

h

h

h

h

P3

j

j

j

j

j

j

j

j

j

j

j

P4

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

P5

b

b

b

b

b

b

b

b

b

b

b

P6

f

f

f

f

f

f

f

f

f

f

f

P7

m

m

m

m

m

m

m

m

m

m

m

P8

s

s

s

s

s

s

s

s

s

s

s

P9

g

g

g

g

g

g

g

g

g

g

g

P10

e

e

e

e

e

e

e

e

e

e

e

P11

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

P12

p

p

p

p

p

p

p

p

p

p

p

P13

r

r

r

r

r

r

r

r

r

r

r

P14

c

c

c

c

c

c

c

c

c

c

c

P15

d

d

d

d

d

d

d

d

d

d

d

P16

Dp

Dp

Dp

Dp

Dp

Dp

Dp

Dp

Dp

Dp

-

P17

-

-

-

-

-

col

-

col

-

-

P18

-

-

-

6-17

-

-

12G

1-2. CPUCK (33 MHz) is outputted (communication with ROM is normal) • AVD (IC503) check Using an oscilloscope, measure the SDCLKO ( pin) of the AVD (IC503) to check that 95 MHz is outputted. If not outputted, a short of 27 MHz line across CLKI ( pin) and SCLKIN ( pin), IC mounting failure, or faulty AVD (IC503) is doubtful. If 27 MHz is outputted, the communication between SYSTEM CONTROL (IC103) and AVD (IC503) is disabled, and therefore check the following items, particularly the AVD (IC503). • WAIT signal check Using an oscilloscope, measure the XWAIT (yj pin) of the SYSTEM CONTROL (IC103) to check if it is fixed to “L” (0 V) or on the intermediate potential. In case of “L” or intermediate potential, examine CS2X – CS5X (y; – yd pins) to check if any pin is fixed to “L”. For the CS2X and CS3X, AVD (IC503) mounting failure or faulty IC is doubtful. For the CS4X and CS5X, ARP & SERVO (IC302) mounting failure or faulty IC is doubtful. If CS2X – CS5X are not “L”, or they are sometimes on intermediate potential, a soldering failure of XWAIT line, a short with other line, or faulty SYSTEM CONTROL (IC103) is doubtful. • INT signal check Using an oscilloscope, measure the INT0 – 2, 4 – 6 (qh – qk pins, w; – ws pins) of the SYSTEM CONTROL (IC103) to check if INT0 – 2, and 6 are fixed to “L” (0 V) and INT5 is fixed to “H” (3.3 V), or they are on intermediate potential. In case of “L”, “H”, or intermediate potential, a soldering failure of IC’s connected to that line, a short with other line, faulty SYSTEM CONTROL (IC103), or faulty each IC is doubtful. INT0 : AVD (IC503) INT1, INT2 : ARP & SERVO (IC302) INT5, INT6 : AUDIO DSP (IC701) • CSnX signals check Using an oscilloscope, measure the CX0X – CX7X (tk – yd, yg, yh pins) of the SYSTEM CONTROL (IC103) to check if they are fixed to “L” (0 V), or two or more CS’s sometime go “L”, or on intermediate potential. In case of fixed “L”, two or more CS’s on “L” or intermediate potential, a soldering failure of IC’s connected to that line, a short with other line, faulty SYSTEM CONTROL (IC103), or faulty each IC is doubtful. CS0X : ROM (IC107 or IC108) CS2X, CS3X: AVD (IC503) CS4X, CS5X: ARP & SERVO (IC302) • Other CS signals check Using an oscilloscope, measure the VESCS/X39CS (i; pin) and XDACS (ul pin) of the SYSTEM CONTROL (IC103) to check if they are fixed to “L”. If fixed, a soldering failure of that line, a short with other line, or faulty SYSTEM CONTROL (IC103) is doubtful.

6-11. TROUBLESHOOTING 6-11-1. Cannot Enter Test Mode You cannot enter the Test mode when either button has been pressed by any reason with the board assembled in the front panel. In this state, the power does not turn on even under normal condition (the set is kept in standby state), and also no button is active and the remote commander is not accepted. In this case, disconnect the MB-98 board and with the SELF CHECK (0 pin) of IF CON (IC404) on the AI-23 board kept in low state, supply AC, and the Test mode will be forcibly activated. Or, on the board, short the land printed as “SELF” to enter the Test mode. The IF CON (IC404) checks the SELF CHECK port only after the power on reset (only at AC supply, not in standby state). If any button is pressed, its name is displayed on the fluorescent display tube. But, if other than “NOTHING” is displayed though no button is pressed, it means that any button has been pressed.

6-11-2. Faults in Test Mode (MB-98 Board) 1. Test mode menu is not displayed • Board visual check Check main IC’s, SYSTEM CONTROL (IC103), ROM (IC107 or IC108), AVD (IC503), and ARP & SERVO (IC302), for mounting condition, direction, or evidence of short between pins, or soldering failure. Also, compare with good board to check if there are missing capacitors or resistors. • Clock signal check Measure the clock frequency at CPUCK (uj pin) of the SYSTEM CONTROL (IC103) using an oscilloscope. If 33 MHz is outputted, an access to the ROM is normal, and then check the items in 1-2. In the case of 8.25 MHz output, check the items in 1-1. If it is fixed to “H” or “L”, the X101 or SYSTEM CONTROL (IC103) will be faulty. 1-1. CPUCK (33 MHz) is not outputted • Power supply voltage check Check the power connectors of the boards or power input pins of the IC’s for voltage. Check the IC’s in order of SYSTEM CONTROL (IC103), ROM (IC107 or IC108), AVD (IC503), and ARP & SERVO (IC302). If correct voltage is not outputted, the power line will be shorted, or soldering or IC will be faulty. • Reset signal check Check that the XFRRST (uh pin) of SYSTEM CONTROL (IC103) is “H” (3.3 V). If not “H”, a soldering failure of that line, a shot with other line, or faulty SYSTEM CONTROL (IC103) is doubtful. • XRD, XWRH, and CS0X signals check Using an oscilloscope, measure the XRD (u; pin), XWRH (ua pin), and CS0X (tk pin) of the SYSTEM CONTROL (IC103) to check if they are fixed to “L” (0 V) or “H” (3.3 V), or if they are on the intermediate potential between “L” and “H”. If they are fixed to “L” or “H”, or on the intermediate potential, a soldering failure of that line, a shot with other line, or faulty SYSTEM CONTROL (IC103) is doubtful. • HA [0 – 21] and HD [0 – 15] signals check Using an oscilloscope, measure the HA [0 – 21] ( – , – , , 1 – 5 pins) and HD [0 – 15] (ig – pins) of the SYSTEM CONTROL (IC103) to check if they are fixed to “L” (0 V) or “H” (3.3 V), or if HA is on the intermediate potential between “L” and “H” (HD is on intermediate potential in normal state), or if same waveform as that of adjacent pins is measured. In case of “L” or “H”, intermediate potential, or same waveform, a soldering failure of that line, a shot with other line, or faulty SYSTEM CONTROL (IC103) is doubtful.

If the above checking could not find a fault, check the outputted CS signal. If CS signal other than CS0X is outputted, a mounting failure of each IC or faulty IC that corresponds to active CS signal is doubtful. CS2X, CS3X: AVD (IC503) CS4X, CS5X: ARP & SERVO (IC302) 2. Test mode menu is displayed, but operation stops when a menu is selected Using an oscilloscope, measure the PLCK0 (og pin) of the ARP & SERVO (IC302) to check if it is fixed to “L” (0 V) or “H” (3.3 V). If fixed to “L” or “H”, the ARP & SERVO (IC302) is faulty. If not fixed, check the items in 1-2. in order.

6-18

3. Specific item failed in Diag All Check A mounting failure of IC or faulty IC for that item is doubtful. If “1901NG” is displayed, a loose connection of CN801, mounting failure of AUDIO DSP (IC701), or faulty IC is doubtful.

4. At [POWER] button ON, LED lights in green but fluorescent display tube does not light Loose connection between power supply block and AI-23 board, loose connection of connectors, or faulty AI-23 board is doubtful.

4. Picture and sound are not outputted Check the CN801 and CN802 for connection, and the flat cable for damage or loose connection.

5. Picture and sound are not outputted Loose connection between power supply block and AI-23 board or between AI-23 board and MB-98 board, loose connection of connectors, or faulty AI-23 board is doubtful.

5. Picture is outputted, but sound is not outputted A mounting failure of AUDIO DSP (IC701) or AUDIO DAC (IC802, IC803), power supply failure, or faulty IC is doubtful. 6. Sound is outputted, but picture is not outputted Using an oscilloscope, measure the yd, yh, yl, uf, uj, and i; pins of AVD (IC503) to check if analog signals are outputted respectively. If not outputted, a soldering failure of that line, a short with other line, missing capacitor or resistor, or faulty AVD is doubtful.

6-11-3. Drive Auto Adjustment stops by an error Faulty analog circuits of ARP & SERVO (IC302) or faulty peripheral circuits of DIGITAL SERVO (IC202) on the MB-98 board, faulty optical pickup, or loose connection of flat cable is doubtful.

6-11-4. Power is Supplied but Unstable If Syscon Diagnosis completed successfully, basically the boards other than MB-98 board, connection, optical pickup, or mechanical deck will be faulty. 1. Red LED does not light when AC is supplied Check if the specified voltage is outputted from the EVER –11 V (3 pin), EVER +3.3 V (qa pin), and EVER +11 V (qd pin) of CN201 or CN920 in the power supply block. If not outputted, the power supply block will be faulty.

6. Picture is out outputted correctly A mounting failure of BNR (IC601) on the MB-98 board, or faulty AVD (IC503) or ARP & SERVO (IC302), or faulty 27 MHz output (frequency, waveform) from 27-1OUT (3 pin) of PLL (IC102) is doubtful.

6-11-5. Power is not Supplied 1. Red LED does not light when AC is supplied The power (EVER +3.3 V) is not supplied to the IF CON (IC404) on the AI-23 board. The X401 does not oscillate. 2. At [POWER] button ON, LED is kept in red (standby state) Any button has been pressed. The voltage at PONCHK (e; pin) of the IF CON (IC404) on the AI-23 board exceeds 0.5 V. 3. At [POWER] button ON, LED lights in green but returns to red (standby state) after several seconds The PONCHK (e; pin) of the IF CON (IC404) on the AI-23 board is abnormal (slow rising from 0.5 V to more than 1.5 V, or voltage not rising to more than 1.5 V). The SYSTEM CONTROL (IC103) on the MB-98 board is faulty.

2. At [POWER] button ON, LED does not light in green even once, but kept in red (standby state) Check if the specified voltage is outputted from the EVER –11 V (3 pin), EVER +3.3 V (qa pin), and EVER +11 V (qd pin) of CN201 or CN920 in the power supply block. If not outputted, the power supply block will be faulty. Check the P-CONT (2 pin) of CN401 on the AI-23 board if it becomes “H”. If not “H”, a soldering failure of that line, a short with other line, missing capacitor or resistor, faulty AVD (IC503), loose connection between power supply block and AI-23 board, loose connection of connectors, faulty power supply block, or faulty AI-23 board is doubtful. 3. At [POWER] button ON, LED lights in green but returns to red (standby state) after several seconds (e.g. it returns to standby state after “SONY DVD” was displayed) There is no regularity between faulty parts and timing when the set returns to the standby state). Check if the specified voltage is outputted from the power supply block. If not outputted, the power supply block will be faulty. Check the XFRRST (9 pin) of CN101 on the MB-98 board if it is fixed to “L”, or the XIBUSY (0 pin), XIFCS (qa pin), SI0 (qs pin), SO0 (qd pin) and SC0 (qf pin) of CN101 if they are fixed to “L” or “H”. If fixed to “L” or “H”, a soldering failure of that line, a short with other line, missing capacitor or resistor, or faulty AVD (IC503) is doubtful. If not fixed to “L” or “H”, loose connection between power supply block and AI-23 board or between AI-23 board and MB-98 board, loose connection of connectors, or faulty AI-23 board is doubtful.

6-19 6-19E

DVP-NS400D SECTION 7 ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENT 7-1. POWER SUPPLY CHECK

In making adjustment, refer to 7-3. Adjustment Related Parts Arrangement.

1. HS13S0E/HS13S0F/HS13S0U/TOP-244U Boards Note: During diagnostic check, the characters and color bars can be seen only with the NTSC monitor. Therefore, for diagnostic check, use the monitor that supports both NTSC and PAL modes. Use the reference disc for PAL for check, and use the reference disc for NTSC for adjustment.

Mode

E-E

Instrument

Digital voltmeter

EVER +3.3 V Check Test point

CN201/CN920 pin qa

Specification

3.5 ± 0.2 Vdc

This section describes procedures and instructions necessary for adjusting electrical circuits in this set.

SW +3.3 V Check Test point

CN201/CN920 pin 8

Instruments required: 1) Color monitor TV 2) Oscilloscope 1 or 2 phenomena, band width over 100 MHz, with delay mode 3) Frequency counter (over 8 digits) 4) Digital voltmeter 5) Standard commander (RMT-D128A/D128P) 6) DVD reference disc HLX-501 (J-6090-071-A) (dual layer) (NTSC) HLX-503 (J-6090-069-A) (single layer) (NTSC) HLX-504 (J-6090-088-A) (single layer) (NTSC) HLX-505 (J-6090-089-A) (dual layer) (NTSC) HLX-506 (J-6090-077-A) (single layer) (PAL) HLX-507 (J-6090-078-A)(dual layer) (PAL) 7) SACD reference disc HLXA-509 (J-6090-090-A) 8) Extension Cable (J-6090-107-A)

Specification

3.3 ± 0.2 Vdc

+5 V Check Test point

CN201/CN920 pin qs

Specification

5.0 ± 0.3 Vdc

SW +11 V Check Test point

CN201/CN920 pin 6, 7

Specification

11.5

+1.0 –1.5 Vdc

EVER +11 V Check Test point

CN201/CN920 pin qd

Specification

11.0 ± 1.0 Vdc

EVER –11 V Check

Abbreviation: AR : Argentina BR : Brazilian CND : Canadian MX : Mexican

Test point

CN201/CN920 pin 3

Specification

–11.0 ± 1.0 Vdc

Checking method: 1) Confirm that each voltage satisfies the specification.

7-1

3. Checking S Video Output S-C This checks whether the S-C satisfies the NTSC/PAL Standard. If it is not correct, the colors will be too dark or light.

7-2. ADJUSTMENT OF VIDEO SYSTEM 1. Video Level Adjustment (MB-98 BOARD) This adjustment is made to satisfy the NTSC/PAL standard, and if not adjusted correctly, the brightness will be too large or small.

Mode

Video level adjustment in test mode

Signal

Color bars

Mode

Video level adjustment in test mode

Signal

Color bars

Test point

S VIDEO OUT (S-C) connector (75 Ω terminated)

Test point

LINE OUT (VIDEO) connector (75 Ω terminated)

Instrument

Oscilloscope

Instrument

Oscilloscope

Specification

A = 286 ± 30 mVp-p (NTSC) A = 300 ± 100 mVp-p (PAL)

Adjusting element

RV501

Specification

1.0

+0.04 –0.02

Checking method: 1) In the test mode initial menu “6” Video Level Adjustment, set so that color bars are generated. 2) Confirm that the S-C burst is “A”.

Vp-p

Adjusting method: 1) In the test mode initial menu “6” Video Level Adjustment, set so that color bars are generated. 2) Adjust the RV501 to attain 1.0 +0.04 –0.02 Vp-p.

A

1.0

+0.04 –0.02

Vp-p

Figure 7-3 4. Checking Component Video Output Y (US, CND, E, MX, AR, BR Model) This checks component video output Y. If it is incorrect, correct brightness will not be attained when connected to, for instance, projector.

Figure 7-1 2. Checking S Video Output S-Y Check S-terminal video output. If it is incorrect, pictures will not be displayed correctly in spite of connection to the TV with a Sterminal cable. Mode

Video level adjustment in test mode

Signal

Color bars

Test point

S VIDEO OUT (S-Y) connector (75 Ω terminated)

Instrument

Oscilloscope

Specification

1.0 ± 0.05 Vp-p

Mode

Video level adjustment in test mode

Signal

Color bars

Test point

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT (Y) connector (75 Ω terminated)

Instrument

Oscilloscope

Specification

1.0 ± 0.05 Vp-p

Checking method: 1) In the test mode initial menu “6” Video Level Adjustment, set so that color bars are generated. 2) Confirm that the Y level is 1.0 ± 0.05 Vp-p.

Checking method: 1) In the test mode initial menu “6” Video Level Adjustment, set so that color bars are generated. 2) Confirm that the S-Y level is 1.0 ± 0.05 Vp-p.

1.0 ± 0.05 Vp-p

1.0 ± 0.05 Vp-p

Figure 7-4 Figure 7-2

7-2

5. Checking Component Video Output B-Y (US, CND, E, MX, AR, BR Model) This checks component video output B-Y. If it is incorrect, correct colors will not be displayed when connected to, for instance, projector. Mode

Video level adjustment in test mode

Signal

Color bars

Test point

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT (PB) connector (75 Ω terminated)

Instrument

Oscilloscope

Specification

700 ± 50 mVp-p

7. Checking RGB Output R (AEP, UK Model) This checks RGB output R. If it is incorrect, pictures will not be displayed correctly in spite of connection to the TV with an EURO AV connecting cord.

Mode

Checking method: 1) In the test mode initial menu “6” Video Level Adjustment, set so that color bars are generated. 2) Confirm that the B-Y level is 700 ± 50 mVp-p.

In test mode, Push [0] for Syscon Diagnosis and push [7] for Video and push [5] for RGB out

Signal

Color bars

Test point

LINE 1 (RGB)-TV connector pin qg (75 Ω terminated)

Instrument

Oscilloscope

Specification

700 ± 50 mVp-p

Checking method: 1) Confirm that the R level is 700 ± 50 mVp-p.

700 ± 50 mVp-p 700 ± 50 mVp-p

Figure 7-7 Figure 7-5

8. Checking RGB Output G (AEP, UK Model) This checks RGB output G. If it is incorrect, pictures will not be displayed correctly in spite of connection to the TV with an EURO AV connecting cord.

6. Checking Component Video Output R-Y (US, CND, E, MX, AR, BR Model) This checks component video output R-Y. If it is incorrect, correct colors will not be displayed when connected to, for instance, projector.

Mode

In test mode, Push [0] for Syscon Diagnosis and push [7] for Video and push [5] for RGB out

Mode

Video level adjustment in test mode

Signal

Color bars

Signal

Color bars

Test point

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT (PR) connector (75 Ω terminated)

Test point

LINE 1 (RGB)-TV connector pin qa (75 Ω terminated)

Instrument

Oscilloscope

Instrument

Oscilloscope

Specification

700 ± 50 mVp-p

Specification

700 ± 50 mVp-p

Checking method: 1) In the test mode initial menu “6” Video Level Adjustment, set so that color bars are generated. 2) Confirm that the R-Y level is 700 ± 50 mVp-p.

Checking method: 1) Confirm that the G level is 700 ± 50 mVp-p.

700 ± 50 mVp-p

Figure 7-8

700 ± 50 mVp-p

Figure 7-6

7-3

9. Checking RGB Output B (AEP, UK Model) This checks RGB output B. If it is incorrect, pictures will not be displayed correctly in spite of connection to the TV with an EURO AV connecting cord.

Mode

In test mode, Push [0] for Syscon Diagnosis and push [7] for Video and push [5] for RGB out

Signal

Color bars

Test point

LINE 1 (RGB)-TV connector pin 7 (75 Ω terminated)

Instrument

Oscilloscope

Specification

700 ± 50 mVp-p

Checking method: 1) Confirm that the B level is 700 ± 50 mVp-p.

700 ± 50 mVp-p

Figure 7-9

7-4

7-3. ADJUSTMENT RELATED PARTS ARRANGEMENT MB-98 BOARD (SIDE A)

RV501 VIDEO LEVEL ADJ IC503

HS13S0E/HS13S0F/HS13S0U/TOP-244U BOARDS (SIDE A)

13

1 CN201/CN920

7-6 E

DVP-NS400D SECTION 8 REPAIR PARTS LIST 8-1.

Ref. No.

EXPLODED VIEWS

1 NOTE: • -XX and -X mean standardized parts, so they may have some difference from the original one. • Items marked “*” are not stocked since they are seldom required for routine service. Some delay should be anticipated when ordering these items. • Color Indication of Appearance Parts Example: KNOB, BALANCE (WHITE) . . . (RED) ↑ ↑ Parts Color Cabinet's Color

The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified.

• The mechanical parts with no reference number in the exploded views are not supplied. • Accessories and packing materials are given in the last of the electrical parts list. • Abbreviation Les composants identifiés par une AR : Argentina marque 0 sont critiquens pour la BR : Brazilian sécurité. CND : Canadian Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié. MX : Mexican • Description about model name DPX14xxBJ Name of production country J : Japan M : Malaysia Color of set B : Black H : Titanium gray

Part No.

Description

Remark

Ref. No.

3-067-237-01 EMBLEM (V), DVD (US, CND, AEP (DPX1411BM), AEP (DPX1412BM), UK (DPX1411BM)) 3-067-237-11 EMBLEM (V), DVD (AEP (DPX1411HM), AEP (DPX1412HM), UK (DPX1411HM), E, MX, AR, BR) 3-067-235-01 COVER (H), TRAY (US (DPX1410BJ), CND (DPX1410BJ)) 3-067-235-11 COVER (H), TRAY (US (DPX1410BM), CND (DPX1410BM), AEP (DPX1411BM), AEP (DPX1412BM), UK (DPX1411BM)) 3-067-236-01 COVER (P), TRAY (AEP (DPX1411HM), AEP (DPX1412HM), UK (DPX1411HM), E, MX, AR, BR)

6

3 4 5 5 5

3-067-225-01 3-059-349-11 A-6062-600-A X-3951-513-1 X-3951-514-1

11

5

X-3951-517-1 FRONT PANEL ASSY (AEP (DPX1411HM), AEP (DPX1412HM), UK (DPX1411HM)) X-3951-540-1 FRONT PANEL ASSY (E, MX, AR)

1

2 2

2

8-1-1. CASE ASSEMBLY

WINDOW CUSHION, FOOT FRONT PANEL ASSY (BR) FRONT PANEL ASSY (US) FRONT PANEL ASSY (AEP (DPX1411BM), AEP (DPX1412BM), UK (DPX1411BM))

6

7 8 9 10 10

11 12 12

6

5

12 6

11

6

5

7 2

8 3 1 9

4 10

8-1

8-2

Part No.

Description

Remark

3-710-901-11 SCREW, TAPPING (US, CND, AEP (DPX1411BM), AEP (DPX1412BM), UK (DPX1411BM)) 3-710-901-61 SCREW, TAPPING (AEP (DPX1411HM), AEP (DPX1412HM), UK (DPX1411HM), E, MX, AR, BR) 3-068-890-01 CUSHION, REAR LEG 3-970-608-51 SUMITITE (B3), +BV 1-786-131-11 SWITCH, TACTILE 3-067-238-11 CURSOR STICK (US, CND, AEP (DPX1411BM), AEP (DPX1412BM), UK (DPX1411BM)) 3-067-238-21 CURSOR STICK (AEP (DPX1411HM), AEP (DPX1412HM), UK (DPX1411HM), E, MX, AR, BR) 1-476-604-11 REMOTE COMMANDER (RMT-D128A) (US, CND, E, MX, AR, BR) 1-476-605-11 REMOTE COMMANDER (RMT-D128P) (AEP, UK) 3-068-047-01 CASE (EXCEPT AEP (DPX1411HM)) 3-068-047-11 CASE (AEP (DPX1411HM), AEP (DPX1412HM), UK (DPX1411HM), E, BR)

Ref. No.

8-1-2. CHASSIS ASSEMBLY

* * * *

55 not supplied

55

63

64

51 51 51 51 52

Description

POWER BLOCK (HS13S0U) (US, CND, MX) POWER BLOCK (TOP-244U) (US, CND) POWER BLOCK (HS13S0E) (AEP, UK, AR) POWER BLOCK (HS13S0F) (E, BR) BUTTON (POWER) (US, CND, AEP (DPX1411BM), AEP (DPX1412BM), UK (DPX1411BM))

Remark

Ref. No.

Part No.

* 59 * 60

A-6065-707-A AI-23 BOARD, COMPLETE (BR) A-6065-643-A MB-98 BOARD, COMPLETE (US (DPX1410BJ), CND (DPX1410BJ)) A-6065-665-A MB-98 BOARD, COMPLETE (US (DPX1410BM), CND (DPX1410BM)) A-6065-667-A MB-98 BOARD, COMPLETE (E, MX, AR, BR) A-6065-669-A MB-98 BOARD, COMPLETE (AEP (DPX1411BM), AEP (DPX1411HM), UK)

* 60 * 60 * 60

62 52

53 54 55 0 56

3-067-232-21 BUTTON (POWER) (AEP (DPX1411HM), AEP (DPX1412HM), UK (DPX1411HM), E, MX, AR, BR) 3-059-321-11 INDICATOR (P) 3-067-233-11 JOINT (POWER) 3-970-608-11 SUMITITE (B3), +BV 1-757-140-11 CORD, POWER (AEP, UK, E, BR)

0 56 0 56 57 * 59

1-757-571-11 1-757-901-11 3-050-569-01 A-6065-642-A

61 55 Mechanism deck

55

55

Part No. 1-468-583-11 1-468-584-11 1-468-585-11 1-468-586-11 3-067-232-11

65 60

* 59

56

* 59

53

CORD, POWER (US, CND, MX) CORD, POWER (AR) SUMITITE (B3), +WHD AI-23 BOARD, COMPLETE (US (DPX1410BJ), CND (DPX1410BJ)) A-6065-664-A AI-23 BOARD, COMPLETE (US (DPX1410BM), CND (DPX1410BM), E, MX, AR)

* 60

Description

Remark

61 62 63 64

A-6065-671-A MB-98 BOARD, COMPLETE (AEP (DPX1412BM), AEP (DPX1412HM)) 1-757-696-11 CABLE, FLEXIBLE FLAT (FMA-024) 1-757-695-11 CABLE, FLEXIBLE FLAT (FMA-023) 1-757-693-11 CABLE, FLEXIBLE FLAT (FMO-001) 1-757-694-11 CABLE, FLEXIBLE FLAT (FMO-002)

65 66 67 69 70

1-757-697-11 4-966-267-12 3-970-608-51 3-067-248-01 3-069-090-01

* 71 72

CABLE, FLEXIBLE FLAT (FMM-035) BUSHING (FBS001), CORD SUMITITE (B3), +BV LED HOLDER COVER, EJECT

A-6065-670-A ER-15 BOARD, COMPLETE COMPL (AEP, UK) 1-757-699-11 CABLE, FLEXIBLE FLAT (FAE-005) (AEP, UK)

A-6065-668-A AI-23 BOARD, COMPLETE (AEP, UK)

69 57 57 54

The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified.

59 66 52

67 67 51

not supplied

70

67

not supplied

67 67

72

AEP, UK

8-3

71

not supplied

8-4

Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié.

8-1-3. MECHANISM DECK ASSEMBLY

not supplied not supplied

not supplied

not supplied

not supplied

not supplied

not supplied

not supplied

not supplied

not supplied

102

not supplied

102

not supplied

103

102 103

101

104 103

The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified.

Ref. No. 101 101

Part No.

Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié.

Description

Remark

A-6062-514-A LOADING ASSY (M) (US (DPX1410BM), CND (DPX1410BM), AEP, UK, E, MX, AR, BR) A-6062-517-A LOADING ASSY (J) (US (DPX1410BJ), CND (DPX1410BJ))

Ref. No.

Part No.

102 103 0 104

3-053-847-11 INSULATOR 3-067-344-01 INSULATOR SCREW A-4900-634-A OPTICAL PICK-UP KHM-240 AAA/J1NP

8-5

Description

Remark

AI-23 8-2. ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST NOTE: • Due to standardization, replacements in the parts list may be different from the parts specified in the diagrams or the components used on the set. • -XX and -X mean standardized parts, so they may have some difference from the original one. • RESISTORS All resistors are in ohms. METAL: Metal-film resistor. METAL OXIDE: Metal oxide-film resistor. F: nonflammable • Not all of the parts for POWER BLOCK (HS13S0E, HS13S0F, HS13S0U and TOP244U) are listed. • Items marked “*” are not stocked since they are seldom required for routine service. Some delay should be anticipated when ordering these items.

• SEMICONDUCTORS In each case, u: µ, for example: uA. . : µA. . uPA. . : µPA. . uPB. . : µPB. . uPC. . : µPC. . uPD. . : µPD. . • CAPACITORS uF: µF • COILS uH: µH • Abbreviation AR : Argentina BR : Brazilian CND : Canadian MX : Mexican • Description about model name DPX14xxBJ Name of production country J : Japan Color of set M : Malaysia B : Black H : Titanium gray

Part No.

*

A-6065-642-A AI-23 BOARD, COMPLETE (US (DPX1410BJ), CND (DPX1410BJ)) A-6065-664-A AI-23 BOARD, COMPLETE (US (DPX1410BM), CND (DPX1410BM), E, MX, AR) A-6065-668-A AI-23 BOARD, COMPLETE (AEP, UK) A-6065-707-A AI-23 BOARD, COMPLETE (BR) ********************* (Ref.No. 1,000 Series)

* * *

Description

Ref. No.

Ref. No.

Remark

3-067-239-11 HOLDER, FL (US (DPX1410BJ), CND(DPX1410BJ), BR) 3-067-239-01 HOLDER, FL (US (DPX1410BM), CND (DPX1410BM), AEP, UK, E, MX, AR) < BUZZER > BZ401

1-529-986-11 BUZZER, VOLTAGE < CAPACITOR >

C101 C102 C109 C110 C111

1-162-970-11 1-104-664-11 1-165-176-11 1-104-664-11 1-104-664-11

CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CERAMIC CHIP ELECT ELECT

0.01uF 47uF 0.047uF 47uF 47uF

10% 20% 10% 20% 20%

25V 16V 16V 16V 16V

C112 C113 C114 C202 C203

1-107-826-11 1-104-664-11 1-107-826-11 1-164-739-11 1-164-739-11

CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP

0.1uF 47uF 0.1uF 560PF 560PF

10% 20% 10% 5% 5%

16V 16V 16V 50V 50V

C204 C205 C206 C207 C208

1-162-970-11 1-164-218-11 1-164-218-11 1-162-970-11 1-164-218-11

CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP

0.01uF 180PF 180PF 0.01uF 180PF

10% 5% 5% 10% 5%

25V 50V 50V 25V 50V

C209 C210 C212 C213 C214

1-164-218-11 1-104-664-11 1-164-230-11 1-126-960-11 1-104-664-11

CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CERAMIC CHIP ELECT ELECT

180PF 47uF 220PF 1uF 47uF

5% 20% 5% 20% 20%

50V 16V 50V 50V 16V

C215 C216

1-104-664-11 ELECT 1-126-960-11 ELECT

47uF 1uF

20% 20%

16V 50V (AEP, UK)

8-6

Part No.

The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified. Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiquens pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié. When indicating parts by reference number, please include the board.

Description

Remark

C217 C218 C225

1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1-104-664-11 ELECT

0.01uF 0.01uF 47uF

10% 10% 20%

25V 25V 16V

C226 C227 C228

1-104-664-11 ELECT 1-104-664-11 ELECT 1-164-230-11 CERAMIC CHIP

47uF 47uF 220PF

20% 20% 5%

C229

1-164-230-11 CERAMIC CHIP

220PF

5%

C305

1-126-767-11 ELECT

1000uF

20%

C306 C309 C313

1-126-960-11 ELECT 1-126-924-11 ELECT 1-164-315-11 CERAMIC CHIP

1uF 330uF 470PF

20% 20% 5%

C314

1-164-315-11 CERAMIC CHIP

470PF

5%

C315

1-164-315-11 CERAMIC CHIP

470PF

5%

C316

1-164-315-11 CERAMIC CHIP

470PF

5%

C317

1-164-315-11 CERAMIC CHIP

470PF

5%

C319 C320 C321

1-164-230-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1-164-230-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1-163-131-00 CERAMIC CHIP

220PF 220PF 390PF

5% 5% 5%

C322 C323 C324 C325 C326

1-163-131-00 1-164-217-11 1-115-416-11 1-164-739-11 1-162-964-11

CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP

390PF 150PF 0.001uF 560PF 0.001uF

5% 5% 5% 5% 10%

50V 50V 25V 50V 50V

C327 C328 C329 C330 C331

1-104-664-11 1-164-739-11 1-162-964-11 1-162-964-11 1-164-230-11

ELECT CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP

47uF 560PF 0.001uF 0.001uF 220PF

20% 5% 10% 10% 5%

16V 50V 50V 50V 50V

C332 C333 C334 C335 C336

1-163-131-00 1-115-416-11 1-164-230-11 1-163-131-00 1-164-217-11

CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP

390PF 0.001uF 220PF 390PF 150PF

5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

50V 25V 50V 50V 50V

16V 16V 50V (AEP, UK) 50V (AEP, UK) 16V 50V 6.3V 50V (AEP, UK) 50V (AEP, UK) 50V (AEP, UK) 50V (AEP, UK) 50V (AEP, UK) 50V 50V 50V

AI-23 Ref. No.

Part No.

Description

C337 C338 C339 C340 C341

1-104-664-11 1-104-664-11 1-104-664-11 1-104-664-11 1-104-664-11

ELECT ELECT ELECT ELECT ELECT

47uF 47uF 47uF 47uF 47uF

20% 20% 20% 20% 20%

16V 16V 16V 16V 16V

Remark

C342 C343 C344 C345 C346

1-104-664-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11

ELECT CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP

47uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF

20% 10% 10% 10% 10%

16V 25V 25V 25V 25V

C347 C348 C349 C401 C402

1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-115-416-11 1-162-970-11 1-124-589-11

CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT

0.01uF 0.01uF 0.001uF 0.01uF 47uF

10% 10% 5% 10% 20%

25V 25V 25V 25V 16V

C404 C407 C409 C411 C412

1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-126-933-11 1-162-970-11

CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CERAMIC CHIP

0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 100uF 0.01uF

10% 10% 10% 20% 10%

25V 25V 25V 16V 25V

C414 C416 C417 C419 C420

1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-968-11 1-104-666-11 1-162-970-11

CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CERAMIC CHIP

0.01uF 0.01uF 0.0047uF 220uF 0.01uF

10% 10% 10% 20% 10%

25V 25V 50V 25V 25V

C421 C422 C423 C425 C427

1-162-964-11 1-115-339-11 1-107-826-11 1-128-131-11 1-162-970-11

CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CERAMIC CHIP

0.001uF 0.1uF 0.1uF 22uF 0.01uF

10% 10% 10% 20% 10%

50V 50V 16V 50V 25V

C428 C429 C430 C431 C432

1-162-970-11 1-126-933-11 1-163-131-00 1-115-339-11 1-162-970-11

CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP

0.01uF 100uF 390PF 0.1uF 0.01uF

10% 20% 5% 10% 10%

25V 16V 50V 50V 25V

C436 C437 C438 C439

1-163-131-00 1-162-970-11 1-124-584-00 1-107-826-11

CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CERAMIC CHIP

390PF 0.01uF 100uF 0.1uF

5% 10% 20% 10%

50V 25V 10V 16V

Ref. No.

Part No.

Description

Remark

D402 D403

8-719-083-33 DIODE EB3803X-TP-J300K (DOLBY DIGITAL) 8-719-041-97 DIODE MA113-(TX)

D404 D405 D406 D412 D414

8-719-041-97 8-719-041-97 8-719-041-97 8-719-422-62 8-719-056-06

D415

8-719-056-06 DIODE SLR-342DCT32 (SURROUND)

DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE

MA113-(TX) MA113-(TX) MA113-(TX) MA8062-L-TX SLR-342DCT32 (BNR)

< EARTH TERMINAL > * ET201

< FERRITE BEAD > FB301 FB301 FB401

8-759-667-17 8-759-826-45 8-759-826-46 8-759-052-52 8-759-909-71

IC IC IC IC IC

L79M05TLL-SONY-TL LA73050-TLM (US, CND, E, MX, AR, BR) LA73051-TLM (AEP, UK) NJM78M05DL1A-TE1 BA4558F-E2

IC203 IC302 IC303 IC304 IC401

8-749-017-80 8-759-909-71 8-759-909-71 8-759-909-71 8-749-019-11

IC IC IC IC IC

GP1FA551TZ (DIGITAL OUT - OPTICAL) BA4558F-E2 BA4558F-E2 BA4558F-E2 GP1UD28SYK

IC403 IC404 IC405

8-759-832-23 IC AN80P18RSPE1 6-800-321-01 IC TMP86CK74F-3CB8 8-759-684-35 IC S-80830ANUP-EDT-T2 < JACK >

J101 J101 J102

J103

CN403 * CN405

1-815-149-11 CONNECTOR, FPC/FFC (1MM PIC) 21P (AEP, UK) 1-815-390-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 25P 1-785-696-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 15P 1-778-317-11 CONNECTOR, BOARD TO BOARD 13P 1-815-381-11 CONNECTOR, FPC/FFC 5P 1-815-458-21 CONNECTOR, BOARD TO BOARD 15P 1-785-530-11 PIN, CONNECTOR (PC BOARD) 10P < DIODE >

D004

D201

8-719-071-15 DIODE HZM6.8ZWA1TL (US, CND, E, MX, AR, BR) 8-719-071-15 DIODE HZM6.8ZWA1TL 8-719-071-15 DIODE HZM6.8ZWA1TL 8-719-071-15 DIODE HZM6.8ZWA1TL (US, CND, E, MX, AR, BR) 8-719-914-43 DIODE DAN202K-T-146

D202 D203 D301

8-719-914-44 DIODE DAP202K-T-146 8-719-914-44 DIODE DAP202K-T-146 (AEP, UK) 8-719-988-61 DIODE 1SS355TE-17

D005 D006 D007

0 (US, CND, E, MX, AR, BR) 0uH (AEP, UK) 0uH

IC101 IC102 IC102 IC201 IC202

J103

CN203 CN301 CN401 CN402

1-216-295-11 SHORT 1-414-233-22 FERRITE 1-469-324-21 FERRITE < IC >

< CONNECTOR > CN102

1-537-738-21 TERMINAL, EARTH

8-7

J201 J302

1-815-358-11 JACK, PIN (3P) (LINE OUT) (AEP, UK) 1-815-362-11 JACK, PIN (6P) (LINE OUT) (US, CND, E, MX, AR, BR) 1-815-360-11 JACK, PIN (3P) (COMPONENT VIDEO OUT) (US, CND, E, MX, AR, BR) 1-694-484-21 TERMINAL, S (2P.V) (S VIDEO OUT) (US, CND, E, MX, AR, BR) 1-794-198-11 CONNECTOR, S TERMINAL (S VIDEO OUT) (AEP, UK) 1-793-446-21 JACK, PIN 1P (DIGITAL OUT - COAXIAL) 1-785-536-11 JACK, PIN (6P) (5.1CH OUTPUT) < JUMPER RESISTOR >

JR100 JR101 JR102 JR103 JR104

1-216-295-11 1-216-295-11 1-216-295-11 1-216-295-11 1-216-295-11

SHORT SHORT SHORT SHORT SHORT

0 0 0 0 0

JR105 JR107 JR108 JR109 JR110

1-216-295-11 1-216-295-11 1-216-295-11 1-216-295-11 1-216-295-11

SHORT SHORT SHORT SHORT SHORT

0 0 0 0 0

JR112 JR114 JR115 JR116

1-216-295-11 1-216-295-11 1-216-295-11 1-216-295-11

SHORT SHORT SHORT SHORT

0 0 0 0

AI-23 Ref. No.

Part No.

Description

Remark

Ref. No.

Part No.

Description

Remark

JR117

1-216-295-11 SHORT

0

R122

1-216-049-11 RES-CHIP

JR118 JR119 JR121 JR125 JR400

1-216-295-11 1-216-295-11 1-216-295-11 1-216-295-11 1-216-295-11

SHORT SHORT SHORT SHORT SHORT

0 0 0 0 0

R126

1-216-021-00 METAL CHIP

R127

1-216-021-00 METAL CHIP

R128

1-216-021-00 METAL CHIP

JR401 JR402 JR404 JR409 JR411

1-216-295-11 1-216-295-11 1-216-295-11 1-216-295-11 1-216-295-11

SHORT SHORT SHORT SHORT SHORT

0 0 0 0 0

R129 R130

1-216-073-00 METAL CHIP 1-216-021-00 METAL CHIP

R131 R132

1-216-021-00 METAL CHIP 1-216-021-00 METAL CHIP

R133

1-216-021-00 METAL CHIP

10K 5% 1/10W 68 5% 1/10W (US, CND, E, MX, AR, BR) 68 5% 1/10W 68 5% 1/10W (US, CND, E, MX, AR, BR) 68 5% 1/10W

R134 R135

1-216-021-00 METAL CHIP 1-216-021-00 METAL CHIP

68 68

R201 R202 R203

1-208-798-11 METAL CHIP 1-208-798-11 METAL CHIP 1-208-798-11 METAL CHIP

5% 1/10W 5% 1/10W (US, CND, E, MX, AR, BR) 4.7K 0.5% 1/10W 4.7K 0.5% 1/10W 4.7K 0.5% 1/10W

R204 R205 R206 R207 R208

1-208-798-11 1-208-800-11 1-208-800-11 1-216-057-00 1-216-057-00

METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP

4.7K 5.6K 5.6K 2.2K 2.2K

0.5% 0.5% 0.5% 5% 5%

1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W

R209 R210 R211 R212 R213

1-216-057-00 1-216-057-00 1-208-800-11 1-216-065-00 1-208-800-11

METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP RES-CHIP METAL CHIP

2.2K 2.2K 5.6K 4.7K 5.6K

5% 5% 0.5% 5% 0.5%

1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W

R215 R217 R218

1-216-033-00 METAL CHIP 1-216-021-00 METAL CHIP 1-216-065-00 RES-CHIP

220 68 4.7K

5% 5% 5%

R219 R220

1-216-073-00 METAL CHIP 1-216-049-11 RES-CHIP

10K 1K

5% 5%

1/10W 1/10W 1/10W (AEP, UK) 1/10W 1/10W

< COIL > L101 L401

1-412-064-11 INDUCTOR 1-408-978-21 INDUCTOR

100uH 47uH

< FLUORESCENT INDICATOR TUBE > ND401

1-517-972-11 INDICATOR TUBE, FLUORESCENT

1K

5%

1/10W (AEP, UK) 68 5% 1/10W (US, CND, E, MX, AR, BR) 68 5% 1/10W (US, CND, E, MX, AR, BR) 68 5% 1/10W (US, CND, E, MX, AR, BR)

< IC LINK > 0 PS401 0 PS402

1-576-509-21 LINK, IC (1.0 A) 1-576-509-21 LINK, IC (1.0 A) < TRANSISTOR >

Q104 Q105 Q106

8-729-421-19 TRANSISTOR 8-729-424-08 TRANSISTOR 8-729-216-22 TRANSISTOR

Q201 Q202

8-729-230-49 TRANSISTOR 8-729-421-19 TRANSISTOR

UN2213-TX UN2111-TX 2SA1162-YG-TE85L (AEP, UK) 2SC2712-YG-TE85L UN2213-TX

Q204 Q205 Q206 Q207 Q208

8-729-027-53 8-729-216-22 8-729-046-97 8-729-046-97 8-729-027-53

TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR

DTC124TKA-T146 2SB709A-QRS-TX 2SD1938 (F) -T (TX).SO 2SD1938 (F) -T (TX).SO DTC124TKA-T146 (AEP, UK)

Q209 Q210 Q302 Q303 Q304

8-729-216-22 8-729-421-19 8-729-421-19 8-729-027-53 8-729-216-22

TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR

2SB709A-QRS-TX (AEP, UK) UN2213-TX (AEP, UK) UN2213-TX DTC124TKA-T146 2SB709A-QRS-TX

R221 R222 R223 R224 R225

1-216-049-11 1-216-073-00 1-216-049-11 1-216-073-00 1-216-089-11

RES-CHIP METAL CHIP RES-CHIP METAL CHIP RES-CHIP

1K 10K 1K 10K 47K

5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W

Q305 Q306 Q307 Q308 Q309

8-729-046-97 8-729-046-97 8-729-046-97 8-729-046-97 8-729-046-97

TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR

2SD1938 (F) -T (TX).SO 2SD1938 (F) -T (TX).SO 2SD1938 (F) -T (TX).SO 2SD1938 (F) -T (TX).SO 2SD1938 (F) -T (TX).SO

R226 R227 R228 R229 R230

1-216-041-00 1-216-041-00 1-216-073-00 1-216-089-11 1-216-089-11

METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP

470 470 10K 47K 47K

5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W

Q310 Q311 Q312 Q313 Q401

8-729-046-97 8-729-049-31 8-729-230-49 8-729-216-22 8-729-056-46

TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR

2SD1938 (F) -T (TX).SO 2SB710-RTX 2SC2712-YG-TE85L 2SB709A-QRS-TX 2SC5053T100Q

R231

1-216-073-00 METAL CHIP

10K

5%

R232

1-216-073-00 METAL CHIP

R233

1-216-089-11 RES-CHIP

Q402 Q404 Q405

8-729-056-46 TRANSISTOR 8-729-048-28 TRANSISTOR 8-729-424-08 TRANSISTOR

2SC5053T100Q 2SD1766-T100-QR UN2111-TX

R234 R235

1-216-065-00 RES-CHIP 1-216-065-00 RES-CHIP

R236

1-216-073-00 METAL CHIP

10K

5%

R237

1-216-065-00 RES-CHIP

4.7K

5%

< RESISTOR > R121

1-216-073-00 METAL CHIP

10K

5%

1/10W

8-8

The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified.

1/10W (AEP, UK) 10K 5% 1/10W (AEP, UK) 47K 5% 1/10W (AEP, UK) 4.7K 5% 1/10W 4.7K 5% 1/10W (US, CND, E, MX, AR, BR) 1/10W (AEP, UK) 1/10W (AEP, UK)

Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié.

AI-23 Ref. No.

Part No.

Description

Part No.

Description

R367 R368 R369 R370 R371

1-216-097-11 1-216-061-00 1-216-041-00 1-216-041-00 1-216-041-00

RES-CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP

100K 3.3K 470 470 470

5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W

1-216-041-00 METAL CHIP 1-216-065-00 RES-CHIP 1-216-065-00 RES-CHIP

470 5% 1/10W 470 5% 1/10W (US, CND, E, MX, AR, BR) 470 5% 1/10W 4.7K 5% 1/10W 4.7K 5% 1/10W

R372 R373 R374 R375 R376

1-216-041-00 1-216-041-00 1-216-041-00 1-216-089-11 1-216-089-11

METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP

470 470 470 47K 47K

5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W

R308 R309 R310 R311 R312

1-216-065-00 1-216-041-00 1-216-073-00 1-216-067-00 1-216-073-00

RES-CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP

4.7K 470 10K 5.6K 10K

5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W

R377 R378 R379 R380 R386

1-216-089-11 1-216-089-11 1-216-089-11 1-216-089-11 1-216-295-11

RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP SHORT

47K 47K 47K 47K 0

5% 5% 5% 5%

1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W

R313 R314 R322 R323 R324

1-216-097-11 1-216-105-00 1-216-073-00 1-216-073-00 1-216-089-11

RES-CHIP RES-CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP RES-CHIP

100K 220K 10K 10K 47K

5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W

R395 R399 R401 R402 R412

1-216-295-11 1-216-295-11 1-216-065-00 1-216-097-11 1-216-017-00

SHORT SHORT RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP

0 0 (AEP, UK) 4.7K 5% 100K 5% 47 5%

1/10W 1/10W 1/10W

R325 R326 R327 R328 R329

1-216-073-00 1-216-073-00 1-216-073-00 1-216-073-00 1-216-061-00

METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP

10K 10K 10K 10K 3.3K

5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W

R413 R414 R415 R416 R417

1-216-067-00 1-216-059-00 1-216-055-00 1-216-055-00 1-216-097-11

METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP RES-CHIP

5.6K 2.7K 1.8K 1.8K 100K

5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W

R330 R331 R332 R333 R334

1-216-061-00 1-216-061-00 1-216-061-00 1-216-069-00 1-216-069-00

METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP

3.3K 3.3K 3.3K 6.8K 6.8K

5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W

R418 R420 R421 R422 R423

1-216-073-00 1-216-025-11 1-216-059-00 1-216-071-00 1-216-081-00

METAL CHIP RES-CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP

10K 100 2.7K 8.2K 22K

5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W

R335 R336 R337 R338 R339

1-216-065-00 1-216-065-00 1-216-073-00 1-216-073-00 1-216-069-00

RES-CHIP RES-CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP

4.7K 4.7K 10K 10K 6.8K

5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W

R424 R425 R426 R427 R428

1-216-013-00 1-216-025-11 1-216-033-00 1-216-063-00 1-216-071-00

METAL CHIP RES-CHIP METAL CHIP RES-CHIP METAL CHIP

33 100 220 3.9K 8.2K

5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W

R340 R341 R342 R343 R344

1-216-089-11 1-216-073-00 1-216-069-00 1-216-083-00 1-216-057-00

RES-CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP

47K 10K 6.8K 27K 2.2K

5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W

R429 R430 R431 R433 R434

1-216-067-00 1-216-059-00 1-216-063-00 1-216-073-00 1-216-073-00

METAL CHIP METAL CHIP RES-CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP

5.6K 2.7K 3.9K 10K 10K

5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W

R345 R347 R348 R349 R350

1-216-055-00 1-216-057-00 1-216-057-00 1-216-055-00 1-216-055-00

METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP

1.8K 2.2K 2.2K 1.8K 1.8K

5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W

R435 R437 R440 R444 R446

1-216-073-00 1-216-027-00 1-216-073-00 1-216-025-11 1-216-097-11

METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP

10K 120 10K 100 100K

5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W

R351 R353 R354 R355 R356

1-216-057-00 1-216-061-00 1-216-057-00 1-216-073-00 1-216-055-00

METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP

2.2K 3.3K 2.2K 10K 1.8K

5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W

R448 R449 R450 R455 R470

1-216-073-00 1-216-073-00 1-216-073-00 1-216-073-00 1-216-073-00

METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP

10K 10K 10K 10K 10K

5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W

R357 R358 R359 R360 R361

1-216-069-00 1-216-057-00 1-216-089-11 1-216-073-00 1-216-069-00

METAL CHIP METAL CHIP RES-CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP

6.8K 2.2K 47K 10K 6.8K

5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W

R472 R474 R481 R482 R483

1-216-073-00 1-216-025-11 1-216-025-11 1-216-025-11 1-216-025-11

METAL CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP

10K 100 100 100 100

5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W

R362 R363 R364 R365 R366

1-216-083-00 1-216-061-00 1-216-061-00 1-216-061-00 1-216-061-00

METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP

27K 3.3K 3.3K 3.3K 3.3K

5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W

R484 R485 R486 R487 R490

1-216-025-11 1-216-025-11 1-216-033-00 1-216-033-00 1-216-081-00

RES-CHIP RES-CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP

100 100 220 220 22K

5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W

R238 R239

1-216-097-11 RES-CHIP 1-216-097-11 RES-CHIP

R240

1-216-041-00 METAL CHIP

R241 R242

1-216-041-00 METAL CHIP 1-216-041-00 METAL CHIP

R243 R301 R302

Remark 100K 100K

Ref. No.

5% 5%

1/10W 1/10W (AEP, UK) 470 5% 1/10W (US, CND, E, MX, AR, BR)

8-9

Remark

AI-23 Ref. No. R491

ER-15 Part No.

Description

1-216-081-00 METAL CHIP

Remark 22K

5%

Ref. No.

1/10W

< SWITCH > S401 S402 S403 S404 S405

1-771-574-21 1-771-574-21 1-771-574-21 1-771-574-21 1-771-574-21

SWITCH, TACTILE (BNR) SWITCH, TACTILE (TITLE) SWITCH, TACTILE (>) SWITCH, TACTILE (SURROUND) SWITCH, TACTILE (O RETURN)

S406 S407 S408 S409 S410

1-771-574-21 1-771-574-21 1-771-574-21 1-771-574-21 1-771-574-21

SWITCH, TACTILE (x) SWITCH, TACTILE (DVD MENU) SWITCH, TACTILE (.) SWITCH, TACTILE (DISPLAY) SWITCH, TACTILE (X)

S411 S412

1-771-574-21 SWITCH, TACTILE (H) 1-771-574-21 SWITCH, TACTILE (A)

1-435-947-11 TRANSFORMER, DC-DC CONVERT < VIBRATOR >

X401

1-781-472-21 VIBRATOR, CERAMIC (8 MHz)

A-6065-670-A ER-15 BOARD, COMPLETE (AEP, UK) ********************* (Ref. No. 1,000 Series)

*

Description

8-719-914-44 8-719-071-15 8-719-071-15 8-719-071-15 8-719-071-15

DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE

DAP202K-T-146 HZM6.8ZWA1TL HZM6.8ZWA1TL HZM6.8ZWA1TL HZM6.8ZWA1TL

Remark

D922 D924 D926 D927 D929

8-719-071-15 8-719-071-15 8-719-056-82 8-719-977-40 8-719-056-82

DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE

HZM6.8ZWA1TL HZM6.8ZWA1TL UDZ-TE-17-6.2B UDZ-TE-17-13B UDZ-TE-17-6.2B

D930

8-719-977-40 DIODE UDZ-TE-17-13B < FERRITE BEAD >

< TRANSFORMER > T401

Part No.

D907 D917 D918 D919 D920

FB901 FB901 FB901 FB903 FB903

1-414-766-22 1-469-130-11 1-469-796-21 1-414-766-22 1-469-130-11

FERRITE FERRITE FERRITE FERRITE FERRITE

0uH 0uH 0uH 0uH 0uH

FB903 FB904 FB904 FB904 FB905

1-469-796-21 1-414-766-22 1-469-130-11 1-469-796-21 1-414-766-22

FERRITE FERRITE FERRITE FERRITE FERRITE

0uH 0uH 0uH 0uH 0uH

FB905 FB905 FB907 FB907 FB907

1-469-130-11 1-469-796-21 1-414-766-22 1-469-130-11 1-469-796-21

FERRITE FERRITE FERRITE FERRITE FERRITE

0uH 0uH 0uH 0uH 0uH

FB908 FB908 FB908 FB909 FB909

1-414-766-22 1-469-130-11 1-469-796-21 1-414-766-22 1-469-130-11

FERRITE FERRITE FERRITE FERRITE FERRITE

0uH 0uH 0uH 0uH 0uH

FB909 FB910 FB910 FB910 FB911

1-469-796-21 1-414-766-22 1-469-130-11 1-469-796-21 1-414-233-22

FERRITE FERRITE FERRITE FERRITE FERRITE

0uH 0uH 0uH 0uH 0uH

FB913 FB916 FB918

1-414-233-22 FERRITE 1-414-233-22 FERRITE 1-414-233-22 FERRITE

0uH 0uH 0uH

< CAPACITOR > C901 C902 C903 C905 C907

1-104-664-11 1-104-664-11 1-104-664-11 1-104-664-11 1-104-664-11

ELECT ELECT ELECT ELECT ELECT

47uF 47uF 47uF 47uF 47uF

20% 20% 20% 20% 20%

16V 16V 16V 16V 16V

C913 C914 C927 C938 C940

1-127-715-11 1-127-715-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-927-11 1-162-927-11

CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP

0.22uF 0.22uF 0.01uF 100PF 100PF

10% 10% 10% 5% 5%

16V 16V 25V 50V 50V

C943 C945 C950 C951 C962

1-162-927-11 1-162-927-11 1-162-927-11 1-162-927-11 1-162-927-11

CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP

100PF 100PF 100PF 100PF 100PF

5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

50V 50V 50V 50V 50V

C963

1-162-927-11 CERAMIC CHIP

100PF

5%

50V

< IC > IC901

8-759-826-47 IC LA73052-TLM < JUMPER RESISTOR >

< CONNECTOR > CN901

JR901 JR903 JR904

1-815-387-11 CONNECTOR, FPC/FFC 21P

1-216-295-11 SHORT 1-216-295-11 SHORT 1-216-295-11 SHORT

0 0 0

< JACK > < COIL > CNJ901 1-251-780-11 SOCKET, PIN (21P) (LINE 2) CNJ902 1-251-780-11 SOCKET, PIN (21P) (LINE 1 (RGB) - TV)

L905

1-412-064-11 INDUCTOR < TRANSISTOR >

< DIODE > D901 D902 D903 D904 D905

8-719-988-61 8-719-988-61 8-719-988-61 8-719-988-61 8-719-988-61

DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE

100uH

Q901 Q902 Q903 Q906 Q907

1SS355TE-17 1SS355TE-17 1SS355TE-17 1SS355TE-17 1SS355TE-17

8-10

8-729-421-19 8-729-422-27 8-729-424-08 8-729-421-19 8-729-424-08

TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR

UN2213-TX 2SD601A-QRS-TX UN2111-TX UN2213-TX UN2111-TX

ER-15 Ref. No.

Part No.

Description

Q908 Q909 Q910 Q912 Q913

8-729-421-22 8-729-421-19 8-729-424-08 8-729-422-27 8-729-422-27

TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR

UN2211-TX UN2213-TX UN2111-TX 2SD601A-QRS-TX 2SD601A-QRS-TX

Remark

Q914 Q915

8-729-422-27 TRANSISTOR 8-729-422-27 TRANSISTOR

2SD601A-QRS-TX 2SD601A-QRS-TX

Ref. No.

< RESISTOR > R905 R906 R907 R908 R909

1-216-089-11 1-216-089-11 1-216-089-11 1-216-105-00 1-216-037-00

RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP METAL CHIP

47K 47K 47K 220K 330

5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W

R910 R911 R912 R914 R915

1-216-037-00 1-216-037-00 1-216-037-00 1-216-057-00 1-216-049-11

METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP RES-CHIP

330 330 330 2.2K 1K

5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W

R916 R917 R918 R923 R924

1-216-057-00 1-216-057-00 1-216-021-00 1-216-041-00 1-216-041-00

METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP

2.2K 2.2K 68 470 470

5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W

R927 R928 R929 R930 R931

1-216-021-00 1-216-021-00 1-216-021-00 1-216-065-00 1-216-065-00

METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP

68 68 68 4.7K 4.7K

5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W

R932 R933 R938 R939 R950

1-216-065-00 1-216-065-00 1-216-021-00 1-216-021-00 1-216-081-00

RES-CHIP RES-CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP

4.7K 4.7K 68 68 22K

5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W

< RELAY > RY901 RY902 RY903 RY904

1-515-622-11 1-515-622-11 1-515-622-11 1-515-622-11

RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY

A-6065-643-A MB-98 BOARD, COMPLETE (US (DPX1410BJ), CND (DPX1410BJ)) A-6065-665-A MB-98 BOARD, COMPLETE (US (DPX1410BM), CND (DPX1410BM)) A-6065-667-A MB-98 BOARD, COMPLETE (E, MX, AR, BR) A-6065-669-A MB-98 BOARD, COMPLETE (AEP (DPX1411BM), AEP (DPX1411HM), UK) A-6065-671-A MB-98 BOARD, COMPLETE (AEP (DPX1412BM), AEP (DPX1412HM)) ********************* (Ref. No. 2,000 Series)

* * * * *

< CAPACITOR >

Part No.

MB-98

Description

Remark

C111 C112

1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP

0.01uF 0.1uF

10% 10%

25V 16V

C113 C114 C115 C116 C118

1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-126-607-11

CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP

0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 47uF

10% 10% 10% 10% 20%

25V 25V 25V 25V 4V

C121 C122 C123 C124 C201

1-126-206-11 1-126-204-11 1-126-246-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11

ELECT CHIP ELECT CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP

100uF 47uF 220uF 0.01uF 0.01uF

20% 20% 20% 10% 10%

6.3V 16V 4V 25V 25V

C202 C205 C206 C207 C208

1-162-970-11 1-162-966-11 1-162-966-11 1-162-966-11 1-162-966-11

CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP

0.01uF 0.0022uF 0.0022uF 0.0022uF 0.0022uF

10% 10% 10% 10% 10%

25V 50V 50V 50V 50V

C209 C215 C216 C217 C218

1-124-779-00 1-162-968-11 1-162-968-11 1-126-205-11 1-162-970-11

ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP

10uF 0.0047uF 0.0047uF 47uF 0.01uF

20% 10% 10% 20% 10%

16V 50V 50V 6.3V 25V

C219 C221 C222 C223 C224

1-164-739-11 1-124-779-00 1-107-826-11 1-126-205-11 1-162-970-11

CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP

560PF 10uF 0.1uF 47uF 0.01uF

5% 20% 10% 20% 10%

50V 16V 16V 6.3V 25V

C225 C226 C227 C228 C231

1-107-826-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-107-826-11

CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP

0.1uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.1uF

10% 10% 10% 10% 10%

16V 25V 25V 25V 16V

C232 C233 C234 C235 C236

1-107-826-11 1-162-964-11 1-162-970-11 1-107-826-11 1-165-176-11

CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP

0.1uF 0.001uF 0.01uF 0.1uF 0.047uF

10% 10% 10% 10% 10%

16V 50V 25V 16V 16V

C238 C239 C240 C243 C244

1-165-176-11 1-162-970-11 1-164-217-11 1-107-826-11 1-124-779-00

CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP

0.047uF 0.01uF 150PF 0.1uF 10uF

10% 10% 5% 10% 20%

16V 25V 50V 16V 16V

C246 C247 C248 C304 C305

1-162-970-11 1-107-826-11 1-162-970-11 1-126-206-11 1-162-970-11

CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP

0.01uF 0.1uF 0.01uF 100uF 0.01uF

10% 10% 10% 20% 10%

25V 16V 25V 6.3V 25V

C306 C307 C309 C310 C311

1-162-968-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-968-11 1-162-968-11 1-162-968-11

CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP

0.0047uF 0.01uF 0.0047uF 0.0047uF 0.0047uF

10% 10% 10% 10% 10%

50V 25V 50V 50V 50V

C103 C104 C105 C106 C107

1-162-970-11 1-126-209-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-917-11

CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP

0.01uF 100uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 15PF

10% 20% 10% 10% 5%

25V 4V 25V 25V 50V

C312 C313 C315 C317 C318

1-107-826-11 1-164-677-11 1-162-927-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11

CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP

0.1uF 0.033uF 100PF 0.01uF 0.01uF

10% 10% 5% 10% 10%

16V 16V 50V 25V 25V

C108 C109 C110

1-162-917-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1-126-209-11 ELECT CHIP

15PF 0.01uF 100uF

5% 10% 20%

50V 25V 4V

C319 C320 C321

1-110-563-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP

0.068uF 0.01uF 0.01uF

10% 10% 10%

16V 25V 25V

8-11

MB-98 Ref. No.

Part No.

Description

Remark

Ref. No.

Part No.

Description

Remark

C322 C323

1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP

0.01uF 0.01uF

10% 10%

25V 25V

C513 C514

1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP

0.01uF 0.01uF

10% 10%

25V 25V

C324 C325 C326 C327 C328

1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-107-826-11 1-162-970-11

CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP

0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.1uF 0.01uF

10% 10% 10% 10% 10%

25V 25V 25V 16V 25V

C516 C518 C519 C520 C521

1-162-970-11 1-107-826-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-107-826-11

CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP

0.01uF 0.1uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.1uF

10% 10% 10% 10% 10%

25V 16V 25V 25V 16V

C331 C332 C333 C334 C335

1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11

CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP

0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF

10% 10% 10% 10% 10%

25V 25V 25V 25V 25V

C522 C523 C524 C525 C526

1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11

CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP

0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF

10% 10% 10% 10% 10%

25V 25V 25V 25V 25V

C336 C337 C338 C339 C340

1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11

CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP

0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF

10% 10% 10% 10% 10%

25V 25V 25V 25V 25V

C528 C529 C530 C531 C532

1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11

CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP

0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF

10% 10% 10% 10% 10%

25V 25V 25V 25V 25V

C341 C342 C343 C344 C346

1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-968-11

CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP

0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.0047uF

10% 10% 10% 10% 10%

25V 25V 25V 25V 50V

C533 C534 C535 C536 C537

1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11

CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP

0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF

10% 10% 10% 10% 10%

25V 25V 25V 25V 25V

C347 C348 C349 C350 C351

1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11

CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP

0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF

10% 10% 10% 10% 10%

25V 25V 25V 25V 25V

C538 C539 C540 C541 C542

1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11

CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP

0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF

10% 10% 10% 10% 10%

25V 25V 25V 25V 25V

C401 C402 C403 C404 C405

1-164-245-11 1-164-230-11 1-162-927-11 1-162-965-11 1-107-826-11

CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP

0.015uF 220PF 100PF 0.0015uF 0.1uF

10% 5% 5% 10% 10%

25V 50V 50V 50V 16V

C544 C545 C546 C547 C601

1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11

CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP

0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF

10% 10% 10% 10% 10%

25V 25V 25V 25V 25V

C406 C407 C408 C409 C410

1-107-826-11 1-164-230-11 1-162-927-11 1-162-964-11 1-162-964-11

CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP

0.1uF 220PF 100PF 0.001uF 0.001uF

10% 5% 5% 10% 10%

16V 50V 50V 50V 50V

C602 C603 C604 C703 C704

1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11

CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP

0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF

10% 10% 10% 10% 10%

25V 25V 25V 25V 25V

C411 C412 C413 C414 C415

1-162-968-11 1-164-677-11 1-164-677-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11

CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP

0.0047uF 0.033uF 0.033uF 0.01uF 0.01uF

10% 10% 10% 10% 10%

50V 16V 16V 25V 25V

C705 C706 C707 C708 C709

1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11

CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP

0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF

10% 10% 10% 10% 10%

25V 25V 25V 25V 25V

C416 C417 C418 C419 C420

1-162-970-11 1-162-964-11 1-162-970-11 1-126-204-11 1-107-826-11

CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP

0.01uF 0.001uF 0.01uF 47uF 0.1uF

10% 10% 10% 20% 10%

25V 50V 25V 16V 16V

C710 C711 C713 C714 C715

1-162-970-11 1-127-715-11 1-162-970-11 1-127-715-11 1-162-970-11

CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP

0.01uF 0.22uF 0.01uF 0.22uF 0.01uF

10% 10% 10% 10% 10%

25V 16V 25V 16V 25V

C421 C427 C428 C501 C502

1-107-826-11 1-162-964-11 1-162-964-11 1-126-193-11 1-124-779-00

CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT ELECT CHIP

0.1uF 0.001uF 0.001uF 1uF 10uF

10% 10% 10% 20% 20%

16V 50V 50V 50V 16V

C716 C717 C718 C719 C720

1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11

CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP

0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF

10% 10% 10% 10% 10%

25V 25V 25V 25V 25V

C503 C504 C505 C506 C508

1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-124-779-00 1-124-779-00 1-162-970-11

CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP

0.01uF 0.01uF 10uF 10uF 0.01uF

10% 10% 20% 20% 10%

25V 25V 16V 16V 25V

C721 C722 C723 C724 C803

1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-127-715-11

CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP

0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.22uF

10% 10% 10% 10% 10%

25V 25V 25V 25V 16V

C509 C510 C512

1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1-126-246-11 ELECT CHIP

0.01uF 0.01uF 220uF

10% 10% 20%

25V 25V 4V

C806 C812 C813

1-127-715-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1-127-715-11 CERAMIC CHIP

0.22uF 0.01uF 0.22uF

10% 10% 10%

16V 25V 16V

8-12

MB-98 Ref. No.

Part No.

Description

Remark

C816 C819

1-124-779-00 ELECT CHIP 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP

10uF 0.1uF

20% 10%

16V 16V

C827 C829

1-124-779-00 ELECT CHIP 1-127-715-11 CERAMIC CHIP

10uF 0.22uF

20% 10%

16V 16V

Ref. No.

< CONNECTOR > CN101 * CN103 CN201 CN202 CN402 CN801 CN802

1-815-459-21 1-770-470-21 1-815-507-11 1-779-935-11 1-779-353-21

CONNECTOR, BOARD TO BOARD 15P PIN, CONNECTOR (PC BOARD) 6P CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 26P CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 9P CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 5P

Part No.

Description

IC401 IC501 IC502 IC503 IC504

8-759-826-42 8-759-832-30 8-759-599-45 8-752-409-87 8-759-683-76

IC IC IC IC IC

FAN8034 TK71518ASCL MM1385ENLE CXD1933Q K4S161622D-TC80T

IC505 IC601 IC701 IC802 IC803

8-759-683-76 8-759-826-44 8-752-402-09 8-759-825-32 8-759-825-33

IC IC IC IC IC

K4S161622D-TC80T CXD9632Q CXD1939R CXD9627N-E2 CXD9628N-E2

< COIL > L201 L202

1-815-396-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 25P 1-815-395-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 15P

1-412-031-11 INDUCTOR CHIP 47uH 1-412-031-11 INDUCTOR CHIP 47uH < TRANSISTOR >

< DIODE > D801

Remark

Q201 Q202

8-719-024-81 DIODE 1SS300-TE85L

8-729-903-46 TRANSISTOR 8-729-903-46 TRANSISTOR

2SB1132-T100-QR 2SB1132-T100-QR

< FERRITE BEAD > < RESISTOR > FB102 FB103 FB104 FB105 FB106

1-469-324-21 1-469-324-21 1-469-324-21 1-469-324-21 1-469-324-21

FERRITE FERRITE FERRITE FERRITE FERRITE

0uH 0uH 0uH 0uH 0uH

FB107 FB108 FB109 FB110 FB111

1-469-324-21 1-469-324-21 1-469-784-11 1-469-324-21 1-469-784-11

FERRITE FERRITE FERRITE FERRITE FERRITE

0uH 0uH 0uH 0uH 0uH

FB112 FB701 FB702

1-469-784-11 FERRITE 1-469-784-11 FERRITE 1-469-784-11 FERRITE

0uH 0uH 0uH

< FILTER > FL101 FL102 FL103 FL104 FL105

1-234-177-21 1-234-177-21 1-234-177-21 1-233-893-21 1-234-177-21

FILTER, CHIP EMI FILTER, CHIP EMI FILTER, CHIP EMI FILTER, CHIP EMI FILTER, CHIP EMI

FL106 FL108 FL201 FL501 FL502

1-234-177-21 1-234-177-21 1-234-177-21 1-234-177-21 1-234-177-21

FILTER, CHIP EMI FILTER, CHIP EMI FILTER, CHIP EMI FILTER, CHIP EMI FILTER, CHIP EMI

FL505

1-234-177-21 FILTER, CHIP EMI < IC >

IC101 IC101 IC102 IC103 IC107

8-759-699-33 8-759-641-86 8-759-831-81 8-759-829-75 Note

IC108 IC202 IC301 IC302 IC303

Note 8-759-828-02 8-759-832-31 8-759-828-01 8-759-643-10

IC IC IC IC

CAT24WC16J-TE13 BR24C16F-E2 IMIC6001BTD MB91307APFV-G-BND-E1

IC IC IC IC

SP3728AC TK71533ASCL CXD9635R GM71V18160CT-6TR

Note: Part number has not been determined yet. It will be noticed later.

8-13

R101 R106 R107 R108 R109

1-216-789-11 1-216-827-11 1-216-821-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11

METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP

2.2 3.3K 1K 10 10

5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W

R111 R112 R113 R114 R116

1-216-817-11 1-216-821-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-845-11 1-216-833-11

METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP

470 1K 10K 100K 10K

5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W

R117 R118 R119 R121 R123

1-216-821-11 1-216-821-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-833-11

METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP

1K 1K 10K 10K 10K

5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W

R124 R125 R126 R127 R128

1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-827-11

METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP

10 10 10 10 3.3K

5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W

R129 R130 R131 R132 R133

1-216-833-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-833-11

METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP

10K 10K 10K 10K 10K

5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W

R134 R136 R137 R138 R139

1-216-833-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11

METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP

10K 10 10 10 10

5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W

R141 R142 R143 R145 R146

1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-833-11

METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP

10 10 10K 10K 10K

5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W

R149 R150

1-216-827-11 METAL CHIP 3.3K 5% 1/16W 1-216-069-00 METAL CHIP 6.8K 5% 1/10W (AEP (DPX1412BM), AEP (DPX1412HM))

MB-98 Ref. No. R150

Part No.

Description

Remark

Ref. No.

Part No.

Description

Remark

R151

1-216-075-00 METAL CHIP 12K 5% 1/10W (AEP (DPX1411BM), AEP (DPX1411HM), UK) 1-216-081-00 METAL CHIP 22K 5% 1/10W (E, MX, AR, BR) 1-216-827-11 METAL CHIP 3.3K 5% 1/16W

R152 R153 R154

1-216-089-11 RES-CHIP 1-216-827-11 METAL CHIP 1-216-075-00 METAL CHIP

47K 3.3K 12K

R154

1-216-089-11 RES-CHIP

47K

R155

1-216-827-11 METAL CHIP

3.3K

R156 R157 R160 R161 R162

1-216-833-11 1-216-864-91 1-216-833-11 1-216-864-91 1-216-833-11

METAL CHIP SHORT METAL CHIP SHORT METAL CHIP

10K 0 10K 0 10K

5%

1/16W

5%

1/16W

5%

1/16W

R163 R164 R165 R166 R167

1-216-833-11 1-126-809-11 1-126-809-11 1-216-817-11 1-216-864-91

METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT

10K 100 100 470 0

5% 5% 5% 5%

1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W

R168 R170 R175 R177 R178

1-216-864-91 1-216-821-11 1-216-864-91 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11

SHORT METAL CHIP SHORT METAL CHIP METAL CHIP

0 1K 0 10 10

5%

1/16W

5% 5%

1/16W 1/16W

R342 R343 R344 R345 R349

R182 R199 R201 R202 R203

1-216-845-11 1-216-826-11 1-216-815-11 1-216-809-11 1-216-809-11

METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP

100K 2.7K 330 100 100

5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W

R350 R351 R352 R356 R368

1-216-822-11 1-216-825-11 1-216-825-11 1-218-853-11 1-216-829-11

METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP

1.2K 2.2K 2.2K 1.8K 4.7K

5% 5% 5% 0.5% 5%

1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W

R204 R205 R206 R207 R208

1-216-837-11 1-216-845-11 1-216-838-11 1-216-803-11 1-216-803-11

METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP

22K 100K 27K 33 33

5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W

R384 R385 R402 R403 R404

1-216-797-11 1-216-829-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-821-11

METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP

10 4.7K 10K 10K 1K

5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W

R209 R210 R211 R212 R215

1-216-821-11 1-216-841-11 1-216-809-11 1-216-864-91 1-216-864-91

METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT SHORT

1K 47K 100 0 0

5% 5% 5%

1/16W 1/16W 1/16W

R405 R406 R407 R408 R409

1-216-821-11 1-216-846-11 1-216-846-11 1-216-847-11 1-216-847-11

METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP

1K 120K 120K 150K 150K

5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W

R216 R219 R220 R223 R224

1-216-864-91 1-216-864-91 1-216-803-11 1-216-803-11 1-216-801-11

SHORT SHORT METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP

0 0 33 33 22

5% 5% 5%

1/16W 1/16W 1/16W

R410 R411 R412 R413 R414

1-216-842-11 1-216-842-11 1-216-850-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-853-11

METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP

56K 56K 270K 10K 470K

5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W

R225 R229 R237 R238 R245

1-216-841-11 1-216-809-11 1-216-834-11 1-216-861-11 1-216-809-11

METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP

47K 100 12K 2.2M 100

5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W

R415 R416 R417 R418 R419

1-216-846-11 1-216-855-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-839-11 1-216-839-11

METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP

120K 680K 10K 33K 33K

5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W

R246 R299 R301 R302 R305

1-216-827-11 1-216-847-11 1-216-827-11 1-216-827-11 1-216-829-11

METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP

3.3K 150K 3.3K 3.3K 4.7K

5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W

R420 R421 R422 R423 R424

1-216-853-11 1-216-839-11 1-216-839-11 1-216-839-11 1-216-839-11

METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP

470K 33K 33K 33K 33K

5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W

R306 R307 R308 R309

1-216-829-11 1-216-829-11 1-216-829-11 1-216-829-11

METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP

4.7K 4.7K 4.7K 4.7K

5% 5% 5% 5%

1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W

R425 R426 R427 R428

1-216-849-11 1-216-853-11 1-218-895-11 1-216-839-11

METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP

220K 470K 100K 33K

5% 5% 0.5% 5%

1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W

R150

5% 1/10W 5% 1/16W 5% 1/10W (E, MX, AR, BR) 5% 1/10W (AEP, UK) 5% 1/16W

8-14

R310

1-216-829-11 METAL CHIP

4.7K

5%

1/16W

R311 R312 R313 R314 R315

1-216-829-11 1-216-829-11 1-216-817-11 1-216-817-11 1-216-817-11

METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP

4.7K 4.7K 470 470 470

5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W

R316 R317 R318 R319 R320

1-216-829-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-295-11 1-216-831-11 1-216-295-11

METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT METAL CHIP SHORT

4.7K 10K 0 6.8K 0

5% 5%

1/16W 1/16W

5%

1/16W

R321 R328 R329 R330 R334

1-216-817-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-295-11 1-216-295-11 1-218-871-11

METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT SHORT METAL CHIP

470 10K 0 0 10K

5% 5%

1/16W 1/16W

0.5%

1/16W

R335 R336 R337 R338 R341

1-218-855-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-809-11 1-218-879-11 1-218-871-11

METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP

2.2K 10K 100 22K 10K

0.5% 5% 5% 0.5% 0.5%

1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W

1-218-883-11 1-218-831-11 1-218-847-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-838-11

METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP

33K 220 1K 10K 27K

0.5% 0.5% 0.5% 5% 5%

1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W

MB-98 Ref. No.

Part No.

Description

MS-81

POWER BLOCK (HS13S0E)

Remark

Ref. No.

Part No.

R429

1-218-889-11 METAL CHIP

56K

0.5%

1/16W

*

R430 R431 R432 R433 R434

1-218-895-11 1-218-889-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-815-11

METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP

100K 56K 10K 10K 330

0.5% 0.5% 5% 5% 5%

1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W

1-468-585-11 POWER BLOCK (HS13S0E) (AEP, UK, AR) ********************** (Ref.No. 3,000 Series)

R435 R436 R439 R507 R510

1-216-833-11 1-216-809-11 1-216-864-91 1-216-809-11 1-216-833-11

METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT METAL CHIP METAL CHIP

10K 100 0 100 10K

5% 5%

1/16W 1/16W

5% 5%

1/16W 1/16W

R511 R512 R513 R514 R515

1-218-831-11 1-218-831-11 1-218-831-11 1-218-831-11 1-218-831-11

METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP

220 220 220 220 220

0.5% 0.5% 0.5% 0.5% 0.5%

1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W

R516 R517 R518 R519 R521

1-218-831-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-822-11 1-216-295-11 1-216-295-11

METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT SHORT

220 10K 1.2K 0 0

0.5% 5% 5%

1/16W 1/16W 1/16W

R522 R524 R525 R533 R554

1-216-827-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11

METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP

3.3K 10K 10K 10 10

5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W

R604 R710 R721 R724 R726

1-216-809-11 1-216-864-91 1-216-809-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-833-11

METAL CHIP SHORT METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP

100 0 100 10K 10K

5%

1/16W

5% 5% 5%

1/16W 1/16W 1/16W

R741 R801 R805 R809 R821

1-216-833-11 1-216-864-91 1-216-809-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-864-91

METAL CHIP SHORT METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT

10K 0 100 10 0

5%

1/16W

5% 5%

1/16W 1/16W

Remark

< CAPACITOR > 0 C101 0 C102 0 C103 0 C104 0 C107

1-115-165-11 1-115-165-11 1-127-942-11 1-127-942-11 1-127-942-11

FILM FILM CERAMIC CERAMIC CERAMIC

0.1uF 0.1uF 330PF 330PF 330PF

250V 250V 250V 250V 250V

C110 C115 C116 C117 C150

9-885-012-88 1-130-483-11 1-130-483-11 1-130-477-11 9-885-012-89

ELECT FILM FILM FILM CERAMIC

47uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.0033uF 47PF

400V 50V 50V 50V 2KV

C211 C213 C221 C223 C301

1-111-083-11 1-126-947-11 1-111-082-11 1-126-947-11 1-126-960-11

ELECT ELECT ELECT ELECT ELECT

150uF 47uF 100uF 47uF 1uF

35V 35V 35V 35V 50V

C311 C313 C314 C413 C414

1-111-087-11 1-126-947-11 1-126-965-11 1-126-947-11 1-130-483-11

ELECT ELECT ELECT ELECT FILM

330uF 47uF 22uF 47uF 0.01uF

35V 35V 50V 35V 50V

C511 C513 C611 C613 C711

1-111-082-11 1-126-947-11 1-111-087-11 1-126-947-11 1-126-947-11

ELECT ELECT ELECT ELECT ELECT

100uF 47uF 330uF 47uF 47uF

35V 35V 35V 35V 35V

< CONNECTOR > 0 CN101 * CN201

1-580-230-11 CONNECTOR 2P 1-778-318-21 CONNNECTOR 13P < DIODE >

< VARIABLE RESISTOR > RV501

Description

1-223-583-11 RES, ADJ, CARBON 1K (VIDEO LEVEL ADJ)

0 D101 D102 D104 D105 D211

9-885-000-79 8-719-160-78 8-719-109-66 9-903-904-01 8-719-018-84

DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE

S1WBA60 RD24FB2 RD3.3ES-B2 1SS270A D2S6M

D212 D221 D311 D413 D511

8-719-160-87 8-719-032-12 8-719-510-02 9-998-285-01 8-719-063-69

DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE

RD33FB2 D1NS6 D1NS4 D1N60 D2L20U

D611 D621

8-719-510-02 DIODE D1NS4 8-719-064-11 DIODE SPR-325MVW (ON/STANDBY)

< VIBRATOR > X101 X102

1-795-174-11 VIBRATOR, CERAMIC (16.5 MHz) 1-781-867-21 VIBRATOR, CRYSTAL (27 MHz)

MS-81 BOARD ************ (Ref.No. 1,000 Series)

< FUSE >

< CONNECTOR > CN001

1-815-412-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 5P

0 F101

< FUSE CLIP >

< SWITCH > S001

1-532-388-31 FUSE (2A/250V)

FC1 FC2

1-786-133-11 SWITCH, ROTARY (CHUCK/TRAY DETECT)

8-15

9-885-012-77 FUSE CLIP 9-885-012-77 FUSE CLIP

The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified.

Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié.

POWER BLOCK (HS13S0E) Ref. No.

Part No.

Description

POWER BLOCK (HS13S0F) Remark

Ref. No.

Part No.

Description

Remark

C112 C113 C115 C116 C117

9-885-012-92 9-885-012-89 1-130-489-11 1-130-483-11 1-130-477-11

FILM CERAMIC FILM FILM FILM

0.047uF 47PF 0.033uF 0.01uF 0.0033uF

630V 2KV 50V 50V 50V

C131 C132 C135 C137 C211

1-126-966-11 1-126-960-11 9-885-012-93 9-885-012-94 1-111-083-11

ELECT ELECT CERAMIC FILM ELECT

33uF 1uF 3300PF 0.1uF 150uF

50V 50V 1KV 50V 35V

C213 C221 C223 C311 C313

1-126-947-11 1-111-082-11 1-126-947-11 9-885-012-95 1-126-947-11

ELECT ELECT ELECT ELECT ELECT

47uF 100uF 47uF 150uF 47uF

35V 35V 35V 35V 35V

C314 C401 C402 C413 C511

1-126-965-11 9-885-012-95 1-126-959-11 1-126-947-11 1-111-082-11

ELECT ELECT ELECT ELECT ELECT

22uF 150uF 0.47uF 47uF 100uF

50V 35V 50V 35V 35V

C512 C611 C613 C701 C703

1-111-082-11 9-885-012-95 1-126-947-11 1-126-963-11 1-126-960-11

ELECT ELECT ELECT ELECT ELECT

100uF 150uF 47uF 4.7uF 1uF

35V 35V 35V 50V 50V

C711

1-126-947-11 ELECT

47uF

35V

< EARTH TERMINAL > FG101 FG201

1-537-738-21 TERMINAL, EARTH 1-537-738-21 TERMINAL, EARTH < IC >

IC301 IC411

8-759-420-19 IC AN1431T 8-759-420-19 IC AN1431T < COIL >

0 L101 0 L102 L150 L211 L221 L311 L511 L611

9-885-012-78 9-885-012-78 9-885-012-79 9-885-012-80 9-885-012-81

LINE FILTER LINE FILTER BEAD CORE COIL, CHOKE COIL, CHOKE

18mH 18mH 120 39uH 100uH

9-885-012-80 COIL, CHOKE 9-885-012-81 COIL, CHOKE 9-885-012-80 COIL, CHOKE

39uH 100uH 39uH

0 P311 0 P611

9-885-012-82 LINK, IC (1A/60V) 9-885-012-82 LINK, IC (1A/60V) < PHOT COUPLER >

0 PC101

8-749-011-50 PHOT COUPLER PS2561 < TRANSISTOR >

Q101 Q102 Q211 Q311 Q411

9-885-006-12 8-729-023-98 9-885-005-96 9-885-006-08 9-885-006-08

TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR

2SK2700 2SC3377 2SJ525 2SD1768S 2SD1768S

Q611 Q621 Q622 Q712

9-885-006-08 8-729-901-41 8-729-029-92 8-729-029-92

TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR

2SD1768S 2SC1740S DTC143ES DTC143ES

< CONNECTOR > 0 CN101 * CN201

1-580-230-11 CONNECTOR 2P 1-778-318-21 CONNECTOR 13P < DIODE >

< RESISTOR > R101 R105

1-219-776-11 CARBON 1-219-774-11 CARBON

2.2M 1M

0 D101 D102 D104 D105 D131

9-885-000-79 8-719-160-78 8-719-981-98 9-903-904-01 9-903-904-01

DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE

S1WBA60 RD24FB2 MTZJ-3.0B 1SS270A 1SS270A

D132 D135 D211 D212 D221

8-719-922-11 8-719-030-24 8-719-018-84 8-719-160-87 8-719-032-12

DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE

MTZJ-22B EG01C D2S6M RD33FB2 D1NS6

D311 D411 D511 D611 D615

8-719-510-02 8-719-510-02 8-719-063-69 8-719-510-02 8-719-064-11

DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE

D1NS4 D1NS4 D2L20U D1NS4 SPR-325MVW (ON/STANDBY)

1/2W 1/2W

< SWITCH > 0 SW101 9-885-012-83 SWITCH (POWER) < TRANSFORMER > 0 T101

9-885-012-90 TRANSFORMER

*

1-468-586-11 POWER BLOCK (HS13S0F) (E, BR) ********************* (Ref.No. 4,000 Series)

< FUSE > 0 F101

< CAPACITOR > 0 C101 0 C103 0 C104 0 C107 C110

1-115-165-11 1-127-942-11 1-127-942-11 1-127-942-11 9-885-012-91

FILM CERAMIC CERAMIC CERAMIC ELECT

1-532-503-31 FUSE (1.6A/250V) < FUSE CLIP >

0.1uF 330PF 330PF 330PF 150uF

250V 250V 250V 250V 400V

FC1 FC2

8-16

9-885-012-77 FUSE CLIP 9-885-012-77 FUSE CLIP

The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified.

Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié.

POWER BLOCK (HS13S0F) Ref. No.

Part No.

Description

Remark

< EARTH TERMINAL > FG101 FG201

POWER BLOCK (HS13S0U)

Ref. No.

Part No.

*

1-468-583-11 POWER BLOCK (HS13S0U) (US, CND, MX) ********************** (Ref.No. 5,000 Series)

1-537-738-21 TERMINAL, EARTH 1-537-738-21 TERMINAL, EARTH

Description

Remark

< CAPACITOR > < IC > IC131 IC401 IC701

9-885-005-97 IC MIP0254SPSCF 8-759-667-11 IC HA17L431P 8-759-420-19 IC AN1431T

0 C101 0 C107 C110 C115 C116

1-115-165-11 1-113-937-11 9-885-012-85 1-130-489-11 1-130-483-11

FILM CERAMIC ELECT FILM FILM

0.1uF 2200PF 120uF 0.033uF 0.01uF

250V 250V 200V 50V 50V

C117 C150 C211 C213 C221

1-130-477-11 9-885-012-86 1-111-083-11 1-126-947-11 1-111-082-11

FILM CERAMIC ELECT ELECT ELECT

0.0033uF 470PF 150uF 47uF 100uF

50V 1KV 35V 35V 35V

C223 C301 C311 C313 C314

1-126-947-11 1-126-961-11 1-111-087-11 1-126-947-11 1-126-965-11

ELECT ELECT ELECT ELECT ELECT

47uF 2.2uF 330uF 47uF 22uF

35V 50V 35V 35V 50V

C413 C414 C511 C513 C611

1-126-947-11 1-130-483-11 1-111-082-11 1-126-947-11 1-111-087-11

ELECT FILM ELECT ELECT ELECT

47uF 0.01uF 100uF 47uF 330uF

35V 50V 35V 35V 35V

C613 C711

1-126-947-11 ELECT 1-126-947-11 ELECT

47uF 47uF

35V 35V

< COIL > 0 L101 0 L102 L150 L211 L221

9-885-012-78 9-885-012-78 9-885-012-96 9-885-012-80 9-885-012-81

LINE FILTER LINE FILTER BEAD CORE COIL, CHOKE COIL, CHOKE

18mH 18mH 45 39uH 100uH

L311 L411 L511 L611

9-885-012-81 9-885-012-80 9-885-012-81 9-885-012-81

COIL, CHOKE COIL, CHOKE COIL, CHOKE COIL, CHOKE

100uH 39uH 100uH 100uH

0 P311 0 P611

9-885-012-82 LINK, IC (1A/60V) 9-885-012-82 LINK, IC (1A/60V) < PHOTO COUPLER >

0 PC101 0 PC103 0 PC131

8-749-011-50 PHOTO COUPLER PS2561 8-749-011-50 PHOTO COUPLER PS2561 8-749-011-50 PHOTO COUPLER PS2561

< CONNECTOR > 0 CN101 * CN201

< TRANSISTOR > Q101 Q102 Q103 Q131 Q311

9-885-006-10 8-729-023-98 9-885-006-10 9-885-006-08 9-885-006-08

TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR

2SK2750 2SC3377 2SK2750 2SD1768S 2SD1768S

Q621 Q622 Q712

8-729-901-41 TRANSISTOR 8-729-029-92 TRANSISTOR 8-729-029-92 TRANSISTOR

2SC1740S DTC143ES DTC143ES

< DIODE > 0 D101 D104 D105 D211 D212

9-885-000-79 8-719-062-66 9-903-904-01 8-719-018-83 8-719-160-87

DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE

S1WBA60 HZS2C3-TE 1SS270A D2S4M RD33FB2

D221 D311 D413 D511 D611

8-719-510-02 8-719-510-02 9-998-285-01 8-719-510-02 8-719-510-02

DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE

D1NS4 D1NS4 D1N60 D1NS4 D1NS4

D621

8-719-064-11 DIODE SPR-325MVW (ON/STANDBY)

< RESISTOR > R101 R104

1-219-776-11 CARBON 9-885-012-97 CARBON

2.2M 680K

1-580-230-11 CONNECTOR 2P 1-778-318-21 CONNECTOR 13P

1/2W 1/2W

< SWITCH > < FUSE > 0 SW101 9-885-012-83 SWITCH (POWER) 0 F101

1-533-296-11 FUSE (2A/125V)

< TRANSFORMER > < FUSE CLIP > 0 T101 0 T131

9-885-012-98 TRANSFORMER 9-885-012-99 TRANSFORMER

FC1 FC2

9-885-012-77 FUSE CLIP 9-885-012-77 FUSE CLIP < EARTH TERMINAL >

FG101 FG201

8-17

1-537-738-21 TERMINAL, EARTH 1-537-738-21 TERMINAL, EARTH

The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified.

Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié.

POWER BLOCK (HS13S0U) Ref. No.

Part No.

Description

POWER BLOCK (TOP-244U) Remark

Ref. No.

< IC > IC301 IC411

8-759-420-19 IC AN1431T 8-759-420-19 IC AN1431T < COIL >

0 L101 L150 L211 L221 L311 L511 L611

9-885-012-78 9-885-012-79 9-885-012-80 9-885-012-81 9-885-012-80

LINE FILTER BEAD CORE COIL, CHOKE COIL, CHOKE COIL, CHOKE

18mH 120 39uH 100uH 39uH

9-885-012-81 COIL, CHOKE 9-885-012-80 COIL, CHOKE

100uH 39uH

0 P311 0 P611

9-885-012-82 LINK, IC (1A/60V) 9-885-012-82 LINK, IC (1A/60V)

Part No.

Description

Remark

C922 C924

9-885-013-04 CERAMIC 9-885-013-05 ELECT

4700PF 470uF

50V 25V

C925 C926 C927 C929 C930

9-885-013-06 9-885-013-01 9-885-013-07 9-885-013-06 9-885-013-03

ELECT FILM ELECT ELECT ELECT

100uF 0.1uF 1000uF 100uF 10uF

25V 50V 16V 25V 50V

C931 C934 C936 C940 C941

9-885-013-06 9-885-013-03 9-885-013-02 9-885-013-05 9-885-013-05

ELECT ELECT ELECT ELECT ELECT

100uF 10uF 47uF 470uF 470uF

25V 50V 25V 25V 25V

C943 C944 C945 C947

9-885-013-01 9-885-013-01 9-885-013-01 9-885-013-01

FILM FILM FILM FILM

0.1uF 0.1uF 0.1uF 0.1uF

50V 50V 50V 50V

< CONNECTOR > < PHOT COUPLER > 0 PC101

0 CN900 * CN920

9-995-566-01 PHOT COUPLER PS2501

1-580-230-11 CONNECTOR 2P 1-778-318-21 CONNECTOR 13P

< TRANSISTOR >

< DIODE >

Q101 Q102 Q211 Q311 Q411

9-885-006-10 8-729-023-98 9-885-005-96 9-885-006-08 9-885-006-08

TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR

2SK2750 2SC3377 2SJ525 2SD1768S 2SD1768S

0 D901 0 D902 0 D903 0 D904 D910

9-885-013-08 9-885-013-08 9-885-013-08 9-885-013-08 9-885-013-09

DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE

1N4007 1N4007 1N4007 1N4007 UF4007

Q611 Q621 Q622 Q712

9-885-006-08 8-729-901-41 8-729-029-92 8-729-029-92

TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR

2SD1768S 2SC1740S DTC143ES DTC143ES

D911 D913 D920 D921 D922

9-885-013-10 9-885-013-11 9-885-013-12 9-885-013-13 9-885-013-14

DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE

1N4001 P6KE200A UF202G UF4003 UF5402G

D923 D925 D926 D927 D928

9-885-013-13 8-719-983-18 9-885-013-10 9-885-013-10 9-885-013-10

DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE

UF4003 MTZJ-4.3A 1N4001 1N4001 1N4001

D929 D930 D931 D932 D933

8-719-064-11 9-885-013-10 9-885-013-10 9-885-013-10 9-885-013-10

DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE

SPR-325MVW (ON/STANDBY) 1N4001 1N4001 1N4001 1N4001

< SWITCH > 0 SW101 9-885-012-83 SWITCH (POWER) < TRANSFORMER > 0 T101

9-885-012-87 TRANSFORMER

1-468-584-11 POWER BLOCK (TOP-244U) (US, CND) ********************** (Ref.No. 6,000 Series)

*

< EARTH TERMINAL > < CAPACITOR > 0 C900 0 C901 0 C902 0 C903 C910

1-115-165-11 1-113-920-51 1-113-906-51 1-113-906-51 1-107-401-11

FILM CERAMIC CERAMIC CERAMIC ELECT

0.1uF 2200PF 330PF 330PF 150uF

250V 250V 250V 250V 200V

0 C911 C912 C913 C914 0 C916

9-885-013-00 9-885-013-01 9-885-013-02 9-885-013-03 9-885-013-00

FILM FILM ELECT ELECT FILM

0.01uF 0.1uF 47uF 10uF 0.01uF

400V 50V 25V 50V 400V

4700PF 0.1uF 470uF

50V 50V 25V

ET901 ET902

1-537-738-21 TERMINAL, EARTH 1-537-738-21 TERMINAL, EARTH < FUSE >

0 F900

1-533-296-11 FUSE (2A/125V) < FUSE HOLDER >

FH900 FH901

1-533-399-31 HOLDER, FUSE 1-533-399-31 HOLDER, FUSE < IC >

C917 C920 C921

9-885-013-04 CERAMIC 9-885-013-01 FILM 9-885-013-05 ELECT

0 IC910 IC920

8-18

9-885-013-15 IC TOP-244Y 9-885-013-16 IC TL431A

The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified.

Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié.

POWER BLOCK (TOP-244U) Ref. No.

Part No.

Description

Remark

Ref. No.

Part No.

Description

Remark

< TRANSFORMER > < COIL > 0 T910 L921 L922 L923 L924

9-885-013-17 9-885-013-17 9-885-013-17 9-885-013-17

COIL, CHOKE COIL, CHOKE COIL, CHOKE COIL, CHOKE

MISCELLANEOUS **************

< LINE FILTER > 0 LF900

1-416-929-11 COIL, CHOKE

2.3mH

8-749-010-65 PHOT COUPLER PC123FY2 8-749-010-65 PHOT COUPLER PC123FY2

0 PS922 0 PS923

1-533-590-31 LINK, IC (1A) 1-533-591-31 LINK, IC (1.25A) < TRANSISTOR >

Q922 Q923 Q924 Q925 Q927

8-929-029-67 8-729-113-33 8-729-012-32 8-729-012-32 8-729-012-32

TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR

Q928 Q929 Q930

8-729-018-57 TRANSISTOR 8-729-925-12 TRANSISTOR 8-929-029-67 TRANSISTOR

9 51 51 51 51

1-786-131-11 1-468-583-11 1-468-584-11 1-468-585-11 1-468-586-11

SWITCH, TACTILE POWER BLOCK (HS13S0U) (US, CND, MX) POWER BLOCK (TOP-244U) (US, CND) POWER BLOCK (HS13S0E) (AEP, UK, AR) POWER BLOCK (HS13SOF) (E, BR)

0 56 0 56 0 56 61 62

1-757-140-11 1-757-571-11 1-757-901-11 1-757-696-11 1-757-695-11

CORD, POWER (AEP, UK, E, BR) CORD, POWER (US, CND, MX) CORD, POWER (AR) CABLE, FLEXIBLE FLAT (FMA-024) CABLE, FLEXIBLE FLAT (FMA-023)

63 64 65 72 0 104

1-757-693-11 1-757-694-11 1-757-697-11 1-757-699-11 A-4900-634-A

CABLE, FLEXIBLE FLAT (FMO-001) CABLE, FLEXIBLE FLAT (FMO-002) CABLE, FLEXIBLE FLAT (FMM-035) CABLE, FLEXIBLE FLAT (FAE-005) (AEP, UK) OPTICAL PICK-UP KHM-240 AAA/J1NP

* * * *

< PHOT COUPLER > 0 PC910 0 PC911

9-885-013-18 TRANSFORMER

11.3uH 11.3uH 11.3uH 11.3uH

DTC114ESA-TP 2SB733-4 2SC4040-TL2-R 2SC4040-TL2-R 2SC4040-TL2-R

M001 1-541-632-11 MOTOR, DC (LOADING) ************************************************************ ACCESSORIES & PACKING MATERIALS *******************************

DTA114GSTP 2SC1740SLN-TP-RS DTC114ESA-TP

< RESISTOR > R900 R911 R917 R921 R922

1-260-364-91 1-247-779-91 1-247-863-91 1-247-831-91 1-247-807-91

CARBON CARBON CARBON CARBON CARBON

1M 6.8 22K 1K 100

1/2W 1/4W 1/4W 1/4W 1/4W

R925 R926 R927 R928 R930

1-247-799-91 1-247-831-91 1-247-859-91 1-247-851-91 1-247-855-91

CARBON CARBON CARBON CARBON CARBON

47 1K 15K 6.8K 10K

1/4W 1/4W 1/4W 1/4W 1/4W

R931 R932 R933 R934 R935

1-216-430-51 1-247-879-91 1-247-851-91 1-247-811-91 1-247-795-91

CARBON CARBON CARBON CARBON CARBON

390 100K 6.8K 150 33

1W 1/4W 1/4W 1/4W 1/4W

R936 R938 R940 R947 R948

1-247-851-91 1-247-811-91 1-247-815-91 1-247-815-91 1-247-831-91

CARBON CARBON CARBON CARBON CARBON

6.8K 150 220 220 1K

1/4W 1/4W 1/4W 1/4W 1/4W

R949

1-247-863-91 CARBON

22K

1/4W

0

0

1-476-604-11 REMOTE COMMANDER (RMT-D128A) (US, CND, E, MX, AR, BR) 1-476-605-11 REMOTE COMMANDER (RMT-D128P) (AEP, UK) 1-569-008-21 ADAPTOR, CONVERSION 2P (E) 1-751-271-12 CORD, CONNECTION (STEREO AV CABLE 1.5m) (US, CND, AEP, UK (DPX1411BM), E, MX) 1-770-019-11 ADAPTOR, CONVERSION PLUG 3P (UK) 3-067-120-11 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ENGLISH) (US, CND) 3-067-120-21 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (FRENCH) (CND) 3-067-120-31 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (SPANISH) (E, MX, BR) 3-067-120-41 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ENGLISH) (UK) 3-067-120-51 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (FRENCH) (AEP (DPX1411BM), AEP (DPX1411HM)) 3-067-120-61 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (GERMAN) (AEP (DPX1411BM), AEP (DPX1411HM)) 3-067-120-71 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ITALIAN) (AEP) 3-067-120-81 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (DUTCH) (AEP (DPX1411BM), AEP (DPX1411HM)) 3-067-121-11 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (SPANISH) (AEP (DPX1412BM), AEP (DPX1412HM)) 3-067-121-21 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (PORTUGUESE) (AEP (DPX1412BM), AEP (DPX1412HM)) 3-067-121-31 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (DANISH) (AEP (DPX1412BM), AEP (DPX1412HM)) 3-067-121-41 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (FINNISH) (AEP (DPX1412BM), AEP (DPX1412HM)) 3-067-121-51 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (SWEDISH) (AEP (DPX1412BM), AEP (DPX1412HM))

< SWITCH > 0 SW911 9-885-012-83 SWITCH (POWER)

8-19 8-19E

The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified.

Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié.

DVP-NS400D

Sony Corporation 9-921-791-11

Network Entertainment Group

– 164 –

2001C0500-1 © 2001. 3 Published by Quality Assurance Dept.